2014 Legacy/Outback Owner’s Manual

MSA5M1404A
2014
A2500BE-A
Issued April 2013 Legacy/Outback
Printed in USA 07/13
2014A

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please
Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza,
P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
TOKYO, JAPAN
see your Subaru dealer for a Product Brochure
detailing all currently available models.
Owner’s Manual
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*
C Copyright 2013 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.

1) Legacy
2) Outback
 1

Warranties How to use this Owner’s Chapter 4: Climate control

Manual This chapter informs you how to operate
& Warranties for U.S.A. the climate control.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual Chapter 5: Audio
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully This chapter informs you how to operate
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the read this manual. To protect yourself and your audio system.
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle, Chapter 6: Interior equipment
warranties: follow the instructions in this manual. This chapter informs you how to operate
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Failure to observe these instructions may interior equipment.
. Emission Control Systems Warranty result in serious injury and damage to your Chapter 7: Starting and operating
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle. This chapter informs you how to start and
This manual is composed of fourteen operate your SUBARU.
All warranty information, including details
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief Chapter 8: Driving tips
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. table of contents, so you can usually tell at This chapter informs you how to drive your
Please read these warranties carefully. a glance if that chapter contains the SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
information you want. plains some safety tips on driving.
& Warranties for Canada Chapter 9: In case of emergency
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags This chapter informs you what to do if you
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
have a problem while driving, such as a
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the
flat tire or engine overheating.
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 10: Appearance care
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
. Emission Control Warranty
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you when you need
All warranty information, including details to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
This chapter informs you about the opera-
of coverage and exclusions, is in the scheduled maintenance and informs you
tion of instrument panel indicators and
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please how to keep your SUBARU running
how to use the instruments and other
read these warranties carefully. properly.
switches.

– CONTINUED –
2

Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION & Abbreviation list

This chapter informs you about the dimen- You may find several abbreviations in this
sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your tions are shown in the following list.
Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the
This chapter informs you about Tire caution is ignored. Abbreviation Meaning
information, Uniform tire quality grading A/C Air conditioner
standards and Reporting safety defects. NOTE A/ELR Automatic/Emergency locking
Chapter 14: Index retractor
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in tions how to make better use of your ABS Anti-lock brake system
this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
something you want to read. AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
& Safety warnings & Safety symbol AT Automatic transmission
You will find a number of WARNINGs, ATF Automatic transmission fluid
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
AWD All-wheel drive
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to CVT Continuously variable trans-
you or others. mission
Please read these safety warnings as well DRL Daytime running light
as all other portions of this manual care- Electronic brake force distri-
EBD bution
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle ELR Emergency locking retractor
safely.
FWD Front-wheel drive
WARNING GAW Gross axle weight
You will find a circle with a slash through it GAWR Gross axle weight rating
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do GPS Global positioning system
result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this GVW Gross vehicle weight
happen”, depending upon the context.
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
 3

Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols Mark Name

HID High intensity discharge
There are some of the symbols you may Seat heater
INT Intermittent see on your vehicle.
LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for For warning and indicator lights, refer to Child restraint lower an-
children “Warning and indicator lights” F23. chorages
LED Light emitting diode
Mark Name Child restraint top tether an-
LSD Limited slip differential
chorages
MIL Malfunction indicator light WARNING
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man- Horn
ganese tricarbonyl
CAUTION
MT Manual transmission
Windshield wiper
OBD On-board diagnostics
Power door lock
RON Research octane number
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive Wiper intermittent

Supplemental restraint sys- Power door unlock

SRS tem Windshield washer
TIN Tire identification number Power window
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
TPMS tem Rear window wiper
Passengers’ windows lock
Rear window washer
Fuel
Lights
Front fog lights
Tail lights, license plate light
and instrument panel illumi-
nation
Hazard warning flasher
– CONTINUED –
4

Mark Name Mark Name Safety precautions when

driving
Headlights Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
Turn signal Windshield defroster WARNING
Rear window defogger/Out- . All persons in the vehicle should
Electronic parking brake side mirror defogger/Wind- fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
shield wiper deicer the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
Cruise control Air recirculation injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
Illumination brightness dent.
Engine oil
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
Engine hood Washer driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
Door lock (access key/trans- belts when the vehicle is moving.
Trunk lid (Legacy) The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
mitter)
System) airbag does not do away
Fan speed Door unlock (access key/ with the need to fasten seatbelts.
transmitter) In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
Trunk lid open (Legacy) or
Instrument panel outlets rear gate unlock (Outback) protection in case of a serious
(access key/transmitter) accident.
Instrument panel outlets and Not wearing a seatbelt increases
foot outlets the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
Foot outlets
 5

. The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety with considerable speed and
considerable speed and force. force and can injure or even kill
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING children, especially if they are
position when the SRS airbag not restrained or improperly re-
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults,
needs enough space for deploy- moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from
ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater.
sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen- FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi- THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
maintaining full vehicle control cle. RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in- DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
move the seat as far back as fants and small children should CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint . Always turn the child safety locks
system which is appropriate for to the “LOCK” position whenever
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
read the following sections. a child rides in the rear seat.
weight. If a child is too big for a Serious injury could result if a
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child child accidentally opened the
belts” F1-14. should sit in the REAR seat and door and fell out. Refer to “Child
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts. safety locks” F2-31.
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
System airbag)” F1-38. children are safer when properly . Always lock the passengers’ win-
restrained in the rear seating dows using the lock switch when
positions than in the front seat- children are riding in the vehicle.
ing positions. Never allow a child Failure to follow this procedure
to stand up or kneel on the seat. could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
. Put children in the REAR seat fer to “Windows” F2-31.
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a . Never leave unattended children,
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys adults or animals in the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –
6

They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-38. . If at any time you suspect that
themselves or others through exhaust fumes are entering the
inadvertent operation of the ve- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, monoxide) checked and corrected as soon
the temperature in a closed ve- as possible. If you must drive
hicle could quickly become high WARNING under these conditions, drive
enough to cause severe or pos- only with all windows fully open.
sibly fatal injuries. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
. Help prevent children, adults or Engine exhaust gas contains closed while driving to prevent
animals from locking themselves carbon monoxide, a colorless exhaust gas from entering the
in the trunk. On hot or sunny and odorless gas which is dan- vehicle.
days, the temperature in the gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
trunk could quickly become high . Always properly maintain the en-
enough to cause death or serious gine exhaust system to prevent & Drinking and driving
heat-related injuries including engine exhaust gas from enter-
brain damage to anyone locked ing the vehicle. WARNING
inside, particularly for small chil- . Never run the engine in a closed
dren. space, such as a garage, except Drinking and then driving is very
. When leaving the vehicle, close for the brief time needed to drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
all windows and lock all doors. the vehicle in or out of it. stream delays your reaction and
Also make certain that the trunk impairs your perception, judgment
. Avoid remaining in a parked and attentiveness. If you drive after
is closed. vehicle for a long time while the drinking – even if you drink just a
engine is running. If that is little – it will increase the risk of
For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
read the following sections. being involved in a serious or fatal
lation fan to force fresh air into accident, injuring or killing yourself,
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the vehicle.
belts” F1-14. your passengers and others. In
. Always keep the front ventilator addition, if you are injured in the
. For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves accident, alcohol may increase the
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. or other obstructions to ensure severity of that injury.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to that the ventilation system al-
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ways works properly.
 7

Please don’t drink and drive. after taking any medications that can driving with others.
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
Drunken driving is one of the most ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If & Car phone/cell phone and
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you have a medical condition that requires driving
hol affects all people differently, you may you to take drugs, please consult with
have consumed too much alcohol to drive your doctor. CAUTION
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
Never drive if you are under the influence
blood is below the legal limit. The safest Do not use a car phone/cell phone
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
thing you can do is never drink and drive. while driving; it may distract your
own health and well-being, we urge you
However if you have no choice but to attention from driving and can lead
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- to an accident. If you use a car
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
tely before getting behind the wheel. phone/cell phone, pull off the road
to those drugs.
and park in a safe place before
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
WARNING may legally be used while driving.
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can
reaction will be delayed and your
delay your reaction time and impair
perception, judgment and attentive-
your perception, judgment and at-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
when tired or sleepy, your, your
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
chances of being involved in a
of being involved in a serious or
serious accident may increase.
fatal accident.
Please do not continue to drive but
If you are taking any drugs, check with
instead find a safe place to rest if you
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
literature that accompanies the medication
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
to determine if the drug you are taking can
yourself before continuing on your journey.
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
When possible, you should share the
– CONTINUED –
8

& Modification of your vehicle in the front passenger’s seat. For further General information
information, consult your veterinarian,
CAUTION local animal protection society or pet & California proposition 65
shop. warning
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU & Tire pressures WARNING
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
performance, safety or durability, tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
and may even violate governmental Driving at high speeds with exces- nents contain or emit chemicals
regulations. In addition, damage or sively low tire pressures can cause known to the State of California to
performance problems resulting the tires to deform severely and to cause cancer and birth defects or
from modification may not be cov- rapidly become hot. A sharp in- other reproductive harm. In addi-
ered under warranties. crease in temperature could cause tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
tread separation, and destruction of certain components of product wear
the tires. The resulting loss of contain or emit chemicals known to
& Driving with pets vehicle control could lead to an the State of California to cause
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your accident. cancer and birth defects or other
driving and distract your attention from reproductive harm.
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, Check and, if necessary, adjust the
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown pressure of each tire (including the spare)
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or at least once a month and before any long & California Perchlorate Advi-
your passengers. Besides, the pets can journey. sory
be hurt under these situations. It is also for Check the tire pressure when the tires are Certain vehicle components such as air-
their own safety that pets should be cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- tire pressures to the values shown on the keyless entry transmitter batteries may
strain a pet with a special traveling tire placard. For detailed information, refer contain perchlorate material. Special
harness which can be secured to the rear to “Tires and wheels” F11-28. handling may apply for service or vehicle
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
which can be secured to the rear seat by hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
 9

& Noise from under the vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
NOTE . How fast the vehicle was traveling.
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours These data can help provide a better
after the engine is turned off. However, understanding of the circumstances in
this does not indicate a malfunction. which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
This noise is caused by the operation EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
of the fuel evaporation leakage check- only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
ing system and the operation is normal. no data are recorded by the EDR under
The noise will stop after approximately normal driving conditions and no personal
15 minutes. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
& Event data recorder parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
This vehicle is equipped with an event personally identifying data routinely ac-
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of quired during a crash investigation.
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an To read data recorded by an EDR, special
airbag deployment or hitting a road ob- equipment is required, and access to the
stacle, data that will assist in understand- vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
The EDR is designed to record data such as law enforcement, that have the
related to vehicle dynamics and safety special equipment, can read the informa-
systems for a short period of time, typically tion if they have access to the vehicle or
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this the EDR.
vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-7)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-41)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-43)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-46)
5) Moonroof (page 2-39)
6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars
(page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-6)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-30)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Fog light switch (page 3-44)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
12) Towing hook (page 9-14)
 13
1) Rear window defogger switch
(page 3-49)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-31)
4) Towing hook (page 9-14)
5) Tie-down holes (page 9-14)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-35)
7) Rear gate (page 2-37)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-47)
9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-48)

– CONTINUED –
14

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-33)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-14)
3) Center console (page 6-6)
4) Front seat (page 1-2)
5) Rear seat (page 1-9)
 15
1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-35)
2) Cargo area light (page 6-3)
3) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-19)
4) Cargo area cover (page 6-15)

– CONTINUED –
16
1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-21)/Select lever
(AT and CVT) (page 7-24)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio (page 5-1)
4) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system)
5) Multi function display (page 3-33)
6) Glove box (page 6-6)
7) Accessory power outlet (page 6-10)
8) Cup holder (page 6-8)
 17

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-6)

2) Electronic parking brake switch
(page 7-37)
3) Hill Holder switch (page 7-39)
4) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-35)
5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-34)
6) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-63)
7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-44)
8) Light control switch (page 3-41)
9) Audio control buttons (page 5-37)
10) Combination meter (page 3-7)
11) Cruise control (page 7-41)
12) Shift paddle (page 7-27)
13) Wiper control lever (page 3-45)
14) Horn (page 3-65)
15) SRS airbag (page 1-38)
16) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-36)
17) Fuse box (page 11-42)
18) Hood lock release knob (page 11-7)
19) Power windows (page 2-31)

– CONTINUED –
18

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-45)
2) Mist (page 3-46)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-47)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-48)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-47)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-46)
7) Light control switch (page 3-41)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-44)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-41)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-42)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-43)
 19

& Combination meter 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
! U.S. spec. models (type A) 2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

– CONTINUED –
20

! U.S. spec. models (type B) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-16)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
 21

! Except U.S. spec. models (type A) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

– CONTINUED –
22

! Except U.S. spec. models (type B) 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-10)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-33)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-16)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-11)
 23

& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

Mark Name Page / Brake system warning 3-21 High beam indicator 3-31
light light
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
Hill Holder indicator 3-23 Front fog light indicator 3-32
light light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-13
seatbelt warning light Door open warning light Cruise control indicator
(if equipped) 3-23 light 3-32
SRS airbag system 3-15
warning light Door open indicator Cruise control set indi-
light 3-23 cator light 3-32
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in- 3-16
dicator light Low fuel warning light 3-23 Headlight indicator light 3-32
Coolant temperature
low indicator light (if All-Wheel Drive warn- Low tire pressure
equipped)/Coolant tem- 3-16 ing light (AT and CVT 3-24 warning light (U.S. 3-18
perature high warning models) spec. models)
light (if equipped)
Vehicle Dynamics Con- Front passenger’s fron-
trol warning light/Vehi- 3-24 / tal airbag ON indicator 3-15
Charge warning light 3-17 cle Dynamics Control light
operation indicator light
Front passenger’s fron-
Oil pressure warning 3-17 Vehicle Dynamics Con- / tal airbag OFF indicator 3-15
light trol OFF indicator light 3-25 light

Engine low oil level 3-18 Access key warning Shift-up indicator 3-30
warning light light (if equipped) 3-25

AT OIL TEMP warning Windshield washer fluid 3-23

light (AT and CVT mod- 3-18 Security indicator light 3-30 warning light
els)

/ ABS warning light 3-20 Turn signal indicator 3-31

lights
24

Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-25
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-26
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only models Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-30
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming* Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-29
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light ON/OFF OFF 2-25
illumination
Keyless access* Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-9
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-17
Door unlock selection function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-19
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-21
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-49
for models with the automatic defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation
climate control system
Map light/Dome light/Cargo Operation of map light/Dome light/Cargo OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-3
area light area light OFF delay timer
Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
function
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 3-13
 25

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/ Min/Low/Mid/Max Normal 3-41
off headlights

*: If equipped
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-25

1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat (if equipped) .................................... 1-3 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Power seat (if equipped) ...................................... 1-4 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-26
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-28
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-8 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Rear seats............................................................ 1-9 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Reclining the seatback (Outback)........................ 1-10 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-31
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-11 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-33
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-35
Armrest ............................................................. 1-14
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-14 System airbag)................................................ 1-38
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-14
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-15 system ............................................................ 1-39
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor Components ...................................................... 1-45
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-15
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system, SRS
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-16 side airbag and SRS curtain airbag .................. 1-48
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-16 System operation............................................... 1-53
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-22 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-65
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-23 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-67
System monitors ................................................ 1-24 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-68
System servicing................................................ 1-24
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
WARNING sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Never adjust the seat while driv- serious internal injury or death.
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury. . The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are not in the
sure the hands and feet of rear proper position when the SRS
seat passengers or cargo are airbag deploys could suffer very
clear of the adjusting mechan- serious injuries. Because the
ism. SRS airbag needs enough space
. After adjusting the seat, push it for deployment, the driver should
slightly to make sure it is se- always sit upright and well back WARNING
curely locked. If the seat is not in the seat as far from the steer- Put children in the rear seat properly
securely locked, it may move or ing wheel as practical while still restrained at all times. The SRS
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control airbag deploys with considerable
properly. and the front passenger should speed and force and can injure or
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as even kill children, especially if they
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well are not restrained or improperly
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. restrained. Because children are
accident. lighter and weaker than adults, their
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- risk of being injured from deploy-
straint when the occupant sits ment is greater. Consequently, we
well back and upright in the seat. strongly recommend that ALL chil-
To reduce the risk of sliding dren (including those in child seats
under the seatbelt in a collision, and those that have outgrown child
the front seatbacks should be restraint devices) sit in the REAR
always used in the upright posi- seat properly restrained at all times
tion while the vehicle is running. in a child restraint device or in a
If the front seatbacks are not seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-3

for the child’s age, height and & Manual seat (if equipped)
weight.
! Forward and backward adjustment
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly WARNING
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi- To prevent the passenger from slid- Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
tions. For instructions and precau- ing under the seatbelt in the event of the desired position. Then release the
tions concerning child restraint sys- a collision, always put the seatback lever and try to move the seat back and
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- in the upright position while the forth to make sure that it is securely locked
tems” F1-25. vehicle is in motion. Also, do not into place.
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.

– CONTINUED –
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s & Power seat (if equipped)
seat)
! Driver’s seat

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when The height of the seat can be adjusted by
the lever is pulled. When operating the moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
reclining lever to return the seatback, hold up or down.
the seatback lightly so that it may be
raised back gradually.

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-5
backward. During forward/backward ad- ! Front passenger’s seat (if . Before adjusting the seat, make
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust equipped) sure that cargo or the hands and
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
feet of rear seat passengers are
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
clear of the adjusting mechan-
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up ism.
or push down the front end of the control . Never retrieve the seat position
switch. while driving to avoid loss of
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control vehicle control and personal in-
switch jury.
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch. . Perform the seat position retrie-
4) Seat height control switch val before driving. Be sure to
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push confirm that the select lever is
down the rear end of the control switch. in the “P” position, and the
5) Lumbar support control switch parking brake is applied, when
To increase lower back support, push the adjusting the seat position. Do
front side of the switch. To decrease 1) Seat position forward/backward con- not drive until the retrieval of the
lower back support, push the rear side of trol switch
the switch.
seat position is complete.
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or . When retrieving a registered seat
backward. position, make sure the hands,
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control feet and possessions of rear seat
switch passengers are clear of the seat
To adjust the angle of the seatback, adjusting mechanism.
move the control switch.
. When any unusual conditions or
! Memory function (driver’s seat — if malfunctions occur during the
equipped) retrieval of the seat position, stop
the retrieval of the seat position
WARNING by performing any of the follow-
ing procedures.
. Never adjust the seat while driv- – Operate any of the power seat
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con- switches
trol and personal injury.
– Press the “SET” button
– CONTINUED –
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– Press button “1” or “2”

Some of your desired seat positions can

be registered. Register the seat position
with button “1” or “2” or each of the access
keys and retrieve the seat position.
The following seat positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press 2. While holding the access key and
! Registration of seat position with and hold the desired button “1” or “2”. pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ”
button “1” or “2” 3. The chirp sound sounds once, and the button of the access key.
1. Adjust the seat position under the seat position is registered. 3. The chirp sound sounds once, and the
following conditions. seat position is registered.
. The parking brake is applied. ! Registration of seat position with
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/ each access key ! Retrieval of seat position regis-
“OFF” position. 1. Adjust the seat position under the tered with button “1” or “2”
. The select lever is in the “P” posi- following conditions.
tion. . The parking brake is applied. WARNING
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/ Be sure to press the correct button
“OFF” position. to retrieve your registered seat
. The select lever is in the “P” posi- position. If the seat position is not
tion. optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-7

driver’s door is opened, the registered NOTE

seat position can be retrieved even if . If the registered seat position cannot
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or be retrieved after performing the pre-
“OFF” position. vious procedures, try the following
procedures.
! Retrieval of the seat position (1) Press the “SET” button on the
registered with access key driver’s door.
1. Hold the registered access key. (2) Press the “ ” button on the
access key or the door lock button
to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” disabled, the seat position cannot be
position. retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
2. While the select lever is in the “P” handle. However, the seat position can
position and the parking brake is applied, still be retrieved by pressing the “ ”
press button “1” or “2”. button on the access key. For informa-
3. The chirp sound sounds and the seat tion about how to enable/disable the
moves to the registered position. keyless access function, refer to “Dis-
4. When the seat moves to the registered abling keyless access function” F2-17.
position, the chirp sound sounds. 2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing . If a new position is registered for the
the “ ” button or gripping the door same access key, the previously regis-
handle. tered seat position is deleted.
NOTE
3. Open the driver’s door.
. If a new position is registered for the ! Clearing the registered seat
same button, the previously registered 4. The chirp sound sounds and the seat
position with access key
seat position is deleted. moves to the registered position.
5. When the seat moves to the registered 1. Close the driver’s door.
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered seat position is not deleted. position, the chirp sound sounds. 2. While holding the access key and
. When the button “1” or “2” is pressing the “SET” button, press the “ ”
pressed within 45 seconds after the button on the access key.

– CONTINUED –
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

3. The chirp sound sounds, and the To remove: Seat heater (if equipped)
registered seat position is cleared. While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
& Head restraint adjustment To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.

WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
1) Head restraint you must reinstall all head re-
2) Release button straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
Both the driver’s seat and the front
. All occupants, including the dri-
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
ver, should not operate a vehicle
restraints.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
The head restraint should be adjusted so head restraints are placed in their
that the center of the head restraint is proper positions in order to mini-
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. mize the risk of neck injury in the
To raise: event of a crash.
Pull the head restraint up. 1) HIGH – Rapid heating
To lower: 2) LOW – Normal heating
Push the head restraint down while 3) OFF – Off
pressing the release button on the top of A) Left-hand side
the seatback. B) Right-hand side
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-9

The seat heater operates when the igni- . Do not put anything on the seat Rear seats
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” which insulates against heat,
position. such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
To turn on the seat heater, press the
seat heater to overheat.
“LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the tempera-
ture. NOTE
Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause Use of the seat heater for a long period
the seat to heat up quicker. of time while the engine is not running
To turn off the seat heater, slightly press can cause battery discharge.
the opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle, WARNING
be sure to turn the switch off.
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
CAUTION straint when the occupant sits well
. There is a possibility that people back and upright in the seat. Do not
with delicate skin may suffer put cushions or any other materials
slight burns even at low tempera- between occupants and seatbacks
tures if they use the seat heater or seat cushions. If you do so, the
for a long period of time. When risk of sliding under the lap belt and
using the heater, always be sure of the lap belt sliding up over the
to warn the persons concerned. abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.

– CONTINUED –
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

& Reclining the seatback (Out- cargo area cover when you re-
back) cline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover (Outback – if
equipped)” F6-15.

WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback WARNING
because it could tumble forward and
To prevent the passenger from slid-
injure passengers in the event of a
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
sudden stop or accident.
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Pull the lever and adjust the seatback to
the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
CAUTION seatback is securely locked into place.
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-11

& Folding down the rear seat- move out from the cargo area,
back which could cause serious injury
or death.
WARNING . After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
. When you fold down the seat- place all of the seatbelts and the
back, check that there are no tab attached to the seat cushion
passengers or objects on the above the seat cushion. Also,
rear seat. Not doing so creates make certain that the shoulder
a risk of injury or property da- belts are fully visible.
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride CAUTION
1) Release lever
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring. 2. Pull the release lever on the side that
may result in serious injury or you want to fold down.
death. Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down. 3. Fold the seatback down.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent To return the seatback to its original
them from being thrown around ! Legacy position, raise the seatback until it locks
inside the vehicle and causing To fold down the seatback, perform the into place and make sure that it is securely
serious injury during a sudden following procedure. locked.
stop, a sudden steering maneu- 1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening
ver or a rapid acceleration. the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-20 or “To open
. When you return the seatback to the trunk lid from inside” F2-35.
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
– CONTINUED –
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats

! Outback & Head restraint adjustment ! Rear window side seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.

WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release you must reinstall all head re- 1) Head restraint
lever and then fold the seatback down. straints to protect vehicle occu- 2) Release button
pants.
To return the seatback to its original To raise:
position, raise the seatback until it locks . All occupants, including the dri-
Pull the head restraint up.
into place and make sure that it is securely ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the To lower:
locked.
head restraints are placed in their Push the head restraint down while
proper positions in order to mini- pressing the release button on the top of
mize the risk of neck injury in the the seatback.
event of a crash. To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-13

that the center of the head restraint is ! Rear center seating position
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower CAUTION
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility. The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.

1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
NOTE Push the head restraint down while
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove pressing the release button on the top of
or install the head restraint without the seatback.
folding down the rear seatback. Fold To remove:
down the rear seatback and then A) When not used (retracted position) While pressing the release button, pull out
remove or install the head restraint. B) When used (extended position) the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the

– CONTINUED –
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

extended position. When the rear center Seatbelts . Put children in the rear seat
seating position is not occupied, lower the properly restrained at all times.
head restraint to improve rearward visibi- & Seatbelt safety tips The SRS airbag deploys with
lity. considerable speed and force
WARNING and can injure or even kill chil-
& Armrest dren, especially if they are not
. All persons in the vehicle should restrained or improperly re-
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE strained. Because children are
the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from
injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. Conse-
event of a sudden stop or acci- quently, we strongly recommend
dent. that ALL children (including
. All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those
to provide full restraint. Loose that have outgrown child re-
fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
preventing or reducing injury. seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is
support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s use a single belt for two or more
top edge. and weight.
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re-
WARNING injury or death could result. straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
To avoid serious injury, passengers . Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times.
must never be allowed to sit on the including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
center armrest while the vehicle is in
of a vehicle that has been in a FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
motion.
serious accident. The entire as- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-15

According to accident statistics, shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to & Emergency Locking Retrac-
children are safer when properly securely place the lap belt as low as tor (ELR)
restrained in the rear seating possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
positions than in the front seat- Locking Retractor (ELR).
ing positions. For instructions cannot be properly positioned, a child
and precautions concerning the restraint system should be used. Never The emergency locking retractor allows
child restraint system, refer to place the shoulder belt under the child’s normal body movement but the retractor
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. arm or behind the child’s back. locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
! Expectant mothers out of the retractor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front & Automatic/Emergency Lock-
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, ing Retractor (A/ELR)
side and curtain airbags deploys. Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
! Infants or small children matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Use a child restraint system that is Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
restraint systems” F1-25. ELR has an additional locking mode,
! Children “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If a child is too big for a child restraint mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat system.
and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the The ALR mode functions as follows.
According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor When the seatbelt is once drawn out
are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt completely and is then retracted even
rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist. that position and the seatbelt cannot be
stand up or kneel on the seat.
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses will be heard which indicate the retractor
the face or neck, move the child closer to functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
the belt buckle to help provide a good retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
– CONTINUED –
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

When securing a child restraint system on instead of across the weaker

the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the abdomen.
seatbelt must be changed over to the . Seatbelts provide maximum re-
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. straint when the occupant sits
For instructions on how to install the child well back and upright in the seat.
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to To reduce the risk of sliding
“Installing child restraint systems with A/ under the seatbelt in a collision,
ELR seatbelt” F1-28. the front seatbacks should be
When the child restraint system is re- always used in the upright posi-
moved, make sure that the retractor is tion while the vehicle is running.
restored to the Emergency Locking Re- If the front seatbacks are not
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat- used in the upright position in a
belt to retract fully. collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will WARNING
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime increase, and both can result in Never place the shoulder belt under
serious internal injury or death. the arm or behind the back. If an
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and . Do not put cushions or any other accident occurs, this can increase
chime” F3-13. materials between occupants the risk or severity of injury.
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
& Fastening the seatbelt If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap CAUTION
WARNING belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
. Never use a belt that is twisted or in serious internal injury or become very hot in a vehicle that
reversed. In an accident, this can death. has been closed up in sunny weath-
increase the risk or severity of er; they could burn an occupant. Do
injury. not touch such hot parts until they
. Keep the lap belt as low as cool.
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-17

! Front seatbelts until you hear a click. ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
1. Adjust the seat position: belt anchor height
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the shoulder belt. The shoulder belt anchor height should be
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible adjusted to the position best suited for the
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again. on your hips, not on your waist. driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the release button and slide the
anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it
is locked in place.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

– CONTINUED –
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

WARNING ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt on Outback)
When wearing the seatbelts, make 1. Sit well back in the seat.
sure the shoulder portion of the
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
webbing does not pass over your
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
anchor to a lower position. Placing
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
the shoulder belt over the neck may
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
result in neck injury during sudden
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
braking or in a collision.
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

Push the button on the buckle. until you hear a click.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-19

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback

WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector’s tongue
2) Connector (tongue) pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
3) Connector (buckle) cially when inserting the connec- tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),
4) Center seatbelt buckle tor’s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.

– CONTINUED –
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

retractor.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the 4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure
recess of the ceiling. that the “ ” mark on the connector
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate 3. After confirming that the webbing is not (tongue) and the “ ” mark on the buckle
from the slot in the recess by pulling the twisted, insert the connector (tongue) face outwards.
connector (tongue) plate. attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard. If the belt stops before reaching
the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-21

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it ! Unfastening the seatbelt

clicks.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

Push the release button of the center object into the slot in the connector
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to (buckle) on the right-hand side and push
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as unfasten the seatbelt. it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
low as possible on your hips, not on your disconnect from the buckle.
waist.

– CONTINUED –
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. CAUTION

You should hold the webbing end and CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
guide it back into the retractor while it is oils, chemicals and particularly
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in battery acid.
up the seatbelt too quickly.
the recess and then insert the connector
Otherwise, the metal tongue . Never attempt to make modifica-
(tongue) plate into the slot.
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent
resulting in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-23

Front seatbelt pretensioners result, the belt restrains the driver more tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
effectively. event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor replaced and only by an authorized
detects a certain predetermined amount of SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
force during a frontal collision, the front belt retractor assemblies, use only
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the genuine SUBARU parts.
retractor to take up the slack so that the . If either front seatbelt does not
belt more effectively restrains the front retract or cannot be pulled out due to
seat occupant. a malfunction or activation of the
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
an operating noise will be heard and a dealer as soon as possible.
small amount of smoke will be released. . If the front seatbelt assembly or
These occurrences are normal and not surrounding area has been damaged,
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner) fire in the vehicle. as possible.
2) Lap belt pretensioner . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been you to explain to the buyer that it has
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt buyer to the contents of this section.
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be cannot be pulled out and retracted and
activated in the event of an accident therefore must be replaced.
involving a moderate to severe frontal
WARNING
collision. NOTE . To obtain maximum protection,
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- occupants should sit in an up-
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple- signed to activate in minor frontal
mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is right position with their seatbelts
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in properly fastened. Refer to “Seat-
located at the base of the center pillar. roll-over accidents.
Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belts” F1-14.
. The driver’s and passenger’s seat-
belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in belt pretensioners and frontal airbag . Do not modify, remove or strike
the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level operate simultaneously. the front seatbelt assemblies or
of frontal collision force is detected. As a . Pretensioners are designed to func- surrounding area. This could

– CONTINUED –
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners

result in accidental activation of & System servicing work performed by your authorized
the seatbelt pretensioners or SUBARU dealer.
could make the system inopera- WARNING
tive, possibly resulting in serious
injury. Seatbelt pretensioners . When discarding a seatbelt re- NOTE
have no user-serviceable parts. tractor assembly or scrapping If the front part of the vehicle is
For required servicing of front the entire vehicle damaged by a damaged in an accident to the extent
seatbelt assembly equipped with collision, consult your SUBARU that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
seatbelt pretensioners, see your dealer. operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
nearest SUBARU dealer. . Tampering with or disconnecting as soon as possible.
. When discarding front seatbelt the system’s wiring could result
retractor assemblies or scrap- in accidental activation of the
ping the entire vehicle due to seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-
collision damage or for other bag or could make the system
reasons, consult your SUBARU inoperative, which may result in
dealer. serious injury. Do not use elec-
trical test equipment on any
circuit related to the seatbelt
& System monitors pretensioner and airbag sys-
A diagnostic system continually monitors tems. For required servicing of
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner the seatbelt pretensioner, consult
while the vehicle is being driven. The your nearest SUBARU dealer.
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the airbag system. Therefore,
if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt CAUTION
pretensioner, the SRS airbag system The front sub sensors are located in
warning light will illuminate. For details, both front fenders and the airbag
refer to “SRS airbag system monitors” F1- control module including the impact
65. sensors is located under the center
console. If you need service or
repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have the
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-25

& Precautions against vehicle Child restraint systems tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
modification Children could be endangered in an
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if accident if their child restraints are not
you want to install any accessory parts to properly secured in the vehicle. When
your vehicle. installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION
According to accident statistics, children
Do not perform any of the following are safer when properly restrained in the
modifications. Such modifications rear seating positions than in the front
can interfere with proper operation seating positions.
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
. Attachment of any equipment require that infants and small children be
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, restrained in an approved child restraint
skid plate, etc.) other than genu- system at all times while the vehicle is
ine SUBARU accessory parts to Infants and small children should always moving.
the front end. be placed in an infant or child restraint
. Modification of the suspension system in the rear seat while riding in the
system or front end structure. vehicle.
. Installation of a tire of different You should use an infant or child restraint
size and construction from the system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
tires specified on the vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
placard attached to the door cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
pillar or specified for individual your vehicle and is appropriate for the
vehicle models in this Owner’s child’s age and size.
Manual.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
– CONTINUED –
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

WARNING WARNING & Where to place a child re-

straint system
Never let a passenger hold a child Children should be properly re- The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
on his or her lap while the vehicle is strained at all times. Never allow a recommendations on where to place a
moving. The passenger cannot pro- child to stand up, or to kneel on any child restraint system in your vehicle.
tect the child from injury in a colli- seat. Unrestrained children will be
sion, because the child will be thrown forward during sudden stop
caught between the passenger and or in an accident and can be injured
objects inside the vehicle. Addition- seriously.
ally, holding a child in your lap or Additionally, children standing up or
arms in the front seat exposes that kneeling on or in front of the front
child to another serious danger. seat are exposed another serious
Since the SRS airbag deploys with danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
considerable speed and force, the ploys with considerable speed and
child could be injured or even killed. force, the child could be injured or
even killed.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-27

installing a child restraint system. WARNING

Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection Put children in the rear seat properly
of the seat cushion. restrained at all times. The SRS
In this seating position, you should use airbag deploys with considerable
only a child restraint system that has a speed and force and can injure or
bottom base that fits snugly against the even kill children, especially if they
contours of the seat cushion and can be are not restrained or improperly
securely retained using the seatbelt. restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
C: Rear seat, center seating position risk of being injured from deploy-
Installing a child restraint system is not ment is greater.
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- For that reason, be sure to secure
belt and an upper anchorage (tether ALL types of child restraint devices
anchorage) are provided in this position. (including forward facing child WARNING
Some types of child restraints might not be seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
able to be secured firmly due to projection SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
You should choose a restraint de- EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
of the seat cushion. vice which is appropriate for the
In this seating position, you should use SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
child’s age, height and weight. Ac- R E A R WA R D F A C I N G C H I L D
only a child restraint system that has a cording to accident statistics, chil-
bottom base that fits snugly against the SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
dren are safer when properly re- SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
contours of the seat cushion and can be strained in the rear seating posi-
securely retained using the seatbelt. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
tions than in the front seating posi- THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
tions. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.

– CONTINUED –
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- CAUTION
system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
When you install a child restraint
WARNING system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
. Child restraint systems and seat- installing the child restraint system,
belts can become hot in a vehicle check to ensure that it is held
that has been closed up in sunny securely in position. If it is not held
weather; they could burn a small tight and secure, the danger of your
child. Check the child restraint child suffering personal injury in the
system before you place a child event of an accident may be in-
in it. creased.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. ! Installing a rearward facing child
Unsecured child restraint sys- restraint
Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
(weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
cle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacture’s statement of com-
pliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system 1. Place the child restraint system in the
is compatible with the vehicle in which it rear seating position.
will be used.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-29

or around the child restraint system functions as ALR.

following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.

8. To remove the child restraint system,

6. Push and pull the child restraint press the release button on the seatbelt
system forward and side to side to check buckle and allow the belt to retract
that it is firmly secured in the center of the completely. The belt will return to the
seat. Sometimes a child restraint can be ELR mode.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. more firmly secured by pushing it down
5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode into the seat cushion and then tightening
WARNING
is recommended by the manufacturer’s the seatbelt.
instructions supplied with the child re- 7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
straint system, perform the following pro- mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
cedure. of the belt to confirm that it cannot be PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the pulled out (ALR properly functioning). RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
retractor to change the retractor over from TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) SRS AIRBAG.
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
– CONTINUED –
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before seating a child in the child
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and left and right to verify that it is
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) firmly secured in the center of the seat.
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Sometimes a child restraint can be more
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind firmly secured by pushing it down into the
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, seat cushion and then tightening the
clicks will be heard which indicate the seatbelt.
retractor functions as ALR. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
1. Place the child restraint system in the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
rear seating position. properly functioning).
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-31

tether anchorages” F1-35. & Installing a booster seat

WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Legacy
Unsecured child restraint sys-
9. To remove the child restraint system, tems can be thrown around in-
press the release button on the seatbelt side of the vehicle in a sudden
buckle and allow the belt to retract stop, turn or accident; they can
completely. The belt will return to the strike and injure vehicle occu-
ELR mode. pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Outback
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
– CONTINUED –
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

CAUTION following the instructions provided by its . Never place the shoulder belt
manufacturer. under the child’s arm or behind
When you install a child restraint 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle the child’s back. If an accident
system, follow the manufacturer’s until you hear a click. Take care not to occurs, this can increase the risk
instructions supplied with it. After twist the seatbelt. or severity of injury to the child.
installing the child restraint system, Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
check to ensure that it is held across the center of child’s shoulder and order to provide full restraint.
securely in position. If it is not held that the lap belt is positioned as low as Loose fitting belts are not as
tight and secure, the danger of your possible on the child’s hips. effective in preventing or redu-
child suffering personal injury in the cing injury.
event of an accident may be in-
. Place the lap belt as low as
creased.
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
4. To remove the booster seat, press the result in neck injury during sud-
release button on the seatbelt buckle and den braking or in a collision.
allow the belt to retract.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The WARNING
child should sit well back on the booster
seat. . Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
increase the risk or severity of
or around the booster seat and the child
injury to the child.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-33

& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
Some types of child restraint systems can
. Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
weather; they could burn a small dedicated anchorages provided on the
child. Check the child restraint vehicle body.
system before you place a child The lower and tether anchorages are
in it. sometimes referred to as the LATCH
. Do not leave an unsecured child system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
restraint system in your vehicle. CHildren). anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
Unsecured child restraint sys- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
tems can be thrown around in- modating such child restraint systems.
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
securely in position. If it is not held installing a child restraint system only on

– CONTINUED –
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

the rear seat window-side seating posi- rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate
tions. For each window-side seating posi- the positions of the lower anchorages
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom. the cover of seatback bottom.

CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
Outback securely in position. If it is not held
The tether anchorages (upper an- tight and secure, the danger of your
chorages) are provided for all the seating child suffering personal injury in the
positions (center and both window-side event of an accident may be in-
ones) of the rear seat. creased.
Legacy

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the Peel off the anchorage cover from the
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-35

selected side of the rear seatback to

expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.

2. If your child restraint system is of a 4. Before seating a child in the child

flexible attachment type (which uses restraint system, try to move it back and
tether belts to connect the child restraint forth and left and right to verify that it is
1. While following the instructions sup- system properly to the lower anchorages), firmly secured in the center of the seat.
plied by the child restraint system manu- while pushing the child restraint into the 5. To remove the child restraint system,
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the system firmly by taking up the slack in the
hooks are connected, make sure the belt. If you have any question concerning this
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. 3. Connect the top tether hook to the type of child restraint system, ask your
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the SUBARU dealer.
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages” & Top tether anchorages
F1-35. Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
– CONTINUED –
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

instructions by the child restraint system ! Outback ! To hook the top tether
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional CAUTION
stability by offering another connection . Always remove the head restraint
between a child restraint system and the when mounting a child restraint
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top system with a top tether. Failure
tether whenever one is required or avail- to do so may prevent the top
able. tether from being fastened
! Tether anchorage location tightly.
. Avoid placing the head restraint
! Legacy
that has been removed in the
passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the in the passenger compartment in
right, center and left positions, are already a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
installed on the rear edge of the roof.
Open the cover flap to use each ancho- ! Legacy
rage. 1. Fold down the rear seatback for the
window side seating position. Refer to
“Folding down the rear seatback” F1-11.

Three tether anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-37

3. Open the cover flaps to use the ! Outback

anchorages.

2. Remove the head restraint at the

seating position where the child restraint 1. Remove the head restraint at the
system has been installed with the seat- 4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child seating position where the child restraint
belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head restraint system to the appropriate upper system has been installed with the seat-
restraint while pressing the release button. anchorage. belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
Store the head restraint in the trunk. 5. Tighten the top tether securely. restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the cargo area.

– CONTINUED –
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

4. Tighten the top tether securely. *SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for Supplemental Re-
straint System. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seat-
ing position. The supplemental restraint
2. Open the cover flaps to use the system (SRS) consists of six airbags.
anchorages. The configurations are as follows:
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child and precautions concerning the seatbelt
restraint system to the appropriate upper pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
anchorage. tensioners” F1-23.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-39

& General precautions regard- to help avoid injuries that can and the front passenger should
ing SRS airbag system result when an occupant is not move the seat as far back as
seated in a proper upright posi- possible and sit upright and well
WARNING tion. back in the seat.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. It does not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
bination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protec-
tion in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or WARNING WARNING
death in a crash even when the . The SRS airbags deploy with . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
vehicle has the SRS airbag. considerable speed and force. close to either front door. The
For instructions and precautions Occupants who are out of proper SRS side airbags are stored in
concerning the seatbelt system, position when the SRS airbag both front seat seatbacks next to
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-14. deploys could suffer very serious the door, and they provide pro-
. The SRS side airbag and SRS injuries. Because the SRS airbag tection by deploying rapidly (fas-
curtain airbag are designed only needs enough space for deploy- ter than the blink of an eye) in the
to be a supplement to the primary ment, the driver should always event of a side impact collision.
protection provided by the seat- sit upright and well back in the However, the force of SRS side
belt. They do not eliminate the seat as far from the steering airbag deployment may cause
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also wheel as practical while still injuries if your head or other
important to wear your seatbelt maintaining full vehicle control parts of the body are too close
– CONTINUED –
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

to the SRS side airbag. seatbelt to help avoid injuries could be injured in the event of
. Since your vehicle is equipped that can result when the SRS SRS side airbag deployment.
with SRS curtain airbags, do not airbag contacts an occupant not . Do not place any objects over or
sit or lean unnecessarily close to in proper position such as one near the SRS airbag cover or
the front or rear door on either thrown forward during pre-acci- between you and the SRS airbag.
side. Also, do not put your head, dent braking. If the SRS airbag deploys, these
arms or hands out of the window. Even when properly positioned, objects could interfere with its
The SRS curtain airbags on both there remains a possibility that proper operation and could be
sides of the cabin are stored in an occupant may suffer minor propelled inside the vehicle,
the roof side (between the front injury such as abrasions and causing injury.
pillar and a point over the rear bruises to the face or arms
seat), and they provide protec- because of the SRS airbag de-
tion by deploying rapidly (faster ployment force.
than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact or also a
frontal collision depending on
circumstances. For Outback
models, the SRS curtain airbags
also deploy in the event of a
rollover. However, the force of
its deployment may cause inju-
ries if your head is too close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than WARNING
the blink of an eye – and force to Do not put any objects over the
protect in high speed collisions, steering wheel pad and dashboard.
the force of an airbag can injure WARNING
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
an occupant whose body is too . Do not rest your arm on either these objects could interfere with its
close to SRS airbag. front door or its internal trim. You proper operation and could be pro-
It is also important to wear your
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-41

pelled inside the vehicle, causing other accessory in such a loca-

injury. tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.

WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
WARNING door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
Do not attach accessories to the near the SRS side airbags. In the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the ment, they could be propelled
SRS airbag deploys, those objects dangerously toward the vehicle’s WARNING
could become projectiles that could occupants and cause injuries.
seriously injure vehicle occupants. . Do not attach a hands-free micro- Do not hang coat hangers or other
phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear hooks. If such items were hanging
pillar, the windshield, a side win- on the coat hooks during deploy-
dow, an assist grip, or any other ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
cabin surface that would be near they could cause serious injuries by
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. coming off the coat hooks and being
A hands-free microphone or thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

tain airbags. restraint device or in a seatbelt,

Before hanging clothing on the coat whichever is appropriate for the
hooks, make sure there are no sharp child’s age, height and weight.
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- Secure ALL types of child restraint
ing directly on the coat hooks with- devices (including forward facing
out using hangers. child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
WARNING concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
Put children in the rear seat properly tems” F1-25.
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
WARNING restrained. Because children are
Do not put any kind of cover or lighter and weaker than adults, their
clothes or other objects over either risk of being injured from deploy-
front seatback and do not attach ment is greater.
labels or stickers to the front seat Consequently, we strongly recom-
surface on or near the SRS side mend that ALL children (including
airbag. They could prevent proper those in child seats and those that
deployment of the SRS side airbag, have outgrown child restraint de-
reducing protection available to the vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
front seat’s occupant. restrained at all times in a child
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43

WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.

WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con- WARNING
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child. . Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s

– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

seat facing the side window blems after SRS airbag deploys,
– Wrap his/her arms around the get fresh air promptly.
front seat seatback . A deploying SRS airbag releases
– Put his/her head, arms or hot gas. Occupants could get
other parts of the body out of burned if they come into direct
the window contact with the hot gas.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or NOTE
SRS curtain airbag deployment . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
could injure the child seriously you to explain to the buyer that it is
because his/her head, arms or equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
other parts of the body are too the buyer to the applicable section in
close to the SRS side airbag and/ this Owner’s Manual.
or SRS curtain airbag. . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
. Since your vehicle is also supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
equipped with a front passen- of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children details about restarting of the engine,
aged 12 and under should be refer to “If your vehicle is involved in
placed in the rear seat anyway an accident” F9-23.
and should be properly re-
strained at all times.

CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-45

& Components The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar.

1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag

– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 5) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and 7) Airbag control module (including impact
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) OFF indicator sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
3) SRS airbag system warning light 6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s [Outback])
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-47

– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1) Rear wheel house impact sensor (left- & SUBARU advanced frontal occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
hand side) seated in an appropriate child restraint
2) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) airbag system, SRS side air-
bag and SRS curtain airbag system.
3) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
4) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) For the locations of the driver’s SRS
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
5) Front passenger’s occupant detection frontal airbag, front passenger’s SRS
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
control module frontal airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
6) Center pillar impact sensor (left-hand curtain airbag, refer to “Components” F1-
side) requirements in the amended Federal
45.
7) Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side) Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
8) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side) No. 208. In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
9) Side airbag module (left-hand side) The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
10) Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side) system automatically determines the de- frontal airbags, and SRS curtain airbag
11) Rear wheel house impact sensor (right- ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal depending on circumstances, deploy and
hand side) airbag at the time of deployment as well as supplement the seatbelts by reducing the
12) Side airbag module (right-hand side) whether or not to activate the front impact on the driver’s and front passen-
13) Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if ger’s head and chest.
14) Center pillar impact sensor (right-hand activated, the deployment force of the
side) In a moderate to severe side impact
15) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy- collision, the SRS side airbag on the
side) ment. impacted side of the vehicle deploys
16) Front passenger’s occupant detection Your vehicle has warning labels on the between the occupant and the door panel
system weight sensor driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
17) Front door impact sensor (right-hand beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH the impact to the occupant’s chest and
side) waist.
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning In a moderate to severe side impact
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read impacted side of the vehicle deploys
the instructions on the warning labels and between the occupant and the side
tag. window and supplements the seatbelt by
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU reducing the impact to the occupant’s
advanced frontal airbag system is a head.
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-49
NOTE airbag deploys. This is normal. gaged when you leave your ve-
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt hicle.
pretensioner are not controlled by the CAUTION . Do not place a magnet near the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
tem. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the retractor.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag SUBARU advanced frontal airbag . Do not use front seats with their
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a system from functioning correctly backward-forward position and
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in or cause the system to fail. seatback not being locked into
different ways depending on the severity . Do not apply any strong impact place securely. If any of them are
of impact. to the front passenger’s seat not locked securely, adjust them
such as by kicking. again. For adjusting procedure,
Have the system inspected by your refer to “Manual seat” F1-3
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS . Do not spill liquid on the front (models equipped with manual
airbag system warning light illuminates. passenger’s seat. If liquid is seats only).
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
. Do not remove or disassemble If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
bag
the front passenger’s seat. passenger’s occupant detection system
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag have failed, the SRS airbag system
. Do not install any accessory
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator warning light will illuminate. Have the
(such as an audio amplifier) other
operates in different ways depending on system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
the severity of impact. er immediately if the SRS airbag system
sory under the front passenger’s
The total load on the seat is monitored by seat. warning light illuminates.
the passenger’s occupant detection sys- If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
tem weight sensor under the seat. . Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front may affect the proper function of the
Using the total seat load and seatbelt SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
passenger’s seat.
buckle switch, the occupant detection Have your vehicle inspected at your
system determines whether the front . Do not use the front passenger’s SUBARU dealer.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should or seat with the head restraint re-
moved. ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
should not be inflated.
OFF indicators
The occupant detection system may not . Do not leave any articles on the
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal front passenger’s seat or the Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal seatbelt tongue and buckle en- ON and OFF indicators” F3-15.
– CONTINUED –
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Conditions in which front passen-

WARNING . Do not place any article on the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
seat other than the child occu-
activated
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- pant and a child restraint system.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT . Do not place more than one child
will not be activated when any of the PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE on the seat.
following conditions are met regarding the FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
front passenger’s seat: . Do not install any accessory
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
. The seat is empty. such as a table or TV onto the
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
seatback.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
facing child restraint system and an infant recommended that any forward fa- . Do not store a heavy load in the
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that cing child seat or booster seat be seatback pocket.
follows.) installed in the REAR seat, and that . Do not allow the rear seat occu-
. The seat is equipped with a forward even children who have outgrown a pant to place his/her hands or
facing child restraint system and a small child restraint system be also legs on the front passenger’s
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING seated in the REAR seat. This is seatback, or allow him/her to pull
that follows.) because children sitting in the front the seatback.
. The seat is equipped with a booster passenger’s seat may be killed or
seat and a small child is in the booster severely injured should the front ! If the front passenger’s frontal
seat. (See WARNING that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- airbag ON indicator illuminates
ploy. REAR seats are the safest and the OFF indicator turns off
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
place for children. even when an infant or a small
load for a time exceeding the predeter-
mined monitoring time period. child is in a child restraint sys-
. The seat is occupied by a child who tem (including booster seat)
CAUTION
has outgrown a child restraint system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a When the front passenger’s seat is “OFF” position.
small adult. occupied by a child, observe the 2. Remove the child restraint system
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- following precautions. Failure to do from the seat.
tion system is malfunctioning. so may increase the load on the 3. By referring to the child restraint
front passenger’s seat, activating manufacturer’s recommendations as well
the front passenger’s SRS frontal as the child restraint system installation
airbag even though that seat is procedures in “Child restraint systems”
occupied by a child.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-51

F1-25, correctly install the child restraint the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag ! Conditions in which front passen-
system. system may or may not activate the ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
position and make sure that the front depending on the occupant’s seating will be activated for deployment upon
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator posture. If the front passenger’s SRS impact when any of the following condi-
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. frontal airbag is activated (the ON tions is met regarding the front passen-
indicator remains illuminated while ger’s seat.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated the OFF indicator turns off), take the
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
following actions.
following actions. . When a heavy article is placed on the
. Ensure that no article is placed on
. Ensure that no article is placed on the seat.
the seat other than the occupant.
seat other than the child restraint system . Ensure that there is no article left in
and the child occupant. CAUTION
the seatback pocket.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the When the front passenger’s seat is
seatback pocket. If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
occupied by an adult, observe the
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off
following precautions. Failure to do
sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
so may lessen the load on the front
seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
passenger’s seat, deactivating the
moving the seat back and forth. (Models small adult in the rear seat and im-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
equipped with manual seats only) mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
despite the fact that the seat is
for an inspection. Even if the system
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated occupied by an adult. This may
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
while the OFF indicator turns off after result in personal injury.
recommended that on subsequent trips
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the . Do not allow the rear seat occu-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint rear seat. pant to lift the front passenger’s
system to the rear seat and immediately seat cushion using his/her feet.
Children who have outgrown a child
contact your SUBARU dealer for an restraint system should always wear the . Do not place any article under the
inspection. seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag front passenger ’s seat, or
is deactivated or activated. squeeze any article from behind
NOTE and under the seat. This may lift
When a child who has outgrown a child the seat cushion.
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
– CONTINUED –
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

. Do not squeeze any article be- of the seat. distributors:

tween the front passenger’s seat 3. Ensure that the backward-forward <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
and side trim/pillar, door or cen- position and seatback of front passenger’s of Columbia>
ter console box. This may lift the seat are locked into place securely by
seat cushion. moving the seat back and forth. (Models Subaru of America, Inc.
equipped with manual seats only) Customer Dealer Services Department
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” P.O. Box 6000
OFF indicator illuminates and position and wait 6 seconds to allow the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
the ON indicator turns off even system to complete self-checking. Follow- 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
when the front passenger’s seat ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator <Hawaii>
is occupied by an adult
should illuminate while the OFF indicator Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
This can be caused by the adult incor-
remains off. 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
HI 96819
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ If the OFF indicator still remains illumi- 808-839-2273
“OFF” position. nated while the ON indicator remains off,
2. Ask the front passenger to set the ask the occupant to move to the rear seat <Guam>
seatback to the upright position, sit up and immediately contact your SUBARU Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
straight in the center of the seat cushion, dealer for an inspection. bile
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ ! How to contact the vehicle manu- 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to facturer concerning modifications Guam
the rearmost position. for persons with disabilities that 671-633-2698
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” may affect the advanced airbag
position. system (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
while the ON indicator remains off, take
frame, instrument panel, combination me- 00910
the following actions.
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, 787-793-2828
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. suspension or floor panel can affect the There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
2. Ensure that there is no article, book, operation of the SUBARU advanced air- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
shoe, or other object trapped under the bag system. If you have any questions, in such an area, please contact the
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side you may contact the following SUBARU SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-53

you bought your vehicle. ! SUBARU advanced frontal airbag activation or deactivation condition of the
operation front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
& System operation depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
CAUTION passenger’s occupant detection system
Do not touch the SRS airbag system weight sensor. For this reason, only the
components with bare hands right driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
after deployment. Doing so can the event of a collision, but this does not
cause burns because the compo- mean failure of the system.
nents can be very hot as a result of If the front sub sensors inside both front
deployment. fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predeter-
The SRS airbags can function only when mined amount of force during a frontal
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. collision, the control module sends signals
When the SRS airbag(s) deploy(s), a to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be module or both driver’s and front passen-
heard and some smoke will be released. ger’s modules) instructing the module(s)
These occurrences are a normal result of to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
the deployment. This smoke does not driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
indicate a fire in the vehicle. airbags use dual stage inflators. The two
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending
on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat in the case of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
1) Driver’s side After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
2) Passenger’s side diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
system is designed to determine the ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

not impaired. The time required from the visible damage done to the vehicle ! Examples of the types of acci-
detecting impact to the deflation of the itself. dents in which it is possible that
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter the driver’s/driver’s and front
than the blink of an eye. ! Examples of accident in which
the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front airbag(s) will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most rollover accidents
because deployment of only the driver’s A head-on collision against a thick con-
SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
function on a one-time-only basis. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
SRS airbag deployment depends on the magnitude to the collision described
level of force experienced in the passen- above.
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-55

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).

– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-57

! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are designed not to deploy be activated on the second impact.
dents in which the driver’s/dri- in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its WARNING
frontal airbag(s) is not designed side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. If the vehicle is damaged in an
to deploy in most cases
accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.

! SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag operation

1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
Example: In the case of a double collision, side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
first with another vehicle, then against a deploy independently of each other be-
concrete wall in immediate succession, cause each has its own impact sensor.
once either or both of the driver’s and front Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not deploys independently of the driver’s and

– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags in wheel house impact sensors together deflation of an SRS side airbag after
the steering wheel and instrument panel. sense an impact force above a predeter- deployment is shorter than the blink of
mined level in a side collision, the control an eye.
An impact sensor, which senses impact module causes only the SRS curtain
force, is located in each of the following airbag on the impacted side to inflate. The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
locations. for a while following deployment then
. In the left and right front doors Even if a frontal collision occurs, both right slowly deflates.
. In the left and right center pillars and left curtain airbags will deploy when
the front sensor and the control unit The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
. In the left and right rear wheel houses airbag deploy even when no one occupies
determine that the impact results from an
. In the airbag control module offset frontal collision. the seat on the side on which an impact is
. In the left and right front fenders (only applied.
SRS curtain airbags are designed to The curtain airbags are designed to
deploy when the driver’s frontal airbag The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
deploy when the front sub sensors sense
deploys or the driver’s and passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy in the event
a severe impact.)
frontal airbags deploy in a frontal collision, of an accident involving a moderate to
For Outback models, a rollover sensor is and also when the system determines that severe side impact collision. They are
also located inside the airbag control the collision is an offset frontal collision. basically not designed to deploy in a
module. The curtain airbags are basically designed lesser side impact.
If the impact sensor that is located in the not to deploy when the frontal airbags do The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag control module and one of the not deploy or the system determines that airbag deployment depend on the level of
center pillar impact sensors or front door the collision is other than an offset frontal force experienced in the passenger com-
impact sensors together sense an impact collision. partment during a side impact collision.
force above a predetermined level in a For Outback models, if the rollover sensor That level differs from one type of collision
side collision, the control module causes detects rollover of the vehicle, the control to another, and it may have no bearing on
both the SRS side airbag and curtain module inflates the SRS curtain airbags. the visible damage done to the vehicle
airbag on the impacted side to inflate At this time, the driver’s and front passen- itself.
regardless of whether the rear wheel ger’s seatbelt pretensioners also operate For Outback models, the SRS curtain
house impact sensor on the same side at the same time. airbags are also designed to deploy when
senses an impact. the vehicle is in an extremely inclined
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
If the impact sensor that is located in the immediately starts to deflate. The time state such as during a rollover. They are
airbag control module and one of the rear required from detection of an impact to not designed to deploy in most lesser
inclined state.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-59

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain ! Examples of the types of acci- 2) An offset frontal collision that is severe
airbag are not designed to deploy in most enough to deploy the front airbag.
dents in which the SRS curtain
rear impacts because the SRS side airbag airbag will most likely deploy
and SRS curtain airbag deployment would
not help the occupant in those situations. Legacy models
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
! Example of the type of accident
in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag.

1) A severe side impact near the front seat

or the rear seat.

– CONTINUED –
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

Outback models 1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-61

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Outback) 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.

– CONTINUED –
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
to deploy 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-63

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
unlikely to deploy 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
Legacy models the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

Outback models 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-65

! Examples of the types of acci- ary). (Only the SRS side airbag is immediately followed by another from the
designed not to deploy in most cases) same direction, once the SRS side airbag
dents in which the SRS side
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
airbag and SRS curtain airbag is 3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
not designed to deploy in most the first impact, they will not be activated
cases In the event of accidents like those on the second.
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
in most cases.

SRS airbag system warning light (type A)

1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision impact collision, first with one vehicle and
with another vehicle (moving or station-
– CONTINUED –
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

. Front sub sensor . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

– Right-hand side ger’s side)
– Left-hand side . Front passenger’s occupant detection
. Airbag control module (including im- system weight sensor
pact sensors [all models] and rollover . Front passenger’s occupant detection
sensors [Outback]) control module
. Frontal airbag module . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
– Driver’s side and OFF indicator
– Front passenger’s side . All related wiring
. Center pillar impact sensor
– Right-hand side WARNING
– Left-hand side
If the warning light exhibits any of
SRS airbag system warning light (type B) . Front door impact sensor the following conditions, there may
A diagnostic system continually monitors – Right-hand side be a malfunction in the seatbelt
the readiness of the SRS airbag system – Left-hand side pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
(including front seatbelt pretensioners) . Side airbag module system. Immediately take your vehi-
while the vehicle is being driven. The – Driver’s side cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
SRS airbag system warning light will show – Front passenger’s side to have the system checked. Unless
normal system operation by illuminating . Rear wheel house impact sensor checked and properly repaired, the
for approximately 6 seconds when the – Right-hand side seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” – Left-hand side airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
position. . Curtain airbag module SRS airbags may inflate in a very
– Right-hand side minor collision or not inflate in a
The following components are monitored severe collision), which may in-
by the indicator. – Left-hand side
crease the risk of injury.
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
– Front passenger’s side ing light
. Lap belt pretensioner . No illumination of the warning
– Driver’s side light when the ignition switch is
– Front passenger’s side first turned to the “ON” position
 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-67

. Continuous illumination of the CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are
warning light replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
. Illumination of the warning light If you need service or repair in areas parts.
while driving indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author- NOTE
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your
bag control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& SRS airbag system servicing
and airbag modules are stored in . The front part of the vehicle was
these areas. involved in an accident in which only
WARNING the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
. Under the center console
. When discarding an airbag mod- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
. Inside each front fender frontal airbags did not deploy.
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con- . Steering wheel and column and . The pad of the steering wheel, the
sult your SUBARU dealer. nearby areas cover over the front passenger’s SRS
. Top of the dashboard on front frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
. The SRS airbag has no user- the front pillar to a point over the rear
serviceable parts. Do not use passenger’s side and nearby
areas seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
electrical test equipment on any wise damaged.
circuit related to the SRS airbag . Each front seat and nearby area
. The center pillar, front door, rear
system. For required servicing of . Inside each center pillar wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
the SRS airbag, consult your area near these parts, was involved in
. Inside each front door
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- an accident in which the SRS side
ing with or disconnecting the . In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat) airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
system’s wiring could result in deploy.
accidental inflation of the SRS . Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front
airbag or could make the system and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
inoperative, which may result in side damaged.
serious injury. . Under the rear center seat . The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
– CONTINUED –
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

& Precautions against vehicle . Installation of additional electri- . Attachment of any equipment
modification cal/electronic equipment such as (side steps or side sill protectors,
a mobile two-way radio on or etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
WARNING near the SRS airbag system accessory parts to the side body.
components and/or wiring
To avoid accidental activation of the . Modifications on or inside the Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
system or rendering the system front door panels for the purpose you want to install any accessory parts on
inoperative, which may result in of a speaker replacement or your vehicle.
serious injury, no modifications sound insulation
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes the following modifi- CAUTION
cations.
Do not perform any of the following
. Installation of custom steering modifications. Such modifications
wheels can interfere with proper operation
. Attachment of additional trim of the SRS airbag system.
materials to the dashboard . Attachment of any equipment
. Installation of custom seats (bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
. Replacement of seat fabric or plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
leather than genuine SUBARU acces-
sory parts.
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat . Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Attachment of a hands-free mi-
crophone or any other accessory . Installation of a tire of different
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a size and construction from the
rear pillar, the windshield, a side tires specified on the vehicle
window, an assist grip, or any placard attached to the driver’s
other cabin surface that would be door pillar or specified for indivi-
near a deploying SRS curtain dual vehicle models in this Own-
airbag er’s Manual.
 Keys and doors

Keys ..................................................................... 2-3 Locking the doors.............................................. 2-20

Key number plate ................................................ 2-3 Unlocking the doors .......................................... 2-20
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) ........................... 2-20 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-4
Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4 Unlocking the rear gate (Outback) ...................... 2-20
Security ID plate (models without “keyless Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-21
access with push-button start system”) ............. 2-5 Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-21
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-5 Selecting audible signal operation (models
Key replacement (models without “keyless without “keyless access with push-button start
access with push-button start system”) ............. 2-5 system”).......................................................... 2-21
Door locks ........................................................... 2-6 Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-21
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-6 Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-21
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7 Alarm system ..................................................... 2-25
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-8 System alarm operation ..................................... 2-25
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-8 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-25
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-26
Keyless access with push-button start Arming the system ............................................ 2-26
system (Outback – if equipped) ...................... 2-9
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-29
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system ..................................................... 2-10 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-29
Safety precautions ............................................. 2-11 Passive arming (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-29
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”
entry function................................................... 2-13 Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-30
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-17 Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-30
Warning chimes and warning light ...................... 2-17 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-31
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-17 Windows............................................................. 2-31
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-18 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-32
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-18 Power window operation by passengers............. 2-34
Replacing access key......................................... 2-18 Initialization of power window ............................ 2-34
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-19 Trunk lid (Legacy) .............................................. 2-35
Certification for remote keyless entry system...... 2-20 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-35
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-35
Keys and doors

Internal trunk lid release handle.......................... 2-36 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-39
Rear gate (Outback) ........................................... 2-37 Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-39
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-40
 Keys and doors/Keys 2-3

Keys . Ignition switch & Key number plate

. Driver’s door
NOTE . Glove box
For models with “keyless access with . Trunk lid (Legacy)
push-button start system”, refer to The valet key fits only the ignition switch
“Keyless access with push-button start and door locks. You can keep the trunk
system (Outback – if equipped)” F2-9. and glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition 1) Key number plate
switch from the “ON” position to the 2) Security ID plate (models without “key-
less access with push-button start sys-
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby tem”)
stopping the engine.
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
1) Master key another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
2) Submaster key number is needed to make a replacement
3) Valet key key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
4) Key number plate
vehicle.
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your To make replacement keys, the security ID
vehicle: is also needed. Refer to “Key replacement
(models without “keyless access with
Master key, submaster key and valet key. push-button start system”)” F2-5.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
2-4 Keys and doors/Immobilizer

Immobilizer switch and turned to the “ON” position NOTE

(models without “keyless access with . To protect your vehicle from theft,
push-button start system”) please pay close attention to the fol-
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from lowing security precautions:
If the transmitted ID code matches the ID
starting the engine. Only keys registered – Never leave your vehicle unat-
code registered in the immobilizer system,
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can tended with its keys inside.
the system allows the engine to be
be used to operate your vehicle. started. Since the ID code is transmitted – Before leaving your vehicle,
and acted upon almost instantly, the close all windows and the moon-
For models with “keyless access with roof, and lock the doors (all models)
push-button start system”: immobilizer system does not impede
normal starting of the engine. and rear gate (Outback).
If you press the push-button ignition – Do not leave spare keys or any
switch when carrying an unregistered If the engine does not start, perform either
record of your key number in the
access key, the switch will not turn to the of the following procedures.
vehicle.
“ON” position and the engine will not start. . Perform the procedure described in . The vehicle has a maintenance-free
“Starting engine” F9-21 (models with type immobilizer system.
For models without “keyless access “keyless access with push-button start
with push-button start system”: system”).
Even if an unregistered key fits into the . Pull out the key once before trying & Certification for immobilizer
ignition switch and can be turned to the again (models without “keyless access system
“START” position, the engine will auto- with push-button start system”). Refer to . For models with “keyless access
matically stop after several seconds. “Ignition switch (models without push- with push-button start system”:
Each immobilizer key contains a trans- button start system)” F3-3. Refer to “Certification for keyless access
ponder in which the key’s ID code is with push-button start system” F-10.
stored. The transponder transmits the
CAUTION
. For models without “keyless access
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s . Do not place the key under direct with push-button start system”:
receiver under any of the following condi- sunlight or anywhere it may – U.S.-spec. models
tions. become hot.
. When an access key is detected within . Do not get the key wet. If the key CAUTION
the operating range of the antennas inside gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
the vehicle (models with “keyless access immediately. FCC WARNING
with push-button start system”) Changes or modifications not ex-
. When a key is inserted into the ignition pressly approved by the party re-
 Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-5

sponsible for compliance could void & Security ID plate (models The security ID is also needed for
the user’s authority to operate the without “keyless access with replacement or repair of the engine control
equipment. push-button start system”) unit, integrated unit, etc. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the & Security indicator light
following two conditions: (1) This device Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-30.
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer- & Key replacement (models
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
– Canada-spec. models Your key number plate and security ID
This device complies with Industry plate will be required if you ever need a
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). replacement key made. Any new key must
Operation is subject to the following two be registered for use with your vehicle’s
conditions: (1) this device may not cause immobilizer system before it can be used.
1) Key number plate
interference, and (2) this device must Up to four keys can be registered for use
2) Security ID plate
accept any interference, including inter- with one vehicle.
ference that may cause undesired opera- The security ID is stamped on the security For security, all the keys registered with
tion of the device. ID plate attached to the key set. Write your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
down the security ID and keep it in have their ID codes erased and re-
another safe place, not in the vehicle. registered when a new key is made.
This number is needed to make a replace- Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
ment key if you lose your key or lock it be presented when a new key is regis-
inside the vehicle. tered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
To make replacement keys, the key
after the other keys are re-registered. For
number is also needed. Refer to “Key
information on replacement keys and on
replacement (models without “keyless
the registration of keys with your immo-
access with push-button start system”)”
bilizer system, contact your SUBARU
F2-5.
dealer.
2-6 Keys and doors/Door locks

Door locks the “ON” position.

For details about the alarm system,
& Locking and unlocking from refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including a mechanical key) and
open the door while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Locking without the key
Models with “keyless access with 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
push-button start system”: 2) Close the door.
. Press any button on the access key
(except when the access key battery is To lock the door from the outside without
To lock the driver’s door from the outside the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
discharged). with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch then close the door.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
to the “Acc” position. front.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures. Pull the outside door handle to open an
– Grip the front door handle unlocked door.
– Press the rear gate opener button
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmit-
ter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
 Keys and doors/Door locks 2-7

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
Locking without the key 1) Lock
1) Press the front side of the power door It also helps prevent passengers 2) Unlock
locking switch. from falling out by preventing a door
2) Close the door. from being accidentally opened, and To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
intruders from unexpectedly open- lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
To lock the door from the outside using the from the inside, rotate the lock lever
power door locking switch, press the front ing doors and entering your vehicle.
forward.
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed The red mark on the lock lever appears
doors and the rear gate (Outback) are when the door is unlocked.
locked at the same time.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
Always make sure that all doors and the unlocked door.
rear gate are locked before leaving your
Always make sure that all doors and the
vehicle.
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
NOTE starting to drive.
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.

– CONTINUED –
2-8 Keys and doors/Power door locking switches

& Battery drainage prevention lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off Power door locking switches
function the lights, it is necessary that each door is
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not completely closed.
completely closed, the interior lights will The operational/non-operational setting of
remain illuminated as a result. However, this function can be changed by a
several lights are automatically turned off SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
by the battery drainage prevention func- SUBARU dealer if you would like to
tion to prevent the battery from going change the setting.
dead. The following interior lights are
affected by this function. NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
Item Switch Automatically turning for this function is set as “operational”.
position off
. When leaving the vehicle, please
Map lights OFF*1 Approximately 20 make sure that all doors and the rear
minutes later
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
Approximately 20 . The battery drainage prevention 1) Lock
Dome light DOOR minutes later function does not operate while the 2) Unlock
Ignition — Approximately 20 key is in the ignition switch. All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can
switch light minutes later
be locked and unlocked by the power door
Door step — None*2 locking switches located at the driver’s
lights side and the front passenger’s side doors.
Cargo area Approximately 20
light DOOR minutes later To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
*1: The map lights can be controlled by the To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
battery drainage prevention function only when the switch.
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR When you close the doors after you set
position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
light” F6-2.
*2: The door step lights are not affected by the
battery drainage prevention function, so the
 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped) 2-9
NOTE ! Behavior with key lock-in preven- Keyless access with push-
Make sure that you do not leave the key tion function operational button start system (Outback
inside the vehicle before locking the With the driver’s door open, the doors are
doors from the outside using the power – if equipped)
automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switches. front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
& Key lock-in prevention func- ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion tion function non-operational
This function prevents the doors from . If the lock lever is turned to the rear
being locked under the following condi- (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
tions. open and the driver’s door is then closed
. The key is still in the ignition switch with the lock lever in that position, the
(models without “keyless access with driver’s door is locked.
push-button start system”) . If the spare key is used to lock the
. The ignition switch is in the “ON” driver’s door from the outside of the
position (models with “keyless access with vehicle, the door is locked.
push-button start system”)
1) Access key (main)
This function’s operational/non-opera- 2) Access key (sub)
tional setting can be changed by a 3) Key number plate
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
The vehicle has two access keys and a
dealer for details.
key number plate. For details about the
NOTE key number plate, refer to “Key number
plate” F2-3.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”. The keyless access with push-button start
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure system allows you to perform the following
you are holding the key before locking functions when you are carrying the
the doors. access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
rear gate

– CONTINUED –
2-10 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped)

. Starting and stopping the engine. For CAUTION

detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button FCC WARNING
start system)” F7-11. Changes or modifications not ex-
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- pressly approved by the party re-
tem. For detailed information, refer to sponsible for compliance could void
“Alarm system” F2-25. the user’s authority to operate the
Locking and unlocking by the remote equipment.
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key. This device complies with Part 15 of the
For detailed information, refer to “Remote FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
keyless entry system” F2-19. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
1) Knob
A mechanical key is attached to each (2) this device must accept any interfer-
2) Mechanical key
access key. The mechanical key is used ence received, including interference that
for the following operations. While pulling the knob of the access key, may cause undesired operation.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door take out the mechanical key.
. Canada-spec. models
. Locking and unlocking the glove box This device complies with Industry
& Certification for keyless ac-
You cannot unlock the glove box without Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
cess with push-button start Operation is subject to the following two
using the mechanical key. You can keep system
the glove box locked when you leave your conditions: (1) this device may not cause
vehicle and the access key (with the . U.S.-spec. models interference, and (2) this device must
mechanical key removed) at a parking accept any interference, including inter-
FCC ID: HYQ14AGX ference that may cause undesired opera-
facility.
FCC ID: HYQ13CZZ tion of the device.
FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF04
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB04
 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped) 2-11

& Safety precautions “Disabling keyless access func-

tion” F2-17. The setting can also
WARNING be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a
If you wear an implanted pacemaker SUBARU dealer.
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at . For detailed information about
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the the operation method for the
transmitting antennas installed on push-button ignition switch while
the vehicle. the keyless access function is
The radio waves from the transmit- switched to the non-operational
ting antennas on the vehicle could mode, refer to “Access key – if
adversely affect the operation of access key does not operate
implanted pacemakers and im- properly” F9-20.
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equip- “Radio waves used for the keyless
ment other than an implanted pace- access with push-button start sys-
maker or an implanted defibrillator, tem”
before using the keyless access . The keyless access with push-
with push-button start system, refer button start system uses radio
to “Radio waves used for the key- waves of the following fre-
less access with push-button start quency* in addition to the radio
system” mentioned later, and con- waves used for the remote key-
tact the electric medical equipment less entry system. The radio
manufacturer for more information. waves are periodically output
The radio waves from the transmit- from the antennas installed on
ting antennas on the vehicle could the vehicle as shown in the 1) Antenna
adversely affect the operation of the following illustrations.
electric medical equipment. * Radio frequency: 134 kHz CAUTION
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access . The keyless access with push-
function can be changed. For button start system uses weak
the setting procedure, refer to radio waves. The status of the
– CONTINUED –
2-12 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped)

access key and environmental such as a laptop computer it dry completely.

conditions may interfere with – When the battery of the ac- – Do not apply strong impacts
the communication between the cess key is discharged to the access key.
access key and the vehicle under
the following conditions, and it . Never leave or store the access – Keep the access key away
may not be possible to lock or key inside the vehicle (e.g., on from magnetic sources.
unlock the doors or start the the instrumental panel, inside the – Never leave the access key in
engine. glove box, on the seat, in the direct sunlight or anywhere
door pocket or at the corner of that may become hot, such
– When operating near a facility the cargo area) or within 6.6 ft (2
where strong radio waves are as on the dashboard. It may
m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the damage the battery or cause
transmitted, such as a broad- garage). The access key may be
cast station and power trans- circuit malfunctions.
locked inside the vehicle, or the
mission lines battery may discharge rapidly. – Do not wash the access key in
– When products that transmit Note that the push-button igni- an ultrasonic washer.
radio waves are used, such as tion switch may not turn on in – Do not leave the access key in
an access key or a remote some cases depending on the humid or dusty locations.
transmitter key of another ve- location of the access key. Doing so may cause malfunc-
hicle . The access key contains electro- tions.
– When carrying more than one nic components. Observe the – Do not leave the access key
access key following precautions to prevent near personal computers or
– When the access key is malfunctions. home electric appliances.
placed near wireless commu- – Although you can replace the Doing so may cause the ac-
nication equipment such as a battery of the access key cess key to malfunction, re-
cell phone yourself, it is recommended sulting in battery discharge.
– When the access key is that the battery be replaced by . If the access key is dropped, the
placed near a metallic object a SUBARU dealer to avoid the integrated mechanical key inside
risk of damage at the time of may become loose. Be careful
– When metallic accessories are replacement. not to lose the mechanical key.
attached to the access key
– Do not get the access key wet. . When you carry the access key
– When carrying the access key If the access key gets wet, on an airplane, do not press the
with electronic appliances wipe it off immediately and let button of the access key while in
 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped) 2-13

the airplane. When any button of as the door pocket, dashboard and the & Locking and unlocking with
the access key is pressed, radio corner of the cargo area. Vibrations “keyless access” entry func-
waves are sent and may affect may damage the key or turn on the tion
the operation of the airplane. switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
When you carry the access key . After the vehicle battery is dis- ! Operating ranges
in a bag on an airplane, take charged or replaced, initialization of
measures to prevent the buttons the steering lock system may be re-
of the access key from being quired to start the engine. In this case,
pressed. perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
NOTE switch to the “OFF” position. For
. The access key is always commu- details, refer to “Switching power”
nicating with the vehicle and is con- F3-5.
tinuously using the battery. Although (2) Open and close the driver’s
the life of the battery varies depending door.
on the operating conditions, it is ap- (3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery onds.
becomes fully discharged, replace it 1) Antenna
with a new one. When the steering is locked, the initi- 2) Operating range
. If an access key is lost, it is alization is completed.
recommended that the access key be The operating ranges of the door and rear
reregistered. For reregistration of an gate locking/unlocking functions are ap-
access key, contact a SUBARU dealer. proximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from
. For a spare access key, contact a the respective door handles and the rear
SUBARU dealer. gate ornament.
. Up to 7 access keys can be regis-
tered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key. It is
necessary for vehicle repair.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
– CONTINUED –
2-14 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped)

detected. noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power

. If the access key is placed too close plant, broadcast station or an area
to the vehicle body, the keyless access where wireless equipment is used), or
functions may not operate properly. If while talking on a cell phone, the
they do not operate properly, repeat the operating ranges may be reduced, or
operation from further away. the keyless access function may not
. If the access key is placed near the operate.
ground or in an elevated location from In such a case, perform the procedure
the ground, even if it is in the indicated described in “Locking and unlocking”
operating range, the keyless access F9-20.
function may not operate properly. . When an access key is in the
. When the access key is within the operating range, if the door handle
operating range, it is possible for any- becomes wet due to exposure to a
1) LED indicator one, even someone who is not carrying significant amount of water when the
the access key, to operate the keyless vehicle is washed or during heavy rain,
When the access key is within either of the
access function. Note that locking and the doors may be locked or unlocked.
operating ranges of the front doors, the
unlocking can be operated only by the . If the door handle is gripped with a
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
door handle, door lock button, rear gloved hand, the door lock may not be
When the keyless access functions are
gate opener button or rear lock button released.
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
in the operating range in which the
unless a button on the access key is ! How to use keyless access func-
access key is detected.
pressed. tions
. It is not possible to lock the doors
NOTE and rear gate using the keyless access NOTE
function when the access key is inside . When you lock the doors and rear
. Locking by using the keyless ac-
the vehicle. However, depending on the gate using the keyless access function,
cess function can be operated only by
status of the access key and the turn the push-button ignition switch
the door lock button in the operating
environmental conditions, the access off. It is not possible to lock the doors
range in which the access key is
key may be locked inside the vehicle. and rear gate using the keyless access
detected.
Before locking, make sure that you function when the push-button ignition
. Unlocking by using the keyless
have the access key. switch is on the “Acc” or “ON” posi-
access function can be operated only
. When the battery of the access key tion. Refer to “Switching power” F3-5.
by the door handle in the operating
is discharged, or when operating it in a . When performing the locking proce-
range in which the access key is
location with strong radio waves or
 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped) 2-15

dure too quickly, locking may not have ! Unlocking ! Opening rear gate
been completed. After locking the
doors, it is recommended to pull the
REAR door handles to confirm that the
doors have been locked.
. The keyless access function may
not operate properly depending on the
status of the access key and the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking”
F9-20.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure, 1) Rear gate opener button
close the opened door or rear gate to Carry the access key, and grip the door
lock it. handle. Carry the access key, and press the rear
. Within 3 seconds after locking the . When the driver’s door handle is gate opener button. Only the rear gate will
doors and the rear gate by using the gripped, only the driver’s door will be be unlocked and opened. Also, an elec-
keyless access function, it is not unlocked. tronic chirp will sound twice and the
possible to unlock doors and/or the . When the front passenger’s door han- hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
rear gate by using the keyless access dle is gripped, all doors including the rear
function. gate will be unlocked.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
access key in the vehicle. and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.

– CONTINUED –
2-16 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped)

! Locking with the door lock ! Locking with the rear lock button Case 2: When the access key has been
button left in the operating range for 10 minutes
or longer while all doors are locked
! Recovery from power saving
mode
When one of the following is operated, the
keyless access function will be recovered.
Case 1:
. Unlock the doors by operating any
procedure other than gripping the door
handle
. Lock the doors
. Open a door and then close it
1) Rear lock button
1) Door lock button Case 2:
Carry the access key, close all doors . Unlock the doors by gripping the door
Carry the access key, close all doors including the rear gate and press the rear handle
including the rear gate and press the door lock button. The rear gate and all doors
. Unlock the doors by pressing the rear
lock button on the door handle. All doors will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
gate opener button
including the rear gate will be locked. Also, sound once and the hazard warning
an electronic chirp will sound once and the flashers will flash once. . Lock the doors by pressing the door
hazard warning flashers will flash once. lock button
! Power saving function . Lock or unlock the doors by using the
The keyless access function will be remote keyless entry system
disabled in the following cases to protect . Lock or unlock the doors by using the
the access key battery and the vehicle power door locking switch
battery.
. Open either of the front doors
Case 1: When the keyless access func- ! Door unlock selection function
tion and the remote keyless entry system
The door unlock selection function makes
have not been used for 2 weeks or longer
the following operations possible.
while all doors are locked
. Unlocking the driver’s door without
 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped) 2-17

unlocking any other doors (including the & Selecting audible signal op- & Disabling keyless access
rear gate) when gripping the driver’s door eration function
handle
Using an electronic chirp, the system will When the vehicle is not going to be used
. Opening the rear gate without unlock- give you an audible signal when the doors for a long time, or when you choose not to
ing any doors when pressing the rear gate lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn use the keyless access function, the
opener button the audible signal off. For more details, keyless access function can be disabled.
The operational/non-operational setting contact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
for this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. & Warning chimes and warning . The locking and unlocking function
light by the remote keyless entry system is
Operational: not disabled.
The keyless access with push-button start . The setting can also be changed at
. Only the driver’s door will be unlocked
system sounds a warning chime and SUBARU dealers. For more details,
when the driver’s door handle is gripped.
flashes the access key warning light on contact a SUBARU dealer.
. The rear gate will open, but the other the combination meter in order to minimize
doors will remain locked when the rear . To start the engine while the func-
improper operations and help protect your tions are disabled, perform the proce-
gate opener button is pressed. vehicle from theft. dure described in “Starting engine”
Non-operational: For details, refer to “Warning chimes and F9-21.
. All doors and the rear gate will be warning light of the keyless access with . We recommend that you disable the
unlocked when the driver’s door handle is push-button start system” F3-25. keyless access functions under the
gripped. following conditions.
. The rear gate will open and all doors – When the vehicle is not going to
will be unlocked when the rear gate be used for an extended period of
opener button is pressed. time
– When the keyless access func-
The factory setting (default setting) is set tions are not going to be used
as “operational”. – When the access key needs to be
For further details, consult a SUBARU stored inside or near the vehicle
dealer.

– CONTINUED –
2-18 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system (Outback – if equipped)

! Disabling functions 7. Within 30 seconds after step 6 is & Replacing access key
performed, close and open the driver’s Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door once. dealers. For more details, contact a
door.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is SUBARU dealer.
performed, close the door. A chirp sound
will be heard, and the functions are
disabled.

NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the func-
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the tions is performed again, the functions are
power door locking switch. enabled.
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is & When access key does not
performed, open the driver’s door. operate properly
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is Refer to “Access key – if access key does
performed, push the rear side (unlock not operate properly” F9-20.
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
& Replacing battery of access
5. Within 30 seconds after step 4 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
key
door twice. Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
6. Within 30 seconds after step 5 is F11-54.
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-19

Remote keyless entry system key is used as the transmitter for the be activated when the push-button
remote keyless entry system. For models ignition switch is in any position other
without “keyless access with push-button than the “OFF” position.
CAUTION start system”, the transmitter for the . For models without “keyless access
remote keyless entry system is located with push-button start system”, the
. Do not expose the remote trans- inside the key head. remote keyless entry system will not
mitter to severe shocks, such as be activated when the key is inserted in
those experienced as a result of The remote keyless entry system has the the ignition switch.
dropping or throwing. following functions.
. Do not take the remote transmit- . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
ter apart except when replacing rear gate (Outback)) without a key
the battery. . Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
key
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with . Sounding a panic alarm
a cloth immediately. . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
. When you carry the remote trans-
“Alarm system” F2-25.
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote The operable distance of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. keyless entry system is approximately 30
When any button of the remote feet (10 meters). However, this distance
transmitter is pressed, radio will vary depending on environmental
Access key
waves are sent and may affect conditions. The system’s operable dis- 1) Lock/arm button
the operation of the airplane. tance will be shorter in areas near a 2) Unlock/disarm button
When you carry the remote trans- facility or electronic equipment emitting 3) Rear gate unlock button
mitter in a bag on an airplane, strong radio waves such as a power plant, 4) PANIC button
take measures to prevent the broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
buttons of the remote transmitter controller of home electronic appliances.
from being pressed.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
For models with “keyless access with
with push-button start system”, the
push-button start system”, the access
remote keyless entry system will not
– CONTINUED –
2-20 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

This device complies with Part 15 of the flashers will flash once.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device & Unlocking the doors
may not cause harmful interference, and Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
(2) this device must accept any interfer- the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
ence received, including interference that sound twice and the hazard warning
may cause undesired operation. flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
. Canada-spec. models doors and the rear gate (Outback), briefly
This device complies with Industry press the unlock/disarm button a second
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). time within 5 seconds.
Operation is subject to the following two NOTE
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must If the interval between the first and
Transmitter
accept any interference, including inter- second presses of the unlock/disarm
1) Lock/arm button
ference that may cause undesired opera- button (for unlocking of all of the doors
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button tion of the device. and the rear gate) is extremely short,
4) PANIC button
the system may not respond.
& Locking the doors
& Certification for remote key- Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors & Opening the trunk lid
less entry system and rear gate (Outback). An electronic (Legacy)
chirp will sound once and the hazard Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
. U.S.-spec. models
warning flashers will flash once. to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
CAUTION will sound twice and the hazard warning
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
flashers will flash twice.
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
FCC WARNING will sound five times and the hazard
Changes or modifications not ex- warning flashers will flash five times to & Unlocking the rear gate
pressly approved by the party re- alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/ (Outback)
sponsible for compliance could void trunk lid) are not properly closed. When Press the rear gate unlock button to
the user’s authority to operate the you close the door, it will automatically unlock the rear gate.
equipment. lock and then an electronic chirp will An electronic chirp will sound twice and
sound once and the hazard warning the hazard warning flashers will flash
 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-21

twice. & Selecting audible signal op- the power door locking switch, pull the key
eration (models without out and re-insert it into the ignition switch
& Vehicle finder function “keyless access with push- at least 5 times within 10 seconds after
Use this function to find your vehicle button start system”) performing step 2.
parked among many vehicles in a large 5. Open and close the driver’s door
Using an electronic chirp, the system will within 10 seconds after performing step 4.
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet give you an audible signal when the doors
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the 6. To indicate completion of the setting,
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second the hazard warning flashers flash 3 times
the audible signal off.
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to and the chirp sounds 3 times.
sound once and its hazard warning To deactivate the audible signal, perform
the following procedure. You can also use You may have the above procedure
flashers to flash three times.
the same steps to restore the function. performed by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all & Replacing the battery
If the interval between presses is too doors and the rear gate.
short when you press the lock/arm Refer to “Replacing battery” F11-54.
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the & Replacing lost transmitters
remote transmitter. If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
& Sounding a panic alarm program all of your transmitters for secur-
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” ity reasons. It is recommended that you
button once. have your dealer program all of your
The horn will sound and the hazard transmitters into your system.
warning flashers will flash.
! Programming the transmitters
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a The remote keyless entry system is
button on the remote transmitter is not equipped with a special code learning
2. Press the unlock side of the power feature that allows you to program new
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
door locking switch. transmitter codes into the system or to
after approximately 30 seconds.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch. delete old ones. The system can learn up
4. While holding down the unlock side of to four unique transmitter codes. The four

– CONTINUED –
2-22 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

transmitter codes may be the same or To register a new transmitter with the
different. remote keyless entry system, it is neces-
sary to program the transmitter’s code
Programming transmitter codes into (identification number) into the system. A
system: tag showing the code is affixed to the key
unit, and another is affixed to the circuit
board inside the transmitter. If there is no
tag, open the transmitter case and make a
note of the eight-digit number. Program
the number into the system in accordance
with the following procedure.
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate (Outback) or trunk lid (Legacy).
2. Open the driver’s door, sit in the 1) LOCK
driver’s seat, and close the door. 2) ON
3. Perform the following steps within 45 (2) Insert the key into the ignition
seconds. switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
Key unit tag position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. An electronic tone will not
sound. In this event, perform the whole
procedure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
Transmitter circuit board once.
 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-23
NOTE NOTE switch within 5 seconds.
. When part 4 of the procedure is . The electronic tone will stop sound-
completed, an electronic tone will ing when you start entering the num- NOTE
sound for 30 seconds. ber. . An electronic tone will sound.
. If you do not perform the operations . If you do not start entering the . If you press the unlock side of the
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error number using the lock switch before lock switch when more than 5 seconds
will occur and the electronic tone will the electronic tone stops sounding, an have passed, an error will occur. In this
not sound. In this event, perform the error will occur. In this event, perform event, perform the procedure again
registration steps again beginning with the registration steps again beginning beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
part 3 of the procedure. with part 3 of the procedure. six times, perform the procedure again
. If the interval between one press of starting with part 3.
the switch and the next exceeds 5 7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
seconds, an error will occur. In this for each of the remaining digits of the
event, perform the procedure again transmitter code beginning with the sec-
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs ond digit (counting from the left) and
six times, perform the procedure again finishing with the eighth digit.
starting with part 3.
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one press of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
5. Before the electronic tone stops seconds, an error will occur. In this
sounding, press the lock side of the power event, perform the procedure again
door lock switch the same number of beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
times as the leftmost digit of the transmit- six times, perform the procedure again
ter code. For example, press the lock starting with part 3.
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of 8. Before the electronic tone stops
the code is 8. sounding, use the power door lock switch
6. When you have finished entering the to reenter the transmitter code beginning
number, press the unlock side of the lock with the leftmost digit.
– CONTINUED –
2-24 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

NOTE ! Deleting old transmitter codes NOTE

If you do not start entering the number The control unit of the remote keyless Make sure no one else is operating
using the lock switch before the elec- entry system has four memory locations to their remote keyless entry system with-
tronic tone stops sounding, an error store transmitter codes, giving it the ability in range of your vehicle when program-
will occur. In this event, perform the to operate with up to four transmitters. ming transmitters. If someone else
procedure again beginning with part 3. When you lose a transmitter, the lost were to operate their remote transmit-
transmitter’s code remains in the memory. ter while you are programming your
9. When you have finished entering the For security reasons, lost transmitter transmitters, it is possible that their
code a second time, an electronic tone will codes should be deleted from the mem- transmitter code will be programmed
sound for 1 second to indicate completion ory. into your system, allowing them un-
of registration, provided the code entered To delete old transmitter codes, program authorized access to your vehicle.
the second time is identical to that entered four transmitter codes into the system. If
the first time. you have only one current transmitter,
NOTE program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
If the code entered the second time is
twice. If you have three current transmit-
not identical to the code entered the
ters, program two of them once and the
first time, an error will occur. In this
third one twice. This process will leave
event, perform the procedure again
only current transmitter codes in the
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
system’s memory.
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another trans-
mitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure begin-
ning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary trans-
mitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
 Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-25

Alarm system & System alarm operation & Activating and deactivating
The alarm system will give the following the alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your alarms when triggered: To change the setting of your vehicle’s
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . The vehicle’s horn will sound and the alarm system for activation or deactiva-
sounds and the hazard warning flashers hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 tion, do the following.
flash if someone attempts to break into seconds. 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
your vehicle. . If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) “Disarming the system” F2-29.
For models with “keyless access with remains open after the 30-second period, 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
push-button start system”: the horn will continue to sound for a doors (and the rear gate (Outback)).
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
The system can be armed or disarmed
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the position.
with the access key.
horn is sounding, the horn will stop 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
The system will not be activated when the sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
push-button ignition switch is in the “Acc” of the driver’s power door locking switch,
or “ON” position. The alarm is triggered by: open the driver’s door within the following
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
For models without “keyless access releasing the switch. The setting will then
lid
with push-button start system”: be changed as follows:
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
The system can be armed and disarmed
forced entry (only models with shock If the system was previously activated:
with the remote transmitter.
sensors (dealer option)) The trip meter screen displays as follows
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch. NOTE and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
the system is now deactivated.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set The alarm system can be set to trigger
. “ALOF” (models with type A combina-
for activation at the time of shipment from illumination of map lights and dome
tion meter)
the factory. You can set the system for light. The map lights and dome light
notification is deactivated as the fac- . “AL oF” (models with type B combina-
deactivation yourself or have it done by tion meter)
your SUBARU dealer. tory setting. Refer to “Function set-
tings” F24. A SUBARU dealer can If the system was previously deacti-
activate the system. Contact your vated:
SUBARU dealer for details.
The trip meter screen displays as follows
and the horn sounds once, indicating that

– CONTINUED –
2-26 Keys and doors/Alarm system

the system is now activated. & Arming the system – Any door (including the rear gate
. “ALON” (models with type A combina- (Outback) or the trunk (Legacy)) is
tion meter)
NOTE opened.
. The system can be armed even if the – The key is inserted into the
. “AL on” (models with type B combina-
engine hood, the windows and/or ignition switch (models without
tion meter)
moonroof are open. Always make sure “keyless access with push-button
NOTE that they are fully closed before arming start system”).
You may have the above setting the system. – Push-button ignition switch is
change done by your SUBARU dealer. . The 30-second standby time can be turned to the “Acc” position (mod-
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- els with “keyless access with push-
& If you have accidentally trig- formed by your SUBARU dealer. button start system”).
gered the alarm system . If your vehicle is a Legacy and you
open the trunk using the remote trans- ! To arm the system using access
! To stop the alarm mitter’s “ ” button with the alarm key/remote transmitter
Perform any of the following operations. system armed, the system will be
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
temporarily placed in a standby state.
. Press any button on the access key/ equipped).
The system will go back to the surveil-
remote transmitter. 2. Remove the key from the ignition
lance state upon locking the trunk.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” . The system is in the standby mode switch (models without “keyless access
position. for a 30-second period after locking the with push-button start system”)/turn the
. Turn the push-button ignition to the doors with the remote transmitter. The push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
“Acc” position (models with “keyless ac- security indicator light will flash at position (models with “keyless access with
cess with push-button start system”). short intervals during this period. push-button start system”).
. Carry the access key and press the . If any of the following actions is 3. Open the doors and get out of the
rear gate opener button (if equipped). done during the standby period, the vehicle.
. Carry the access key and press the system will not switch to the surveil- 4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
door lock button (if equipped). lance state. the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
– Doors are unlocked using the 5. Close all doors (and the rear gate
remote transmitter. (Outback)).
– Doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if
equipped).
 Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-27

Access key Transmitter Security indicator light (type B)

1) Arm button: Press to arm the system 1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the 2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less
system system than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand-
by time), the security indicator light will
then flash slowly (twice approximately
every 2 seconds), indicating that the
system has been armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
Security indicator light (type A) (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automa-
– CONTINUED –
2-28 Keys and doors/Alarm system

tically lock. the power door locking switch to set the

! To arm the system using power door locks.
door locking switch 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if will flash once and the security indicator
equipped). light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
2. Remove the key from the ignition flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
switch (models without keyless access security indicator light will then flash
function)/make sure the push-button igni- slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
tion switch is turned off (models with onds), indicating that the system has been
keyless access function). armed for surveillance.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle. ! To arm the system using the key-
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and less access function (if equipped) 1) Door lock button
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked. 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate equipped)
(Outback)) but leave only the driver’s door 2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
or the front passenger’s door open. the “OFF” position.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

Security indicator light

6. Carry the access key and press the
door lock button. All doors (and the rear
gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of sound once, the hazard warning flashers
 Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-29

will flash once, and the security indicator light will turn off. activation.
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the To unlock all other doors and the rear gate To enter the valet mode, change the
security indicator light will then flash (Outback), briefly press the disarm button setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- a second time within 5 seconds. deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
onds), indicating that the system has been and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
! Emergency disarming
armed for surveillance. 25. The security indicator light will con-
If you cannot disarm the system using the tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, indicating that the system is in the valet
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds broken or the transmitter battery is too mode.
five times, the hazard warning flashers weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter. To exit valet mode, change the setting of
flash five times to alert you that the doors
The system can be disarmed if you turn your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
When you close the door, the system will
to the “ON” position with a registered key/ ing the alarm system” F2-25.
automatically arm and doors will automa-
tically lock. access key.
& Passive arming (models
& Disarming the system NOTE without “keyless access with
Perform either of the following procedures. For models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less push-button start system”, if the ac- When passive arming mode has been
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote cess key battery is discharged, perform programmed by the dealer, arming of the
transmitter. the procedure described in “Switching system is automatically accomplished
. Carry the access key and perform power” F9-20. In such a case, replace without using the access key/remote
either of the following procedures (models the battery immediately. Refer to “Re- transmitter. Note that in this mode,
with “keyless access with push-button placing battery of access key” F11-54. DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED.
start system”).
! To enter the passive mode
– Grip the front door handle. & Valet mode
– Press the rear gate opener button. If you wish to program the passive arming
When you choose the valet mode, the mode, have it done by your SUBARU
The driver’s door will unlock (or the rear alarm system does not operate. In valet dealer.
gate will open), an electronic chirp will mode, the access key/remote transmitter
sound twice, the hazard warning flashers is used only for locking and unlocking the
will flash twice and the security indicator doors and rear gate (Outback) and panic

– CONTINUED –
2-30 Keys and doors/Alarm system

! Arming the system & Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when
CAUTION the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
In passive mode, the system will location of unauthorized intrusion or the
automatically activate the alarm but severity of impact on the vehicle.
WILL NOT automatically lock the When the ignition switch is turned to the
doors. In order to lock the doors “ON” position, the indicator light will
you must either lock them as in- illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
dicated in step 4 below or with the follows:
key once they have been closed. . When a door or rear gate (Outback)
Failure to lock the doors manually was opened: 5 times
will result in a higher security risk.
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors 4 times
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” with the inside door lock levers. . When a strong impact or multiple
position. 5. Close the doors. The system will impacts were sensed: twice (only models
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to automatically arm after 1 minute. with shock sensors (dealer option))
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (all models) and
In the passive mode, the system can also . When a light impact was sensed: once
remove the key from the ignition switch
be armed with the remote transmitter, (only models with shock sensors (dealer
(models without “keyless access with
access key, keyless access function or option))
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the the power door locking switch. If the
vehicle. remote transmitter, access key, keyless & Shock sensors (dealer op-
access function or power door locking tion)
switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming The shock sensors trigger the alarm
will take place immediately regardless of system when they sense impacts applied
whether or not the passive mode has to the vehicle and when any of their
been selected. electric wires is cut. The alarm system
! Disarming the system causes the horn to sound and the hazard
To disarm the system, briefly press the warning flashers to flash for a short time
disarm button on the access key/transmit- when the sensed impact is weak, but it
ter. warns of a strong impact or multiple
 Keys and doors/Child safety locks 2-31

impacts by sounding the horn and flashing Child safety locks Windows
the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can WARNING WARNING
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation. Always turn the child safety locks to To avoid serious personal injury
the “LOCK” position when children caused by entrapment, always con-
NOTE sit on the rear seat. Serious injury form to the following instructions
. The shock sensors are not always could result if a child accidentally without exception.
able to sense impacts caused by break- opens the door and falls out. . When operating the power win-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that dows, be extremely careful to
does not cause vibration (such as prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
breaking the glass using a rescue neck, head or other objects from
hammer). being caught in the window.
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration like those shown in the follow- . Always lock the passengers’ win-
ing and trigger the alarm system. dows using the lock switch when
Select the settings of the alarm system children are riding in the vehicle.
and shock sensors appropriately de- . Before leaving the vehicle, al-
pending on where you usually park ways remove the key from the
your vehicle. ignition switch for safety and
Examples: never allow an unattended child
– Vibration from construction site to remain in the vehicle. Failure
– Vibration in multistory car park to follow this procedure could
– Vibration from trains Each rear door has a child safety lock. result in injury to a child operat-
. You can have the sensitivity of the When the child safety lock lever is in the ing the power window.
shock sensors adjusted to your pre- “LOCK” position, the door cannot be
ference by your SUBARU dealer. opened from inside. The door can only The power windows operate only when
be opened from the outside. the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

– CONTINUED –
2-32 Keys and doors/Windows

& Power window operation by ! Operating the driver’s window For some models, this switch also has a
driver one-touch auto up function that allows the
window to be closed fully without holding
! Driver’s side power window the switch.
switches Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, press the switch
down lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function is deactivated. Initi-
1) Automatically open/close alize the power window to reactivate
2) Open/close the one-touch auto up/down function.
Refer to “Initialization of power win-
To open: dow” F2-34.
1) Lock switch Press the switch down lightly and hold it.
2) For driver’s window The window will open as long as the ! Anti-entrapment function (driver’s
3) For front passenger’s window switch is held. door) (models with one-touch auto
4) For rear left passenger’s window This switch also has a one-touch auto up function)
5) For rear right passenger’s window down function that allows the window to
be opened fully without holding the switch. CAUTION
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver Press the switch down until it clicks and
. Never attempt to test this func-
side door. release it, and the window will fully open.
tion using fingers, hands or other
To stop the window halfway, pull the
parts of your body.
switch up lightly.
. The anti-entrapment function
To close: may not operate properly if some
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The object gets trapped just before
window will close as long as the switch is the window fully closes.
held.
 Keys and doors/Windows 2-33
NOTE ! Operating the passengers’ win- ! Locking the passengers’ windows
. If a window detects an impact simi- dows
lar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encoun-
ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re- 1) Lock
fer to “Initialization of power window” To open: 2) Unlock
F2-34. Press the appropriate switch down and To lock:
While closing with the one-touch auto up hold it until the window reaches the Press the lock switch. When the lock
function, if the window senses a substan- desired position. switch is in the lock position, the passen-
tial enough object trapped between the To close: gers’ windows cannot be opened or
window and the window frame, it auto- Pull the switch up and hold it until the closed.
matically moves down slightly and stops. window reaches the desired position. To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.

– CONTINUED –
2-34 Keys and doors/Windows

& Power window operation by ! Operating the windows & Initialization of power win-
passengers dow
! Passenger’s side power window If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
switches to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function (if equipped)
Initialize the power window in the following
procedure to reactivate such functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
To open:
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
Press the switch down and hold it until the
by pushing down the power window
window reaches the desired position.
switch.
To close:
Each passenger window can be controlled 4. Pull up the power window switch and
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
by the power window switch located on close the window completely. Continue
window reaches the desired position.
the door. pulling up the switch for approximately 1
When the lock switch on the power second after the window is closed com-
window switch cluster, located on the pletely.
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
 Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy) 2-35

Trunk lid (Legacy) trunk lid down until the latch engages. ! To lock and unlock the trunk lid
opener switch
NOTE
WARNING . Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. To prevent dangerous exhaust . Even when the trunk lid cannot be
gas from entering the vehicle, opened using the remote keyless entry
always keep the trunk lid closed system, you can open the trunk lid by
while driving. using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
. Help prevent children, adults or (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
animals from locking themselves opened” F9-21.
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the & To open the trunk lid from
trunk could quickly become high inside
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including When you entrust your valet key to
brain damage to anyone locked another person, you can lock the trunk
inside, particularly for small chil- lid opener switch to prevent items in the
dren. trunk from being stolen.
. When leaving the vehicle, close To lock the trunk lid opener switch, per-
all windows and lock all doors. form the following procedure.
Also make certain that the trunk 1. Open the glove box. Refer to “Glove
is closed. box” F6-6.
2. Press the trunk lid opener lock button.
& To open and close the trunk To unlock the trunk lid opener switch,
lid from outside perform the same procedure again.
The trunk lid can be opened using the Press and hold the trunk lid opener switch
remote keyless entry system. Refer to for more than 1 second.
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-20.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the

– CONTINUED –
2-36 Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy)

& Internal trunk lid release WARNING ! Inspection

handle Perform the following steps at least twice
The internal trunk lid release handle is a Never allow any child to get in the a year to check the release handle for
device designed to open the trunk lid from trunk and play with the release correct operation.
inside the trunk. In the event children or handle. If the driver starts the vehi- 1. Open the trunk lid.
adults become locked inside the trunk, the cle without knowing that a child is
handle allows them to open the lid. The inside the trunk and the child opens
handle is located on the inside of the trunk the lid using the release handle, the
lid. child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.

CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk. 2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
Such use may result in damage blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
of the handle. blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, . Load the trunk so that cargo
click.
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the cannot strike the release handle.
arrow on the handle. This operation If the cargo hits the handle while
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the the vehicle is being driven, the
lid. handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
The handle is made of material that
cause cargo to fall out of the
remains luminescent for approximately
trunk, which could create a traffic
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
safety hazard.
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
 Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback) 2-37

If the latch is not released, contact your Rear gate (Outback)

SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.

This places the latch in the locked posi-

tion.
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches” F2-8.
. Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped): Refer to “Keyless
access with push-button start system
(Outback – if equipped)” F2-9.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-19.
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
3. Move the release handle, from outside the rear gate opener button.
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.

– CONTINUED –
2-38 Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)

WARNING NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
. To prevent dangerous exhaust to a discharged vehicle battery, a
gas from entering the vehicle, malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
always keep the rear gate closed ing system or other causes, you can
while driving. unlock it by manually operating the
. Do not attempt to shut the rear rear gate lock release lever. For the
gate while holding the recessed procedure, refer to “Rear gate (Out-
grip. Also avoid closing the rear back) – if the rear gate cannot be
gate by pulling on the recessed unlocked” F9-22.
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages. CAUTION
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip. . Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
 Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-39

Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en- & Moonroof switches
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the ! Tilting moonroof
WARNING moonroof.

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, you must conditions have caused it to
conform to the following instruc- freeze shut.
tions without exception. . The anti-entrapment function
. Before closing the moonroof, does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure 1) Raise
make sure that no one’s hands, 2) Lower
arms, head or other objects will to confirm that it is safe to do so
be accidentally caught in the before tilting the moonroof down. The raising function will only operate when
moonroof. the moonroof is fully closed. The lowering
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding function will only operate when the moon-
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- functions. roof is raised.
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety (models The moonroof operates only when the Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
without “keyless access with ignition switch is in the “ON” position. switch to raise the moonroof.
push-button start system”) and Press the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
never allow an unattended child switch to lower the moonroof.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could Release the switch after the moonroof has
result in injury to a child operat- been raised or has been lowered com-
ing the moonroof. pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.

– CONTINUED –
2-40 Keys and doors/Moonroof

NOTE To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- & Sun shade

One-touch operation does not take way position while opening or closing it,
place when the moonroof is lowered. momentarily press the front side or rear
Press the switch continuously to lower side of the switch.
the moonroof. After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
! Sliding moonroof wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
The sun shade can be slid forward or
! Anti-entrapment function backward by hand while the moonroof is
When the moonroof senses a substantial closed.
enough object trapped between its glass If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it also moves back.
automatically moves back to the fully open
1) Open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
2) Close
ment function may also be activated by a
Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE” strong shock on the moonroof even when
switch to open the moonroof. The sun there is nothing trapped.
shade will also be opened together with
the moonroof. For Outback, the moonroof CAUTION
will stop at a position approximately 0.8 in
(2 cm) away from the fully opened posi- Never attempt to test this function
tion. Press the switch again to open the using fingers, hands or other parts
moonroof completely. of your body.
Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch to close the moonroof.
 Instruments and controls

Ignition switch (models without push- Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
button start system)......................................... 3-3 indicators ........................................................ 3-15
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 indicator light .................................................. 3-16
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Coolant temperature low indicator light (if 3
equipped)/Coolant temperature high warning
START ................................................................ 3-4 light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4 Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17
Push-button ignition switch (models with Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-18
push-button start system) ............................... 3-5 AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and CVT
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-5 models) ........................................................... 3-18
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-5 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec.
Switching power ................................................. 3-5 models) ........................................................... 3-18
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-6 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-20
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-7 Brake system warning light................................ 3-21
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-7 Hill Holder indicator light ................................... 3-23
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-7 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-23
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Door open warning light (models with type A
movement upon turning on the ignition combination meter).......................................... 3-23
switch............................................................... 3-7 Door open indicator light ................................... 3-23
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8 Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-23
Odometer............................................................ 3-8 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and CVT
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9 models) ........................................................... 3-24
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-24
Temperature gauge (models with type A Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-25
combination meter) .......................................... 3-11 Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless
ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-11 access with push-button start system (if
equipped) ........................................................ 3-25
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-12
Security indicator light....................................... 3-30
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-13
Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 3-30
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-31
Instruments and controls

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-31 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-42
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-32 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-43
Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-32 Daytime running light system............................. 3-43
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-32 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-43
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-32 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-44
Clock ................................................................... 3-32 Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-44
Multi function display ........................................ 3-33 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-45
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-34 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-46
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-34 Rear window wiper and washer switch
Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-35 (Outback) ........................................................ 3-48
Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-35 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-49
Multi information display (models with type Mirrors ................................................................ 3-50
A combination meter) ..................................... 3-36 Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-50
Basic operation .................................................. 3-37 Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-51
Welcome screen................................................. 3-37 Auto-dimming mirror (if equipped)...................... 3-57
Starting screen................................................... 3-37 Auto-dimming mirror with HomeLink® (if
Good-bye screen................................................ 3-38 equipped) ........................................................ 3-58
Warning screen .................................................. 3-38 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-63
Basic screens .................................................... 3-38 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-64
Menu screens .................................................... 3-39 Horn .................................................................... 3-65
Light control switch ........................................... 3-41
Headlights.......................................................... 3-41
 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system) 3-3

Ignition switch (models with- against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the
you are driving, it could turn the “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
out push-button start sys- battery to go dead.
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tem) tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi- . If the ignition switch will not move
tion, thereby stopping the engine. from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
WARNING Also, if the key is attached to a position, turn the steering wheel
keyholder or to a large bunch of slightly to the left and right as you turn
. Never turn the ignition switch to other keys, centrifugal force may act the ignition switch.
“LOCK” while the vehicle is on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
being driven or towed because in unwanted turning of the ignition & LOCK
that will lock the steering wheel, switch.
The key can only be inserted or removed
preventing steering control. And in this position. The ignition switch will lock
when the engine is turned off, it The ignition switch has four positions:
the steering wheel when you remove the
takes a much greater effort than LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
key.
usual to steer.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ways remove the key from the as you turn the key.
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.

NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or
not running. The key can be turned from “Acc” to
key case to either key. If it banged
. Using electrical accessories for a “LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
– CONTINUED –
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

while turning it (all models) and the select NOTE contains an immobilizer transponder.
lever is in the “P” position (AT models and The engine may not start in the follow- . The key is near or touching another
CVT models). ing cases: transmitter.

& Acc & Key reminder chime

In this position the electrical accessories The reminder chime sounds when the
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can driver’s door opens and the key is in the
be used. “LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the ignition switch is turned
& ON to the “ON” position or the key is removed
This is the normal operating position after from the ignition switch.
the engine is started.
& Ignition switch light
& START For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
CAUTION . The key grip is touching another key nates when driver’s door is opened or
or a metallic key holder. when the driver’s door is unlocked using
Do not turn the ignition switch to the the remote keyless entry transmitter.
“START” position while the engine
is running. The light remains illuminated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
The engine is started in this position. The under the following conditions.
starter cranks the engine to start it. When . When the driver’s door is closed
the key is released (after the engine has . When the doors are unlocked using the
started), the key automatically returns to remote keyless entry transmitter
the “ON” position.
If the engine does not start with your The light gradually turns off under the
registered key, pull out the key once (at following conditions.
this time, the security indicator light will . When the ignition switch is turned to
blink), reinsert the key in the ignition the “ON” position
switch and then try to start the engine . When the doors are locked using the
again. . The key is near another key that remote keyless entry transmitter
 Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system) 3-5

Push-button ignition switch . Even when the access key is outside & Switching power
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
(models with push-button the glass, it may be possible to switch
start system) the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
& Safety precautions following places. It may become im-
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11. possible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
& Operating range for push- – On the instrument panel
button start system – On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– At the corner of the cargo area
. When operating the push-button 1) Operation indicator
ignition switch or starting the engine, 2) Push-button ignition switch
if the access key battery is discharged,
The power is switched every time the
perform the procedure described in
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
“Access key – if access key does not
operate properly” F9-20. In such a 1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
case, replace the battery immediately. driver’s seat.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access 2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
key” F11-54. position.
1) Antenna 3. Press the push-button ignition switch
2) Operating range without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
NOTE switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “Acc”,
. If the access key is not detected “ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is
within the operating range of the an- stopped and the push-button ignition
tennas inside the vehicle, the push- switch is in “Acc” or “ON”, the operation
button ignition switch and the engine indicator on the push-button ignition
start cannot be operated. switch illuminates in orange.
– CONTINUED –
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

does not operate smoothly, stop left and right.

Power Indicator color Operation
status the operation. Contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately. ! Battery drainage prevention func-
OFF Turned off Power is turned tion
off. . If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when When the push-button ignition switch is
The following left in the “Acc” or “ON” position for
systems can be the instrument panel illumination
used: is turned on, have the vehicle approximately 1 hour, the push-button
Acc Orange audio and ac- ignition switch will be automatically
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
cessory power switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery
outlet. . If the vehicle was left in the hot from going dead. This function is activated
Orange sun for a long time, the surface of when the select lever is in the “P” position.
(while engine is the push-button ignition switch
stopped) All electrical may get hot. Be careful not to & When access key does not
ON systems can be
Turned off used. burn yourself. operate properly
(while engine is Refer to “Access key – if access key does
running)
NOTE not operate properly” F9-20.

CAUTION . The push-button ignition switch can-

not be switched to “OFF” when the
. When the push-button ignition select lever is in a position other than
switch is left in “ON” or “Acc” “P”.
for a long time, it may result in . When operating the push-button
vehicle battery discharge. ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. Do not spill drinks or other
. If the push-button ignition switch is
liquids on the push-button igni-
pressed quickly, the power may not
tion switch. It may cause a mal-
turn on or off.
function.
. If the indicator light on the push-
. Do not touch the push-button button ignition switch flashes in green
ignition switch with a hand soiled when the push-button ignition switch is
with oil or other contaminants. It pressed, steering is locked. When this
may cause a malfunction. occurs, press the push-button ignition
. If the push-button ignition switch switch while turning the steering wheel
 Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher 3-7

Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges NOTE

The above sequence of operations may
NOTE not take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
Liquid crystal displays are used in is not a malfunction.
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their & Canceling the function for
indications hard to see if you wear meter/gauge needle move-
polarized glasses. ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
& Combination meter illumina- It is possible to activate or deactivate the
tion movement of the meter needles and
When the ignition switch is turned to the gauge needles that takes place when the
“ON” position, the various parts of the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
combination meter are illuminated in the position.
The hazard warning flasher is used to following sequence.
! Type A combination meter
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions. 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter Perform the procedures described in
The hazard warning flasher works with the needles, gauge needles, odometer and “Gauge Initial Movement” F3-40.
ignition switch in any position. trip meter back light illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, each show MAX position.
press the hazard warning button on the 3. Meter needles and gauge needles
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, each show MIN position.
press the button again. 4. Dials and indicators in meters and
NOTE gauges light up.
When the hazard warning flasher is on, 5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
the turn signals do not work. gins.

– CONTINUED –
3-8 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

! Type B combination meter *1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot & Odometer

be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
*2: MT models only
3. To change the current setting, press
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles
has been set for activation “ ” at Type A
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ the time of shipment from the factory.
“OFF” or “Acc” position. 1) U.S. spec. models
. It is not possible to change the initial 2) Except U.S. spec. models
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or movement setting of the meter/gauge
“ ” on the trip meter display. needles when the ignition switch is in
The display can be switched as shown in the “ON” position. Change the setting
the following illustration by pressing the when the ignition switch is in the
trip knob. “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” position.

& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.

Type B
This meter displays the odometer when
 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Also, if you open and close the driver’s
The odometer shows the total distance door within 10 seconds of illumination of
that the vehicle has been driven. the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” The display can be switched as shown in
position, the odometer/trip meter will light the following illustration by pressing the
up. If you do not press the trip knob within trip knob.
10 seconds of illumination of the od-
ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter
will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip Type B
meter will turn off. 1) Trip knob
This meter displays the two trip meters
& Double trip meter when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. *1: Models with type B combination meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the only: These indications cannot be
vehicle has been driven since you last set displayed when the ignition switch is
it to zero. in the “ON” position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition *2: MT models only
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
position, the odometer/trip meter will light trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
up. It is possible to switch between the A and keep the knob pressed for more than
trip meter and B trip meter indications 2 seconds.
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If
you do not press the trip knob within 10 CAUTION
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
Type A trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn To ensure safety, do not attempt to
off. change the function of the indicator

– CONTINUED –
3-10 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

during driving, as an accident could the engine is controlled so that the

result. engine speed may not become too high
even if the accelerator pedal is pressed
hard.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina- & Fuel gauge
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed Type B
in thousands of revolutions per minute. 1) Low fuel warning light

CAUTION The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
Do not operate the engine with the When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
pointer of the tachometer in the red “OFF” or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge
zone. In this range, fuel injection will Type A shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
be cut by the engine control module fuel.
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run- The gauge may move slightly during
ning normally after the engine speed braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
is reduced below the red zone. level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc”
NOTE position, the fuel gauge’s dial will light up
To protect the engine while the select and the needle will indicate the amount of
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for fuel remaining in the tank.
AT and CVT models) or the shift lever is If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
in the neutral position (for MT models), the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-11

you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 & Temperature gauge (models be avoided.
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s with type A combination me-
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the ter) CAUTION
“E” position and the dial and needle will
turn off. If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
NOTE vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
13.

& ECO gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel The coolant temperature will vary in
gauge. accordance with the outside temperature
This indicates that the fuel filler door and driving conditions.
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle. We recommend that you drive moderately Type A
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should

– CONTINUED –
3-12 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Needle position Warning and indicator lights

Displayed unit
“+” side “-” side
Several of the warning and indicator lights
MPG Better Poorer illuminate momentarily and then go out
l/100km Poorer Better when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits check-
NOTE ing the operation of the bulbs.
. The ECO gauge shows only an Apply the parking brake and turn the
approximate indication. ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
. After resetting the trip meter, the the system check, the following lights
average rate of fuel consumption is not illuminate and turn off after several sec-
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). onds or after the engine has started:
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
Type B : Seatbelt warning light
1) U.S. spec. models
operate.
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
2) Except U.S. spec. models only when the driver fastens the
The ECO gauge shows the difference seatbelt.)
between the average rate of fuel con-
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
sumption since the trip meter was last
light
reset and the current rate of fuel con-
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
sumption.
only when the front seat passenger
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel fastens the seatbelt.)
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-13

: Coolant temperature high warning light : Door open warning light (models with chime.
(models with type B combination me- type A combination meter)
ter)
: Door open indicator light (models with
: Charge warning light type B combination meter)
: Oil pressure warning light : Cruise control indicator light (models
with type B combination meter)
: Engine low oil level warning light
: Cruise control set indicator light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light (models with type B combination
(models with type B combination meter)
meter)
: Select lever/gear position indicator
: AT OIL TEMP warning light (models with type B combination
(AT and CVT models) meter)
Driver’s warning light (type A)
/ : ABS warning light If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- corresponding system.
tion indicator light Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light & Seatbelt warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
: Hill Holder indicator light warning device at the driver’s and front
: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and passenger’s seat, as required by current
CVT models) safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: Low tire pressure warning light position, this device reminds the driver Driver’s warning light (type B)
(U.S. spec. models) and front passenger to fasten their seat-
: Low fuel warning light belts by the warning lights in the locations
indicated in the following illustration and a

– CONTINUED –
3-14 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

The warning light(s) for unfastened functioning correctly or cause the device
seatbelt(s) will alternate between to fail.
steady illumination and flashing at . Do not install any accessory such as a
15-second intervals. The chime will table or TV onto the seatback.
not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the
– At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket.
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front
seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback.
15-second intervals and the chime
. Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s)
ward-forward position and seatback not
is/are flashing.
Front passenger’s warning light being locked into place securely. If any of
. It is possible to cancel the warning them are not locked securely, adjust them
operation that follows the 6-second again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
! Operation
warning after turning ON the ignition “Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when with manual seats only).
turned ON next time, however, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning If the seatbelt warning device for the front
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details passenger’s seat does not function cor-
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation, rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- please contact your SUBARU dealer. front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will deactivated even when the front passen-
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will take the following actions.
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s . Ensure that no article is placed on the
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors seat other than a child restraint system
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on and its child occupant.
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
to the vehicle speed. seatback pocket.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
– At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) sition and seatback of front passenger’s
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-15

seat are locked into place securely by . No illumination of the warning the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
moving the seat back and forth. (Models light when the ignition switch is The indicators are located next to the
equipped with manual seats only) first turned to the “ON” position clock in the center portion of the dash-
. Continuous illumination of the board.
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor- warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- . Illumination of the warning light “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
tions described above, immediately con- while driving indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- which time the system is checked. Follow-
tion. ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the
& SRS airbag system airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
warning light tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
WARNING
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
If the warning light exhibits any of is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
the following conditions, there may ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
be a malfunction in the seatbelt indicator will remain off.
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi- is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer airbag ON indicator will remain off while
to have the system checked. Unless the OFF indicator will illuminate.
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
airbags will operate improperly (e.g. position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
SRS airbags may inflate in a very tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
minor collision or not inflate in a ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON neously even after the system check
severe collision), which may in- indicator period, the system is malfunctioning.
crease the risk of injury. / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
indicator ately for an inspection.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
– CONTINUED –
3-16 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
ing light/Malfunction in- This light also illuminates when the fuel function indicator light may stop blinking
dicator light filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. and illuminate steadily after several driv-
ing trips. You should have your vehicle
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
CAUTION checked by an authorized SUBARU deal-
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
er immediately.
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
malfunction indicator light illumi- Remove the cap and retighten it until it
& Coolant temperature
nates while you are driving, have clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering low indicator light (if
your vehicle checked/repaired by with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the equipped)/Coolant tem-
your SUBARU dealer as soon as cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE perature high warning
possible. Continued vehicle opera- warning light/malfunction indicator light light (if equipped)
tion without having the emission turn off immediately. It may take several
control system checked and re- driving trips. If the light does not turn off, CAUTION
paired as necessary could cause take your vehicle to your authorized
serious damage, which may not be SUBARU dealer immediately. . After turning the ignition switch
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. to the “ON” position, if this
! If the light is blinking indicator light/warning light be-
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks If the light is blinking while driving, an haves under any of the following
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- conditions, the electrical system
that there is a problem or potential tected which may damage the emission may be malfunctioning. Contact
problem somewhere in the emission con- control system. your SUBARU dealer immedi-
trol system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- ately for an inspection.
! If the light illuminates constantly sion control system, you should conform – It remains blinking in RED.
to the following instructions.
If the light illuminates constantly while – It remains illuminated in RED
. Reduce vehicle speed. for more than 2 seconds.
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system mal- . Avoid hard acceleration.
– It remains blinking in RED and
function has been detected. . Avoid steep uphill grades. BLUE alternately.
You should have your vehicle checked by . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
. While driving, if this indicator
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ble.
light/warning light behaves under
ately. . Stop towing a trailer as soon as any of the following conditions,
possible.
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-17

take the specified appropriate ing condition of the engine NOTE

measure listed below. If the engine is restarted after a certain
For the system check, this indicator light/ driving condition, this indicator light/
– Blinking in RED: warning light illuminates in RED for
Decelerate the vehicle. After warning light may illuminate in RED.
approximately 2 seconds when the igni- However, this is not a malfunction if the
the blinking RED light turns tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
off, you can drive the vehicle indicator light/warning light turns off
After that, this indicator light/warning light after a short time.
normally. changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
– Illuminated in RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up & Charge warning light
soon as possible, and refer sufficiently. If this light illuminates when the engine is
to the emergency steps for the running, it may indicate that the charging
case of engine overheating. If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the system is not working properly.
After that, have the system
checked by your nearest indicator light/warning light blinks in If the light illuminates while driving or does
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- RED. At this time, decelerate the vehicle. not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
gine overheating” F9-13. After the blinking RED light turns off, you engine at the first safe opportunity and
can drive the vehicle normally. However, if check the alternator belt. If the belt is
– Blinking in RED and BLUE the indicator light/warning light often blinks
alternately: loose, broken or if the belt is in good
in RED, the electrical system may be condition but the light remains illuminated,
The electrical system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU
malfunctioning. Contact your contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
dealer for an inspection. immediately.
SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases further, the indicator light/warning & Oil pressure warning
This coolant temperature low indicator light illuminates in RED continuously. At light
light/coolant temperature high warning this time, the engine may be overheating.
light has the following three functions. Safely stop the vehicle as soon as CAUTION
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- possible, and refer to the emergency
steps for the case of engine overheating. Do not operate the engine with the
cient warming up of the engine oil pressure warning light on. This
. Blinking in RED indicates that the Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-13.
After that, have the system checked by may cause serious engine damage.
engine is close to overheating
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat- If this light illuminates when the engine is
– CONTINUED –
3-18 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

running, it may indicate that the engine oil NOTE ! Transmission control system warn-
pressure is low and the lubricating system . After replacing or adding the engine ing
is not working properly. oil, if the engine oil level is within the If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
If the light illuminates while driving or does normal range when restarting the en- after the engine has started, it may
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the gine on a level surface, the warning indicate that the transmission control
engine at the first safe opportunity and light will turn off. system is not working properly. Contact
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is . The warning light may illuminate your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is temporarily in the following conditions immediately.
at the proper level but the light remains because a low oil level may be detected
illuminated, contact your nearest as a result of significant oil movement & Low tire pressure
SUBARU dealer immediately. in the engine. warning light (U.S. spec.
– when the vehicle is considerably models)
& Engine low oil level inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu- When the ignition switch is turned to the
warning light “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ously accelerated and decelerated
This light illuminates when the engine oil – when the vehicle is continuously ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
level decreases to the lower limit. turned seconds to check that the tire pressure
If the engine low oil level warning light – when the vehicle is driven on a monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle road that alternates continuously properly. If there is no problem and all tires
at a safe and level location, and then between uphill and downhill are properly inflated, the light will go out.
check the engine oil level. When the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
engine oil level is not within the normal should be checked monthly when cold
range, refill with engine oil if necessary.
& AT OIL TEMP warning and inflated to the inflation pressure
Refer to “Engine oil” F11-11. light (AT and CVT mod- recommended by the vehicle manufac-
If the warning light does not turn off after els) turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
refilling with engine oil or the warning light If this light illuminates when the engine is pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
illuminates even though the engine oil running, it may indicate that the transmis- a different size than the size indicated on
level is within the normal range, have the sion fluid temperature is too hot. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
system checked by a SUBARU dealer. If the light illuminates while driving, im- sure label, you should determine the
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place proper tire inflation pressure for those
and let the engine idle until the warning tires.)
light turns off. As an added safety feature, your vehicle
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-19

has been equipped with a tire pressure malfunction indicator is illuminated, the ally reducing speed. Then slowly
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates system may not be able to detect or signal pull off the road to a safe place.
a low tire pressure telltale when one or low tire pressure as intended. TPMS Otherwise an accident involving
more of your tires is significantly under- malfunctions may occur for a variety of serious vehicle damage and serious
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire reasons, including the installation of re- personal injury could occur.
pressure telltale illuminates, you should placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while
stop and check your tires as soon as the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres-
possible, and inflate them to the proper functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS as soon as possible.
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and to continue to function properly.
stopping ability. When a spare tire is mounted or a
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
wheel rim is replaced without the
Please note that the TPMS is not a dily after blinking for approximately one
original pressure sensor/transmitter
substitute for proper tire maintenance, minute, have the system inspected by
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
and it is the driver’s responsibility to your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
sure warning light will illuminate
maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
under-inflation has not reached the level
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
pressure telltale.
If this light does not illuminate four road wheels. Contact your
Your vehicle has also been equipped with SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate for tire and sensor replacement and/
turned ON or the light illuminates
when the system is not operating properly. or system resetting. If the light
steadily after blinking for approxi-
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- illuminates steadily after blinking
mately one minute, you should have
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. for approximately one minute,
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
When the system detects a malfunction, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
the telltale will flash for approximately one to have the system inspected.
soon as possible.
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving,
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep
as the malfunction exists. When the driving straight ahead while gradu-

– CONTINUED –
3-20 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

CAUTION SUBARU dealer. function warning, refer to “Brake system

– The warning light does not warning light” F3-21.
The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition
is NOT a substitute for manually NOTE
switch is turned to the “ON”
checking tire pressure. The tire position. If the warning light behavior is as
pressure should be checked peri- described in the following conditions,
– The warning light illuminates the ABS may be considered normal.
odically (at least monthly) using a
when the ignition switch is . The warning light illuminates right
tire gauge. After any change to tire
turned to the “ON” position, after the engine is started but turns off
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
but it does not turn off even immediately, remaining off.
itoring system will not re-check tire
when the vehicle speed ex- . The warning light remains illumi-
inflation pressures until the vehicle
ceeds approximately 12 km/h nated after the engine has been started,
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
(8 mph). but it turns off when the vehicle speed
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to – The warning light illuminates reaches approximately 8 mph (12
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the during driving. km/h).
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- – The warning light flashes. . The warning light illuminates during
tion pressures. If the tire pressures . When the warning light is on (and driving, but it turns off immediately and
are now above the severe low brake system warning light is remains off.
pressure threshold, the low tire off), the ABS function shuts When driving with an insufficient battery
pressure warning light should turn down; however, the conventional voltage such as when the engine is jump
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be brake system continues to oper- started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
sure to install the specified size for ate normally. nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
the front and rear tires. and does not indicate a malfunction.
. When the warning light is flash-
ing, the ABS may be malfunction- When the battery becomes fully charged,
ing. However, the conventional the light will turn off.
& ABS warning light
brake system continues to oper-
CAUTION ate normally.

. If any of the following conditions The ABS warning light illuminates to-
occur, we recommend that you gether with the brake system warning light
have the ABS repaired at the first if the EBD system malfunctions. For
available opportunity by your further details of the EBD system mal-
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-21

& Brake system NOTE . The brake system warning light may
warning light . When the ignition switch is turned to flash after the electronic parking brake
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the is frequently applied and released.
WARNING electronic parking brake applied, the However, the electronic parking brake
brake system warning light remains system is not malfunctioning if the light
. Driving with the brake system illuminated for approximately 30 sec- turns off for a short period of time.
warning light on is dangerous. onds and then turns off. This light has the following functions:
This indicates your brake system . When the electronic parking brake
may not be working properly. If switch is pressed to apply the electro- ! Parking brake warning
the light remains illuminated, nic parking brake while the ignition The light illuminates with the parking
have the brakes inspected by a switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- brake applied while the ignition switch is
SUBARU dealer immediately. tion, the brake system warning light in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
. If at all in doubt about whether illuminates, remains illuminated for parking brake is released.
the brakes are operating prop- approximately 30 seconds and then ! Brake fluid level warning
erly, do not drive the vehicle. turns off.
. Even if the brake system warning This light illuminates when the brake fluid
Have your vehicle towed to the level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- light flashes, if the warning light beha-
vior is as described in the following of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
pair. switch in the “ON” position and with the
examples, the electronic parking brake
. If the brake system warning light parking brake released.
system is not malfunctioning.
flashes, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc- – The warning light turns off when If the light should illuminate while driving
tioning. Immediately stop your the electronic parking brake is ap- (with the parking brake released and with
vehicle in a safe location, use plied or released. the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it
tire stops under the tires to – The warning light turns off when could be an indication of leaking of brake
prevent the vehicle from moving the ignition switch is turned to the fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs,
and contact your SUBARU deal- “ON” position again. immediately stop the vehicle at the near-
er. For details, refer to “Electro- . The brake system warning light may est safe place and check the brake fluid
nic parking brake” F7-37. flash immediately after the engine is level. If the fluid level is below the “MIN”
started. However, it is not malfunction- mark in the reservoir, do not drive the
ing if the warning light turns off after vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the
the electronic parking brake is re- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For
leased. details, refer to “Towing” F9-14.

– CONTINUED –
3-22 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution again, apply the parking brake, and check heard if the parking brake switch is
(EBD) system warning the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” operated when the parking brake cannot
The brake system warning light also F11-24. be applied.
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates ! Frequent operation warning
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
together with the ABS warning light. malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the The brake system warning light flashes for
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the 20 seconds and a chirp sound will be
the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected. heard if the parking brake switch is
warning light illuminate simultaneously 6. If the brake fluid level is below the operated too frequently. In this case, the
during driving. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. operation of the parking brake switch is
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the restricted to protect the electronic parking
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- brake system.
tional braking system will still function. nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For
However, the rear wheels will be more details, refer to “Towing” F9-14. NOTE
prone to locking when the brakes are Wait until the warning light turns off.
applied harder than usual and the vehi- ! Electronic parking brake system
cle’s motion may therefore become some- warning ! Emergency released warning
what harder to control. The brake system warning light flashes The brake system warning light flashes
when the electronic parking brake system when the parking brake is automatically
If the brake system warning light and ABS is malfunctioning. If the warning light
warning light illuminate simultaneously, released in case of an emergency.
flashes, promptly park in a safe location
take the following steps: as soon as possible and contact your
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, SUBARU dealer.
flat place. The brake system warning light remains
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. illuminated when the parking brake cannot
3. Release the parking brake. If both be released even if the parking brake
warning lights turn off, the EBD system switch is pulled. For details, refer to
may be malfunctioning. “Electronic parking brake” F7-37.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
dealer and have the system inspected.
ing
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine The brake system warning light flashes for
has been restarted, shut down the engine 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-23

& Hill Holder indicator NOTE & Door open indicator

light This light does not turn off unless the light
tank is replenished up to an internal
WARNING fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US When any of the doors, the rear gate
gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal). (Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
If the Hill Holder indicator light does fully closed, the door open indicator light
not illuminate even when the Hill illuminates. This function is effective even
CAUTION if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
Holder switch is pressed to activate
the Hill Holder function, the electro- Promptly put fuel in the tank when- “OFF” or “Acc” position (all models) or the
nic parking brake system may be ever the low fuel warning light key is removed from the ignition switch
malfunctioning. Immediately stop illuminates. Engine misfires as a (models without “keyless access with
the vehicle in a safe location and result of an empty tank could cause push-button start system”).
contact your SUBARU dealer. damage to the engine. The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open warning
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder light.
switch is pressed to activate the Hill & Door open warning Always make sure this light is not illumi-
Holder function. For details about the Hill light (models with type A
Holder function, “Hill Holder function” F7- nated before you start to drive.
combination meter)
38.
The warning light illuminates if any door, & Windshield washer
& Low fuel warning the rear gate (Outback) or trunk lid fluid warning light
light (Legacy) is not fully closed. This function This light illuminates when the fluid level in
is effective even if the ignition switch is in the windshield washer fluid tank de-
The low fuel warning light illuminates the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “Acc” position (all
when the tank is nearly empty approxi- creases to the lower limit (approximately
models), or the key is removed from the 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp ignition switch (models without “keyless
gal). It only operates when the ignition access with push-button start system”).
switch is in the “ON” position.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.

– CONTINUED –
3-24 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& All-Wheel Drive & Vehicle Dynamics NOTE

warning light (AT and Control warning light/ . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
CVT models) Vehicle Dynamics Con- Dynamics Control system itself mal-
trol operation indicator functions, the warning light only illumi-
WARNING nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
light Brake System) remains fully opera-
Continued driving with the AWD tional.
warning light flashing can lead to ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when
powertrain damage. If the AWD light the electronic control system of the
warning light flashes, promptly park ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
in a safe place then check whether CAUTION malfunctions.
all four tires are the same diameter The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
and whether any of the tires has a The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
probably inoperative under any of the
puncture or has lost air pressure for tem provides its ABS control
following conditions. Have your vehicle
some other reason. through the electrical circuit of the
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
ately.
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
NOTE Control system becomes unable to . The warning light does not illuminate
If the temporary spare tire is used, the provide ABS control. As a result, the when the ignition switch is turned to the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of Vehicle Dynamics Control system “ON” position.
the temporary spare tire should there- becomes inoperative, causing the . The warning light illuminates while the
fore be restricted to the minimum time warning light to illuminate. Although vehicle is running.
necessary. Replace the temporary both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
spare tire with a conventional tire as and ABS are inoperative in this
NOTE
soon as possible. case, the ordinary functions of the If the warning light behavior is as
brake system are still available. You described in the following examples,
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
with tires of different diameters fitted on its will be safe while driving in this
condition, but drive carefully and may be considered normal.
wheels or with the air pressure exces- . The warning light illuminates right
sively low in any of its tires. have your vehicle checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- after the engine is started but turns off
ble. immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-25

while the vehicle is subsequently being started. & Warning chimes and warning
driven. light of the keyless access
. The warning light illuminates during & Vehicle Dynamics with push-button start sys-
driving, but turns off immediately and Control OFF indicator tem (if equipped)
remains off. light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- The light illuminates when the Vehicle
tion indicator light Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
The indicator light flashes during activa- to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
tion of the skid suppression function and trol system.
during activation of the traction control The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
function. probably malfunctioning under any of the
NOTE following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
. The light may remain illuminated for ately.
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold . The light does not illuminate when the
weather. This does not indicate the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
existence of a problem. The light position. Access key warning light
should turn off as soon as the engine . The light does not turn off even after a The keyless access with push-button start
has warmed up. period of approximately 2 seconds after system sounds a warning chime and
. The indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch has been turned to the flashes the access key warning light on
the engine has developed a problem “ON” position. the combination meter in order to minimize
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ improper operations and help protect your
malfunction indicator light is on. vehicle from theft.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is When the warning chime sounds and/or
probably malfunctioning under the follow- the warning light flashes, take the appro-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked priate action.
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has

– CONTINUED –
3-26 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

WARNING NOTE
. Even when the access key is within
Never drive the vehicle if the indi- the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
cator on the push-button ignition the access key warning for engine start
switch is flashing in green when may be provided depending on the
starting the engine. This indicates status of the access key and the
the status that the steering wheel is environmental conditions.
not released and could result in an . When the access key is taken out of
accident involving serious injury or the vehicle through an open window,
death. the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
CAUTION
! List of warnings
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on CAUTION
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation When any of the following warnings
indicator is still flashing in green, occurs even if the access key warn-
there could be a steering lock ing light does not illuminate, take
malfunction. Contact your the appropriate action.
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-27

Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

on push-button Status Action
chime chime ignition switch

The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “Acc” and the “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
Ding, select lever is in the “P” position. *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
ding ... — — the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
(intermittent) The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door is Close the driver’s door.
open.
Take out the access key from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
Lockout warning: *The doors cannot be locked while the
An attempt was made to lock all doors while access key is inside the vehicle.
the access key is left inside the vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
Ding Short beep
(2 seconds) — will be unlocked.
Access key lock-in warning: Take out the access key from the vehicle,
The door lock button was pressed while the and lock the doors.
push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the *If the access key is inside the vehicle, the
access key is inside the vehicle. doors cannot be locked.

Beep, beep, Door ajar warning:

beep, beep, The door lock button is pushed while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and *If one of the doors including the rear gate is
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key inside the vehicle, or
The door lock button was pressed while switch the push-button ignition switch to
— Long beep (60 — carrying the access key, the push-button “OFF”.
seconds max.) ignition switch is in a position other than *If the push-button ignition switch is not
“OFF” and the select lever is in the “P” switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
position. locked.
Ding, Access key warning:
ding ... — — The vehicle was driven while the access key Carry the access key, and drive the vehicle.
(7 seconds) is not inside the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –
3-28 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

on push-button Status Action
chime chime ignition switch
Access key warning for engine start:
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch was pressed Carry the access key, and press the push-
while the access key is not inside the button ignition switch.
vehicle.
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the access
Ding Beep, beep, — key and closed the driver’s door while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
beep (3 times) push-button ignition switch is in a position “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in
the “P” position.
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with Return the access key to inside the vehicle,
Ding Beep, beep, — the access key and closed a door other than or switch the push-button ignition switch to
beep (3 times) the driver’s door while the push-button “OFF”.
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF”.
The driver exited the vehicle with the access
Long beep Long beep key and closed the driver’s door while the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
(continuous) (continuous) — push-button ignition switch is in a position switch the push-button ignition switch to
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
position other than the “P” position.
Select lever position warning:
Long beep The driver’s door was opened while the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
(continuous) — — push-button ignition switch is in a position switch the push-button ignition switch to
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
position other than the “P” position.
Ding — — The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.

Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and left
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was performed, lightly, depress the brake pedal and press
but the steering is still locked. the push-button ignition switch.
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-29

Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

on push-button Status Action
chime chime ignition switch
System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and
Ding — Flashes in orange A malfunction was detected in the power have the vehicle inspected.
system or steering lock.

– CONTINUED –
3-30 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Security indicator light indicate that immobilizer system may be & Select lever/gear position in-
malfunctioning. Contact your nearest dicator
This indicator light shows the status of the SUBARU dealer immediately.
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system. In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
! Alarm system used, the security indicator light illumi-
It blinks to show the driver the operational nates.
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2- NOTE
25. Even if the security indicator light
! Immobilizer system flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
The light deters potential thieves by blown), the immobilizer system will
indicating that the vehicle is equipped with function normally.
an immobilizer system. It begins flashing
under the following conditions. Type A
For models with “keyless access with 1) Upshift/downshift indicator
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after any door is opened
or closed when the push-button ignition
switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-31

! Gear position indicator setting (MT NOTE

models) . The initial setting for your vehicle of
The gear position indicator light can be the gear position indicator has been set
activated or deactivated by performing the for activation “ ” at the time of
following procedure. shipment from the factory.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ . It is not possible to change the
“OFF” position. setting of the gear position indicator
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or position. Change the setting when the
“ ” on the trip meter display. ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”
The display can be switched as shown in or “Acc” position.
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob. & Turn signal indicator
Type B lights
1) Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and CVT
models) These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
This indicator shows the position of the
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
and CVT models).
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
! Upshift/downshift indicator (AT and Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-43.
CVT models)
When the manual mode is selected, the & High beam indicator
gear position indicator (which shows the *1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot light
current gear selection) and the upshift/ be displayed when the ignition switch is This light shows that the headlights are in
downshift indicator light up. Refer to in the “ON” position. the high beam mode.
“Selection of manual mode” F7-27. *2: MT models only This indicator light also illuminates when
3. To change the current setting, press the headlight flasher is operated.
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
– CONTINUED –
3-32 Instruments and controls/Clock

& Cruise control indica- . when the light switch is in the “AUTO” Clock
tor light position and the headlights illuminate
automatically NOTE
This light illuminates when the cruise
control main button is pressed to activate & Front fog light indicator Your SUBARU dealer can change the
the cruise control function. For details, light (if equipped) settings of activating/deactivating the
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-42. automatic adjustment of the clock by
This indicator light illuminates while the the GPS (Global Positioning System)
CAUTION front fog lights are illuminated. (for models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system). Contact your
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ SUBARU dealer for details.
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At
this time, avoid driving at high
speed and have your vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator light
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set to use the cruise control
function. The clock shows the time while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
& Headlight indicator position.
light To adjust the time shown by the clock,
This indicator light illuminates under the press the “+” button or the “−” button. If
following conditions. you press the “+” button, the indicated
time will change in one-minute incre-
. when the light switch is turned to the
ments. If you press the “−” button, the
“ ” or “ ” position
 Instruments and controls/Multi function display 3-33

indicated time will change in one-minute Multi function display

decrements. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.

Type B combination meter

1) Multi function display switching knob
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, each successive press of the
multi function display switching knob
toggles the display in the following se-
quence.

The outside temperature is always indi-

cated on the display with the ignition
Type A combination meter
switch in the “ON” position.
1) Multi function display switching knob

– CONTINUED –
3-34 Instruments and controls/Multi function display

& Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- “ON” position, the indication does not
tor cation flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.

& Average fuel consumption

1) U.S. spec. models 1) U.S. spec. models

2) Except U.S. spec. models 2) Except U.S. spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
under any of the following conditions: (38C) or lower while the display is giving
. When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
. During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its 1) U.S. spec. models
down. original indication. 2) Except U.S. spec. models
. When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an This indication shows the average rate of
falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower fuel consumption since the trip meter was
when the ignition switch is turned to the last reset.
 Instruments and controls/Multi function display 3-35

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica- & Current fuel consumption & Driving range on remaining
tion between the average fuel consump- fuel
tion corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the 1) U.S. spec. models
actual values and should thus be 2) Except U.S. spec. models 1) U.S. spec. models
treated only as a guide. 2) Except U.S. spec. models
. When either trip meter indication is This indication shows the rate of fuel
reset, the average fuel consumption consumption at the present moment. The driving range indicates the distance
corresponding to that trip meter indica- that can be driven taking into account the
tion is not shown until the vehicle has amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
subsequently covered a distance of 1 the average rate of fuel consumption.
mile (or 1 km). When the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates, the driving range indication flashes
for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)

– CONTINUED –
3-36 Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type A combination meter)

Multi information display

(models with type A combi-
nation meter)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the
multi information display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi information display
1) U.S. spec. models
interferes with your ability to con-
2) Except U.S. spec. models centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
before performing operations on the
If the driving range is shown as “ ”, screen. Also, do not concentrate on
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the the display while driving. Doing so
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi- may cause you to look away from
ately. the road and could result in an
accident.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is Various information will be shown on the
only a guide. The indicated value may multi information display. Also, a warning
differ from the actual driving range on message will appear on the display if a
remaining fuel, so you must immedi- malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
ately fill the tank when the low fuel several settings for the displayed content Multi information display
warning light illuminates. can be performed. 1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-
11.)
2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” F3-38.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-38.)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator”
 Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type A combination meter) 3-37
F3-30.) screen, and appear on the display accom- NOTE
4) Cruise control information display panied by a beep. If such a screen is . The welcome screen will disappear
5) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-8.)/ displayed, take proper action according to
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip when the ignition switch is turned to
meter” F3-9.) the message shown on the screen. the “ON” position while the welcome
The warning screen will return to the screen is displayed.
original screen after a few seconds. While . If any of the doors (including the
the “ ” information reminder is shown on rear gate) is opened while the welcome
the display, it may be possible to display screen is displayed, the door ajar
the warning screen again. To recall the warning will appear.
message marked with “ ” on the display, . The welcome screen can be set to
pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome
wheel toward you. Good-bye Screen” F3-40.

& Welcome screen & Starting screen

Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)

& Basic operation

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “ /SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set. When the door is unlocked and the When the ignition switch is turned to the
driver’s door is opened, the welcome “ON” position, the starting screen will
If there are some useful messages, such screen will appear for approximately 20 appear for approximately 2 seconds.
as vehicle information, warning informa- seconds.
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
– CONTINUED –
3-38 Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type A combination meter)

& Good-bye screen & Warning screen Default screen:

Example of warning Journey time screen:

When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the “Good-bye” If there is a warning message or a
screen will appear for approximately 3 maintenance notification, it will appear for
seconds. approximately 3 seconds. Take the appro-
priate actions based on the messages
indicated.

& Basic screens

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
 Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type A combination meter) 3-39
Menu screen entering screen: The menu list is as follows.

First menu Second menu

Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen
Gauge Initial Movement
Languages
Return
EyeSight (models with EyeSight system) Warning Volume
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function
Return
While this screen is selected, pull the “ / Auto Light Sensor ―
SET” switch to enter the menu screen.
Default Settings ―

& Menu screens

Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu
screens when all of the following condi-
tions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
. The “ ” information reminder is off.

– CONTINUED –
3-40 Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type A combination meter)

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the ! EyeSight (models with EyeSight

! Auto Light Sensor
steering wheel, you can select the menu. system)
The operational sensitivity of the auto on/
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the NOTE off headlights can be set. You can select
selected menu. For models with the EyeSight system, “Min”, “Low”, “Mid” or “Max”.
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
NOTE ment for the EyeSight system.
! Default Settings
If you enter the “Return” menu, the Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
system will return to the previous After entering the “EyeSight” menu, select restore customized settings to the factory
screen. one of the following menus. default settings. Select “No” to return to
! Warning Volume the previous screen without restoring to
! Screen Settings the factory default settings.
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu, The volume of the warning buzzer that
select one of the following menus. sounds when the EyeSight system is in
use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”
! Welcome Good-bye Screen and “Min”).
The welcome screen/good-bye screens ! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
can be activated or deactivated. Select
“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off” When adaptive cruise control is used, the
to deactivate the screens. buzzer that sounds if a vehicle is detected
in front or if detection is not possible can
! Gauge Initial Movement be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
The movement of the meter needles and activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to deac-
gauge needles that occurs when the tivate the buzzer.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor
position can be activated or deactivated. Function
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to
deactivate. When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds if a vehicle in front has
! Languages started can be activated or deactivated.
Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch on the Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select
steering wheel to display the preferred “Off” to deactivate the buzzer.
language. Then pull the “ /SET” switch to
select the displayed language.
 Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-41

Light control switch Regardless of the position of the light & Headlights
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
CAUTION the ignition switch.
. Use of any lights for a long period NOTE
of time while the engine is not The light control switch can be oper-
running can cause the battery to ated (except auto on/off headlights),
discharge. even under the following conditions.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make . when the key is not inserted into the
sure that the light control switch ignition switch (models without “key-
is turned to the off position. If the less access with push-button start
vehicle is left unattended for a system”)
long time with the light control . when the push-button ignition
switch set to a position other switch is turned off (models with “key- To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
than the off position, the battery less access with push-button start the end of the turn signal lever.
may be discharged. system”)
“ ” position
Models with “keyless access with If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
push-button start system”: parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
The light control switch operates when the side marker lights, tail lights and license
the driver that the lights are illumi-
push-button ignition switch is in the “Acc” plate lights are on.
nated.
or “ON” position.
“ ” position
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are Instrument panel illumination, parking
turned off when the push-button ignition lights, front side marker lights, rear side
switch is turned off. marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”: “ ” position: auto on/off headlights
The light control switch operates when the When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
key is inserted in the ignition switch. position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
– CONTINUED –
3-42 Instruments and controls/Light control switch

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights ! Sensor for the auto on/off head- & High/low beam change
and license plate lights are automatically lights (dimmer)
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
“ ” position
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
type A combination meter, the sensitiv-
ity can be changed using the display.
For details, refer to “Auto Light Sen-
sor” F3-40. The sensor is on the instrument panel as To change from low beam to high beam,
shown in the illustration. push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
CAUTION beam indicator light “ ” on the combina-
tion meter is also on.
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
the level of the ambient light cor- back to the center position.
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
 Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever 3-43

& Headlight flasher & Daytime running light system Turn signal lever
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions.
CAUTION . The parking brake is fully released. To activate the right turn signal, push the
. The light switch is in the off or “ ” turn signal lever up. To activate the left
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position. turn signal, push the turn signal lever
position for more than just a few . The light switch is in the “AUTO” down. When the turn is finished, the lever
seconds. position and the headlights do not turn will return automatically. If the lever does
on automatically. not return after cornering, return the lever
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
. The select lever is in a position other to the neutral position by hand.
toward you and then release it. The high
than the “P” position (AT and CVT mod-
beam will stay on for as long as you hold To signal a lane change, push the turn
els).
the lever. The headlight flasher works signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
even though the lighting switch is in the NOTE during the lane change. The turn signal
off position. When the light switch is in the “ ” indicator lights will flash in the direction of
position, the front side marker lights, the turn or lane change. The lever will
When the headlights are on high beam,
tail lights and license plate lights are return automatically to the neutral position
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
illuminated. when you release it.
combination meter also illuminates.
3-44 Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control

Illumination brightness con- NOTE Front fog light switch

trol . When the control dial is turned fully (if equipped)
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

The illumination brightness of the clock 1) Headlight switch

display, audio, air conditioner, multi func- 2) Fog light switch
tion display and meter/gauge dims under The front fog lights will turn on when the
the following conditions. fog light switch is placed in the “ ”
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or position while the headlights are in the
“ ” position following condition.
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO” . while the headlight switch is in the “ ”
position and the headlights illuminate position
automatically . while the headlight switch is in the
You can adjust the illumination brightness “AUTO” position and the headlights turn
for better visibility. on automatically
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
To darken, turn the control dial downward. switch back down to the “ ” position.
 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-45

Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
WARNING before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the
windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be
defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo-
Otherwise the washer fluid can tor to burn out. If the wiper
freeze on the windshield, blocking blades are frozen to the window
your view. glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
Indicator light (type A) cer (if equipped) or rear window
CAUTION defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. Do not operate the washer con- . If the wipers stop during opera-
tinuously for more than 10 sec- tion because of ice or some other
onds, or when the washer fluid obstruction on the window, the
tank is empty. This may cause wiper motor could burn out even
overheating of the washer motor. if the wiper switch is turned off. If
Check the washer fluid level this occurs, promptly stop the
frequently, such as at fuel stops. vehicle in a safe place, turn the
. Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
the windshield or rear window is “OFF” position and clean the
dry. This may scratch the glass, window glass to allow proper
damage the wiper blades and wiper operation.
Indicator light (type B) cause the wiper motor to burn . Use clean water if windshield
The indicator light located on the combi- out. Before operating the wiper washer fluid is unavailable. In
nation meter will illuminate when the front on a dry windshield or rear areas where water freezes in
fog lights are on. window, always use the wind- winter, use SUBARU Windshield
shield washer. Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
– CONTINUED –
3-46 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

Refer to “Windshield washer over the windshield or rear window. & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” F11-35. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate- switches
Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper
blades results in jerky wiper operation The wiper operates only when the ignition
when there are freezing tempera- switch is in the “ON” position.
tures, use non-freezing type wi- and streaking on the glass. If you
per blades. cannot remove those streaks after ! Windshield wipers
operating the washer or if the wiper
. Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
wiper blades. mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- when you rinse with water.
tected against overloads by a circuit . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
breaker. If the motor operates continu- even after following this procedure,
ously under an unusually heavy load, replace the wiper blades with new
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions,
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades” : Mist (for a single wipe)
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-37.
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- : Off
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker : Intermittent
will reset itself, and the wipers will : Low speed
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win- : High speed
dow glass periodically with a washer To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
solution to prevent streaking, and to control lever down.
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
washer for at least 1 second so that the “ ” position.
washer solution will be sprinkled all
 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-47

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the ! Windshield washer

lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type A)
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” wipers operate while you pull the lever.
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type B)

– CONTINUED –
3-48 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

NOTE & Rear window wiper and tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-
The windshield washer fluid warning washer switch (Outback) tently at intervals corresponding to the
light illuminates when the washer fluid vehicle speed. In this position, when you
level in the tank has dropped to the move the select lever to the “R” position
lower limit. If the warning light illumi- (AT and CVT models) or the shift lever to
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the the reverse position (MT models), the rear
tank refilling method, refer to “Wind- wiper will switch to continuous operation.
shield washer fluid” F11-35. When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
: Washer
eration)
(accompanied by wiper op-
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
: Continuous
downward to the “ ” position. The washer
: Intermittent fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
: Off you release the knob.
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
: eration)

! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “ ” position.
With the switch turned to the “ ” posi-
 Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer 3-49

Defogger and deicer vated only when the ignition switch is in window defogger, outside mirror defogger
the “ON” position. and windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
control switch illuminates while the defog-
ger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blades have been deiced
Control switch (type A) completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, it is possible for a
SUBARU dealer to set the defogger and
deicer system for the continuous opera-
tion mode. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.

CAUTION
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) Control switch (type B) . To prevent the battery from being
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) discharged, do not operate the
To activate the defogger and deicer
defogger and deicer system con-
The defogger and deicer system is acti- system, press the control switch. The rear
tinuously for any longer than
– CONTINUED –
3-50 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

necessary. system stops operating. Mirrors

. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra- Always check that the inside and outside
sives to clean the inner surface mirrors are properly adjusted before you
of the rear window. They may start driving.
damage the conductors printed
on the window. & Type A inside mirror (if
equipped)
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer
automatically stops operating, though The mirror has a day and night position.
the rear window defogger and outside Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror
mirror defogger maintain continuous toward you for the night position. Push it
operation in this condition. away for the day position. The night
. While the defogger and deicer sys- position reduces glare from headlights.
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continu-
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-51

& Type B inside mirror (if you press the buttons. the mirror surface turns bright if the shift
equipped) lever/select lever is shifted into the “R”
Gear Period of Function (reverse) position. This is to ensure good
time button
position is pressed displayed rearward visibility during reversing.
Except Briefly Auto-dimming
R (reverse) function ON/OFF*
R (reverse) Briefly Rear view image
display: ON/OFF*
mode
6 to 12 Enter the lan-
seconds guage selection
mode
12 to 15 Rear view image
seconds display: opera-
tional/non-opera-
tional mode
1) Rear view image display
2) HomeLink® button 1 *: The setting returns to “ON” as a default
3) HomeLink® button 2 setting every time the ignition switch is turned to The mirror has a photosensor attached on
4) Function indicator the “OFF” position. both the front and back sides. During
5) HomeLink® button 3 ! Auto-dimming function nighttime driving, these sensors detect
6) Photosensor The auto-dimming function is an anti-glare distracting glare from vehicle headlights
7) Power on button capability which automatically reduces behind you and automatically dim the
8) Power off button
glare coming from headlights of vehicles mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
The mirror has the following features. behind you. your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
. Auto-dimming function for anti-glare By pressing the power on button, the auto- similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
capability dimming function is turned on. By pressing sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
. Rear view image display the power off button, the auto-dimming cloth or an applicator.
. HomeLink® Wireless Control System function is turned off. When the auto-
dimming function is on, the function NOTE
Using the power on button, you can indicator will illuminate in green. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
display the various functions of the rear towel or similar item dampened with
view image display based on how long Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
– CONTINUED –
3-52 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

glass cleaner. Do not spray glass mode, with the function indicator in or-
cleaner directly on the mirror surface. ange, every time the shift lever/select
By doing so, the sprayed glass cleaner lever is shifted into the “R” (reverse)
could enter the inside of the mirror position.
housing. That may cause a malfunction
in the mirror. If the ignition switch is turned to the
”LOCK”/OFF” position, the display setting
! Rear view image display returns to the on mode as a default setting
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” the next time the ignition switch is turned
position and the shift lever/select lever is to the “ON” position.
in the “R” (reverse) position, the rear view ! Language mode change
camera automatically displays the rear
The language mode of the captions on the
view image behind the vehicle on the
rear view image display is selectable in
inside mirror. 1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
English or French in the following ways.
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
Also, the following help lines are indicated (green horizontal line) 1. Press and hold the power on button for
as a guide to help you realize the actual 3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper 6 to 12 seconds while the shift lever/select
distance from the display. (green horizontal line) lever is in the “R” (reverse) position, and
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper then release it. The display will enter the
(yellow horizontal line) language selection mode.
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line) 2. Briefly press the power on button to
toggle the captions on the display in
By pressing the power on button while the English or French.
shift lever/select lever is in the “R” 3. By releasing the power on button for 5
(reverse) position, the rear view image seconds, the display blinks one time to
display turns to the on mode. By pressing show that the language mode is selected.
the power off button while the shift lever/
select lever is in the “R” (reverse) position, ! Non-operational mode
the rear view image display turns to the off The rear view image display can be set as
mode. non-operational. After setting the display
to the non-operational mode, the display
Once the rear view image display is set to
does not show the rear view image even if
the off mode, the display stays in the off
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-53

the ignition switch is reset (turning the operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
ignition switch to the “ON” position after HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people
turning it to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position). www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- and objects are out of the way
3515. of the garage door or other
To set the display to the non-operational
device to prevent potential harm
mode, press and hold the power on button Note the following information about this
or damage.
for 12 to 15 seconds while the shift lever/ system.
select lever is in the “R” (reverse) position, If your vehicle is equipped with the . Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-
and then release it. The display is now in HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it less Control System with a gar-
the non-operational mode. After the dis- complies with Part 15 of the Federal age door opener that lacks the
play has been set to the non-operational Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature
mode, the function indicator will illuminate the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry as required by applicable safety
in orange while the shift lever/select lever Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener
is in the “R” (reverse) position. to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
To return the display to the operational (1) this device may not cause harmful
reverse, does not meet these
mode, press and hold the power on button interference, and (2) this device must
safety standards. Using a garage
for 12 to 15 seconds again. accept any interference received, includ-
door opener without these fea-
ing interference that may cause undesired
For precautions about the rear view tures increases risk of serious
operation.
camera and the rear view image, refer to injury or death. For more infor-
“Rear view camera” F6-18. Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink®
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
tem use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are CAUTION
devices such as gate operators, garage registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
and security systems. Wireless Control System to operate
WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the gate, unplug the device’s motor
mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the from the outlet during programming
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- to prevent motor burnout.
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
– CONTINUED –
3-54 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

NOTE NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink® Some gate operators and garage door
Wireless Control System for the de- openers may require you to replace
sired devices, retain the hand-held this programming step 4 with proce-
transmitters for further programming dures in “Programming for entrance
or device testing in the event of a gates and garage door openers in
problem. Canada” F3-55.
. It is recommended that you insert a
5. Hold down both buttons until the
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
ter of a device to ensure correct
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
programming.
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
! Garage door opener program- released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
ming in the U.S.A. 1) HomeLink® button 1 cates successful programming of the new
2) HomeLink® button 2 frequency signal.)
NOTE 3) HomeLink® button 3 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
When programming the HomeLink® ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
2. Press and hold the two outer light. If the indicator light stays on con-
Wireless Control System for a garage HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
door opener, it is suggested that you tinuously, your garage door should acti-
3) until the indicator light begins to flash vate and the programming is completed.
park the vehicle outside the garage. (after approximately 20 seconds). Then
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door release both buttons. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
opener from the outlet. 3. Hold the end of the garage door seconds and then stays on continuously,
opener’s hand-held transmitter between your garage door opener may be pro-
NOTE 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from tected by a rolling code feature. In this
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- case you need to perform the additional
already programmed for other devices, gram. steps that are described in “Programming
skip step 2 because it clears the rolling-code-protected garage door open-
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
memory of all three buttons. ers in the U.S.A.” F3-55.
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-55

! Programming rolling-code-pro- refer to your garage door opener’s instruc- NOTE

tected garage door openers in tion manual. Some garage door openers may re-
the U.S.A. quire you to do the above press-hold-
If your garage door opener has a rolling release sequence a third time to com-
code feature, program the HomeLink® plete the programming.
Wireless Control System for it by following 4. The garage door opener should now
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-54. Then System and your garage door opener
continue with the following steps. should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person ! Programming for entrance gates
may make the programming quicker and garage door openers in
and easier. Canada
1) Training button 1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
2. Press the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit NOTE
(which activates the “training light” on the If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds. already programmed for other devices,
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for skip step 2 because it clears the
2 seconds and release the HomeLink® memory of all three buttons.
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.

1. Locate the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
– CONTINUED –
3-56 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wire- rapidly, release both buttons.
less Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink ®
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its button.
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button mem-
2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat- ory
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted.
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light NOTE
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
. Performing this procedure erases
seconds). Then release both buttons. To program other devices such as door the memory of all the preprogrammed
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ locks, home lighting and security systems, buttons simultaneously. The memory
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com of individual buttons cannot be erased.
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515. . It is recommended that upon the
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single Home- sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
wish to program. Link® button programmed HomeLink® buttons be
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® erased for security purposes.
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-57

& Auto-dimming mirror (if reward visibility during reversing.

equipped) When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors

1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2
3) HomeLink® button 3
1) LED
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons 2) Switch
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator 3) Sensor
light begins to flash (after approximately The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
20 seconds). feature which automatically reduces glare
2. Release both buttons. coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you.
! In case a problem occurs The mirror has a photosensor attached on
By pressing and holding the switch for the front and back sides. During nighttime
If you cannot activate a device using the less than 3 seconds, the automatic dim- driving, these sensors detect distracting
corresponding HomeLink® button after ming function is toggled on or off. When glare from vehicle headlights behind you
programming, contact HomeLink® at the automatic dimming function is on, the and automatically dim the mirror to elim-
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- LED indicator will illuminate. inate glare and preserve your vision. For
3515 for assistance. this reason, use care not to cover the
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the shift sensors with stickers, or other similar
lever/select lever is shifted into the “R” items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
(reverse) position. This is to ensure good using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an
– CONTINUED –
3-58 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

applicator. turned on or off. When the automatic nighttime driving, these sensors detect
dimming function is on, the LED indicator distracting glare from vehicle headlights
& Auto-dimming mirror with will illuminate. behind you and automatically dim the
HomeLink® (if equipped) Even with the mirror in the automatic mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns your vision. For this reason, use care not
bright if the shift lever/select lever is to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
shifted into the “R” (reverse) position. This similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
is to ensure good rearward visibility during sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
reversing. cloth or an applicator.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper ! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
towel or similar material dampened with tem
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
directly on the mirror as that may cause can be used to activate remote control
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror devices such as gate operators, garage
housing and damage the mirror. door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
! Photosensors
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
1) HomeLink® button 1
mirror, each of which can be programmed
2) HomeLink® button 2
for operation of one desired device. For
3) LED
4) HomeLink® button 3
details on the device types which can be
5) Sensor operated by this system, consult the
6) Automatic dimming on button HomeLink® website at:
7) Automatic dimming off button www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare 3515.
feature which automatically reduces glare Note the following information about this
coming from headlights of vehicles behind system.
you. It also contains a HomeLink® wireless If your vehicle is equipped with the
control system. HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
By pressing the automatic dimming on/off complies with Part 15 of the Federal
The mirror has a photosensor attached on Communications Commission Rules in
button, the automatic dimming function is both the front and back sides. During the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-59

Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener programming.
to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
(1) this device may not cause harmful signaling the door to stop and ! Garage door opener program-
interference, and (2) this device must reverse, does not meet these ming in the U.S.A.
accept any interference received, includ- safety standards. Using a garage
ing interference that may cause undesired door opener without these fea- NOTE
operation. tures increases risk of serious When programming the HomeLink®
injury or death. For more infor- Wireless Control System for a garage
Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink® door opener, it is suggested that you
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or park the vehicle outside the garage.
service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
use this equipment. 1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con- CAUTION NOTE
trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink® If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
Wireless Control System to operate already programmed for other devices,
WARNING skip step 2 because it clears the
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor memory of all three buttons.
. When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- from the outlet during programming
tem, you may be operating a to prevent motor burnout.
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
NOTE
of the garage door or other . After programming your HomeLink®
device to prevent potential harm Wireless Control System for the de-
or damage. sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- or device testing in the event of a
less Control System with a gar- problem.
age door opener that lacks the . It is recommended that you insert a
safety stop and reverse feature new battery in the hand-held transmit-
as required by applicable safety ter of a device to ensure correct
– CONTINUED –
3-60 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

NOTE ! Programming rolling-code-pro-

Some gate operators and garage door tected garage door openers in
openers may require you to replace the U.S.A.
this programming step 4 with proce- If your garage door opener has a rolling
dures in “Programming for entrance code feature, program the HomeLink®
gates and garage door openers in Wireless Control System for it by following
Canada” F3-61. steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
5. Hold down both buttons until the programming in the U.S.A.” F3-59. Then
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first continue with the following steps.
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be NOTE
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi- The assistance of a second person
cates successful programming of the new may make the programming quicker
1) HomeLink® button 1 and easier.
2) HomeLink® button 2 frequency signal.)
3) HomeLink® button 3 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
2. Press and hold the two outer light. If the indicator light stays on con-
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button tinuously, your garage door should acti-
3) until the indicator light begins to flash vate and the programming is completed.
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
3. Hold the end of the garage door seconds and then stays on continuously,
opener’s hand-held transmitter between your garage door opener may be pro-
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from tected by a rolling code feature. In this
the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- case you need to perform the additional
gram. steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
ers in the U.S.A.” F3-60.
the hand-held transmitter button and the 1. Locate the training button on the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re- garage door opener motor head unit.
lease the buttons until step 5 has been The exact location and color of the button
completed. may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-61

refer to your garage door opener’s instruc- NOTE

tion manual. Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink ®
button is pressed.

! Programming for entrance gates

and garage door openers in 1) HomeLink® button 1
Canada 2) HomeLink® button 2
1) Training button 1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate 3) HomeLink® button 3
or garage door opener from the outlet. 2. Press and hold the two outer
2. Press the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit NOTE HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
(which activates the “training light” on the 3) until the HomeLink® indicator light
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds. begins to flash (after approximately 20
already programmed for other devices,
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for seconds). Then release both buttons.
skip step 2 because it clears the
2 seconds and release the HomeLink® memory of all three buttons. 3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
button that was programmed in the pre- garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
vious section. Press and release the ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
button a second time to complete the mm) away from the HomeLink® button you
programming procedure. wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.

– CONTINUED –
3-62 Instruments and controls/Mirrors

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wire- rapidly, release both buttons.
less Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink ® 1) HomeLink® button 1
remote-control the devices to which its button. 2) HomeLink® button 2
buttons are programmed. To activate a 3) HomeLink® button 3
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button mem-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat- ory 1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
ing that the signal is being transmitted. (button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
NOTE light begins to flash (after approximately
! Programming other devices 20 seconds).
. Performing this procedure erases
To program other devices such as door the memory of all the preprogrammed 2. Release both buttons.
locks, home lighting and security systems, buttons simultaneously. The memory
contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com of individual buttons cannot be erased. ! In case a problem occurs
or call 1-800-355-3515. . It is recommended that upon the If you cannot activate a device using the
! Reprogramming a single Home- sale of the vehicle, the memory of all corresponding HomeLink® button after
Link® button programmed HomeLink® buttons be programming, contact HomeLink® at
erased for security purposes. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release 3515 for assistance.
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
 Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-63

& Outside mirrors ! Remote control mirror switch ! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror. The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or The power folding mirror switch operates
“Acc” position. only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust or “Acc” position.
the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
adjust the right-hand mirror. folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
2. Move the knob in the direction you push the switch again.
want to move the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position
NOTE
to prevent unintentional operation. . If the outside mirrors have been
operated (folded or unfolded) manually,
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- when you turn the ignition switch from
ally. the “LOCK/OFF” position to the “Acc”
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors
may be adjusted automatically depend-
ing on the status of the power folding
mirror switch.
. If the outside mirrors have been
– CONTINUED –
3-64 Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

manually folded slightly forward of the . When you operate the power folding Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
regularly unfolded position, when you mirror switch continuously, it may not
turn the ignition switch from the work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
“LOCK/OFF” position to the “Acc” or ate after waiting for a short period of WARNING
“ON” position, the outside mirrors may time.
automatically fold further forward de- . Do not adjust the steering wheel
pending on the status of the power tilt/telescopic position while driv-
folding mirror switch. When this hap- ing. This may cause loss of
pens, press the power folding mirror vehicle control and result in
switch. By doing so, the outside mir- personal injury.
rors which have been folded to the . If the lever cannot be raised to
furthest forward position will extend to the fixed position, adjust the
the regularly unfolded position and steering wheel again. It is dan-
then fold rearward in the usual way. In gerous to drive without locking
order to unfold the outside mirrors, the steering wheel. This may
press the switch again. cause loss of vehicle control
. When you unfold the outside mirrors and result in personal injury.
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by operating the switch. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by operat-
ing the switch again.
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during opera-
tion. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by operat-
ing the switch, move the outside mir-
rors several times manually. This
makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
 Instruments and controls/Horn 3-65

“Front seats” F1-2. Horn

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

 Climate control

Ventilator control................................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air

Center ventilators................................................ 4-2 conditioner ........................................................ 4-9
Side ventilators ................................................... 4-2 Cleaning ventilator grille ...................................... 4-9
Rear ventilators (if equipped)............................... 4-2 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3 sunlight ............................................................. 4-9
Type A ................................................................ 4-3 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Type B ................................................................ 4-4 circuit................................................................ 4-9 4
Checking air conditioning system before summer
Automatic climate control system (type B) ....... 4-5 season .............................................................. 4-9
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-5 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Manual climate control ....................................... 4-6 low temperature weather condition..................... 4-9
Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-6 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Temperature control ............................................ 4-7 is heavily loaded................................................ 4-9
Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-9
Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8 Air filtration system ........................................... 4-10
Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8 Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-10
Defrosting ............................................................ 4-8
4-2 Climate control/Ventilator control

Ventilator control & Side ventilators & Rear ventilators (if equipped)
& Center ventilators

1) Open 1) Open
2) Close 2) Close
1) Open Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
2) Close
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. open/close wheel upward to the “ ” open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille position. position.
open/close wheel to the “ ” position. To close it, turn the wheel downward to the To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
To close it, turn the wheel to the “ ” “ ” position. “ ” position.
position.
 Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3
1) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
Climate control panel speed control” F4-8.)
2) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
& Type A perature control” F4-7.)
3) Airflow control buttons (Refer to “Airflow
mode selection” F4-6.)
4) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-49.)

– CONTINUED –
4-4 Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type B 1) Temperature control button (driver’s side)

(Refer to “Temperature control” F4-7.)
2) Dual mode button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B)” F4-5
and “Temperature control” F4-7.)
3) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
4) Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
5) Temperature control button (front pas-
senger’s side) (Refer to “Temperature
control” F4-7.)
6) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control system (type B)” F4-5.)
7) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control system (type B)” F4-5.)
8) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
9) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-8.)
10) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-49.)
11) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
 Climate control/Automatic climate control system (type B) 4-5

Automatic climate control NOTE & Temperature sensors

system (type B) . When the “DUAL” button is pressed,
separate temperature settings for the
NOTE driver’s side and passenger’s side can
be enabled (DUAL mode). To cancel the
. Operate the automatic climate con- DUAL mode, press the “DUAL” button
trol system when the engine is running. again. The temperature setting for the
. The blower fan rotates at a low passenger’s side becomes the same as
speed when the engine coolant tem- the setting for the driver’s side.
perature is low. . If you operate any of the buttons on
. For efficient defogging or dehumidi- the control panel other than the “OFF”
fying in cold weather, press the “A/C” button, rear window defogger button
button. and temperature control buttons during
When the automatic climate control mode FULL AUTO mode operation, the
is selected, the following items are auto- “FULL” indicator light on the control
matically controlled. panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
. Outlet air temperature indicator light will remain illuminated.
. Fan speed You can then manually control the
. Airflow distribution system as desired. To change the
system back to the FULL AUTO mode,
. Air inlet control
press the “AUTO” button.
. Air conditioner compressor operation
3. To turn off the climate control system,
To activate this mode, perform the follow- press the “OFF” button. The air inlet
ing procedure. selection is then automatically switched
1. Set the preferred temperature using to the outside air mode.
the temperature control button.
2. Press the “AUTO” button. The FULL 1) Solar sensor
AUTO mode is selected and the “FULL 2) Interior air temperature sensor
AUTO” indicator light on the display
illuminates. The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
– CONTINUED –
4-6 Climate control/Manual climate control

and become damaged, the system may Manual climate control

not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the & Airflow mode selection
sensors, observe the following precau-
Select the preferred airflow mode by
tions:
performing the following procedure.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
. Press the preferred airflow control
– Keep water away from the sensors. button (type A)
– Do not cover the sensors. . Press the airflow mode selection button
The sensors are located as follows: or defroster button (type B)
– Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille Airflow modes are as follows.
on the dashboard
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
A) Models with rear ventilators
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel (Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and the
– Outside temperature sensor: behind foot outlets
front grille.

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
 Climate control/Manual climate control 4-7

the instrument panel and some through tion” mode by pressing the air inlet
windshield defroster outlets (A small selection button.
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.) & Temperature control
! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B
To increase the temperature setting, press
A) Models with rear ventilators the “ ” side of the temperature control
button. To decrease the temperature
(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and
setting, press the “ ” side of the tempera-
both side outlets of the instrument panel
ture control button.
A) Models with rear ventilators NOTE Each temperature setting is shown on the
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets, . When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode display. When “LO” is shown, the system
foot outlets and both side outlets of the is selected, the air conditioner com- provides maximum cooling performance.
instrument panel pressor automatically operates to more When “HI” is shown, the system provides
quickly defog the windshield. At the maximum heating performance.
same time, the air inlet selection is NOTE
automatically set to the outside air
mode. When the “DUAL” button is pressed,
separate temperature settings for the
In this state:
driver’s side and passenger’s side can
– The air conditioner indicator light be enabled (DUAL mode). To cancel the
does not illuminate. DUAL mode, press the “DUAL” button
– You cannot stop the air condi- again. The temperature setting for the
tioner compressor by pressing the passenger’s side becomes the same as
air conditioner button. the setting for the driver’s side.
– You cannot select the “recircula-
– CONTINUED –
4-8 Climate control/Defrosting

& Fan speed control & Air inlet selection Defrosting

The fan operates only when the ignition Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the selection button. Select the desired “ ” mode or “ ” mode
preferred fan speed by turning the fan to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
speed control dial (type A), or by pressing and front door windows by performing the
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
the fan speed control buttons (type B). following procedures.
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or For type A: Press the airflow control button
& Air conditioner control when driving on a dusty road. When the and select the “ ” mode or “ ” mode.
The air conditioner operates only when ON position is selected, the indicator light
the engine is running. on the air inlet selection button illuminates. For type B: Press the airflow mode
selection button to select the “ ” mode
Press the air conditioner button while the OFF position (outside air): Outside air is or press the defroster button to select the
fan is in operation to turn on the air drawn into the passenger compartment. “ ” mode.
conditioner. When the air conditioner is Press the air inlet selection button to the
on, the indicator light on the air conditioner OFF position when the interior has cooled NOTE
button (type A)/“A/C” indicator light (type to a comfortable temperature and the road . When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode
B) illuminates. is no longer dusty. The indicator light will is selected, the air conditioner com-
To turn off the air conditioner, press the turn off. pressor automatically operates to more
button again. The indicator light will turn quickly defog the windshield. (The air
off. WARNING conditioner indicator light does not
NOTE illuminate in this case.) At the same
Continued operation in the ON posi- time, the air inlet selection is automa-
For efficient defogging or dehumidify- tion may fog up the windows. Switch tically set to the outside air mode. For
ing in cold weather, turn on the air to the OFF position as soon as the details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-
conditioner. However, if the ambient outside dusty condition clears. tion” F4-6.
temperature decreases to approxi- . For type B, if the defroster button is
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner pressed while the “ ” mode is se-
and dehumidification system may not lected, it will return to the previous
work properly. mode before selecting the “ ” mode.
 Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-9

Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
& Cleaning ventilator grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.

& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate

system before summer sea- control system
son Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
the radiator, this area should be kept clean result of using the wrong refrigerant are
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in not covered under warranty.
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather condition
& Efficient cooling after parking Under certain weather conditions (high
in direct sunlight relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
4-10 Climate control/Air filtration system

Air filtration system NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
equipped with an air filtration system. mance if not properly maintained.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule shown in the & Replacing an air filter
following table. This schedule should be 1. Remove the glove box.
followed to maintain the filter’s dust (1) Open the glove box.
collection ability. Under extremely dusty
conditions, the filter should be replaced
more frequently. Have your filter checked
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
replacement, use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit. (3) Pull out the glove box.

Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first

CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
following occurs, even if it is not yet glove box.
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or 2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
misted.
 Climate control/Air filtration system 4-11

CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.

3. Remove the air filter. 1) Service label

(2) Attach the service label to the
driver’s side door pillar.

6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.
7. Close the glove box.
8. LABEL installation
(1) Fill out the information on the
service label (small).

4. Replace the air filter element with a

new one.
5. Reinstall the cover of the air filter.
 Audio

Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 CD player operation .......................................... 5-19

Printed antenna................................................... 5-3 Play file ............................................................. 5-20
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 How to insert a CD ............................................ 5-20
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-3 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-20
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-21
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-21
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Repeating .......................................................... 5-22
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-7 Random playback .............................................. 5-22
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7 Scan ................................................................. 5-23 5
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-7 Display selection (type A audio) ......................... 5-24
Adjustable level of each mode ............................. 5-9 Folder selection ................................................. 5-24
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-10 How to eject a CD from the player ...................... 5-24
FM selection (type A audio) ................................ 5-10 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-25
AM selection (type A audio)................................ 5-10 Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-25
FM/AM selection (type B audio) .......................... 5-10 Precautions to observe when handling a
Tuning ............................................................... 5-10 compact disc................................................... 5-26
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM USB storage device / iPod® operations ........... 5-28
Radio) (type B audio)........................................ 5-12 Play file ............................................................. 5-28
RBDS text display .............................................. 5-14 Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-28
Station preset .................................................... 5-15 Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-29
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-16 Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-29
Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio Activation (for U.S.A. How to play back ............................................... 5-30
only) ................................................................ 5-16 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-31
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-16 To select a chapter from the beginning when
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-17 connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-31
Band selection ................................................... 5-17 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-31
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-18 Repeating .......................................................... 5-31
Channel preset................................................... 5-18 Random playback .............................................. 5-32
When the following messages are displayed (type SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
B audio) ........................................................... 5-19 device) ............................................................ 5-32
Audio

Selecting category (only when connecting Volume control switch ....................................... 5-38
iPod®) .............................................................. 5-33 Bluetooth® audio ............................................... 5-39
Display selection (type A audio).......................... 5-34 Media format ..................................................... 5-39
Folder selection (only when connecting USB Setting Bluetooth® audio (type A audio) ............. 5-39
storage device) ................................................ 5-34 Setting Bluetooth® audio (type B audio) ............. 5-40
Selection from list (only when connecting USB Bluetooth® audio operation ................................ 5-43
storage device) (type B audio) .......................... 5-35
Setting the playing speed (only when the Hands-free system............................................. 5-44
audiobook is playing) (type B audio)................. 5-35 Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-44
When the following messages are displayed ....... 5-35 Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-45
Audio control buttons........................................ 5-37 Safety precautions ............................................. 5-47
MODE button ..................................................... 5-37 Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-47
“ ” and “ ” switch........................................... 5-38 Bluetooth® setting ............................................. 5-62
 Audio/Antenna system 5-3

Antenna system any other material over the antenna Installation of accessories
portion of the rear window glass.
& Printed antenna Always consult your SUBARU dealer
& FM reception
before installing a citizen band radio or
CAUTION Although FM is normally static free, other transmitting device in your vehicle.
reception can be affected by the surround- Such devices may cause the electronic
Do not use sharp instruments or ing area, atmospheric conditions, station control system to malfunction if they are
window cleaner containing abra- strength and transmitter distance. Build- incorrectly installed or if they are not
sives to clean the inner surface of ings or other obstructions may cause suited for the vehicle.
the window on which the antenna is momentary static, flutter or station inter-
printed. Doing so may damage the ference. If reception continues to be
antenna printed on the window. unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

The antenna is printed on the inner

surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
5-4 Audio/Audio set

Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating
details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when a phone call is received.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
 Audio/Audio set 5-5

& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-16
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-19
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-25
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-39
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-44

– CONTINUED –
5-6 Audio/Audio set

& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-16
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-19
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-25
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-39
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-44
NOTE
HD Radio Technology should be in-
cluded as a feature in the type B audio.
 Audio/Power and audio controls 5-7

Power and audio controls SRS Labs, Inc.

& Power switch and volume

control

Type A audio

! Tone and balance control (type A

audio)
Type B audio
Trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. (if equipped)
1) Type A audio set “TUNE” dial
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) 2) Type B audio set
and volume control. The radio is turned . For models with the “ ” mark on
ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the the audio control panel, the audio set is
volume is controlled by turning the dial. Each brief press of the “TUNE” dial
equipped with the following sound changes the control modes in the follow-
features. ing sequence.
& Sound controls and audio (1) SRS FOCUS effect:
settings Sound originating from door mount
NOTE speakers can be heard at ear level
. SPEED VOLUME CONTROL (SVC) is (2) SRS TruBass effect:
a function that automatically adjusts Ultra rich bass sound can be ob- Choose the preferred level for each mode
the volume according to the vehicle tained from standard door mount by turning the “TUNE” dial.
speed. As the vehicle speed increases, speakers The control function returns to the tune/
the audio volume automatically in- . TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and “ ” track/channel control mode after approxi-
creases to match the vehicle speed, in symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, mately 5 seconds.
order to create a pleasant listening Inc.
environment even as the driving noise . TruBass and FOCUS technologies
increases. are incorporated under license from

– CONTINUED –
5-8 Audio/Power and audio controls

! Other settings (type A audio) counterclockwise to select the preferred . The screen will turn off if you enter
menu. The menu list is as follows. the “Screen OFF” menu.
. The screen will be displayed if you
Page Menu perform either of the following proce-
“MENU” button 1 dures after turning the screen off in the
Screen OFF
“Screen OFF” menu.
Bass
– Shifting the shift lever/select le-
Each brief press of the “MENU” button Middle ver into the “R” position
changes the control modes in the follow- Treble – Pressing the “SETTING” dial
ing sequence. – Pressing the “FM/AM” button
Fader
2
– Pressing the “CD/AUX” button
Balance
– Pressing the “SAT” button
SVC – Pressing the talk switch
CS Auto* (SRS ON/OFF) – Pressing the OFF hook switch
AUX Vol.
. If a phone call is received on a cell
Choose the preferred settings for each Brightness
phone that is connected to the Hands-
mode by turning the “TUNE” dial. 3 Contrast free system, the audio screen will be
The control function returns to the tune/ HD displayed.
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds. *: If equipped
3. Press the “SETTING” dial to enter the
! Audio settings (type B audio)
selected menu.
4. Choose the preferred settings for the
selected menu by turning the “SETTING”
“SETTING” dial dial.
5. Press the “SETTING” dial.

1. Press the “SETTING” dial to display NOTE

the “Setting” menu. . Press the button to return to
2. Turn the “SETTING” dial clockwise or the last mode.
 Audio/Power and audio controls 5-9

& Adjustable level of each mode

Mode Range of levels Initial setting Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
(displayed)
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 (type A For less volume For more volume
audio)/16 (type
B audio)
AUX volume control (type A 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
audio)
AUX volume control (type B LOW, MID, HIGH MID From HIGH to MID, MID to From LOW to MID, MID to
audio) LOW, LOW to HIGH HIGH, HIGH to LOW
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
SRS Sound (if equipped) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON
Beep (type A audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Brightness (type B audio) −8 to +8 0 For less brightness For more brightness
Contrast (type B audio) −8 to +8 0 For less contrast For more contrast
HD Radio (type B audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
5-10 Audio/FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM radio operation & FM/AM selection (type B crease the tuning frequency and turn the
audio) “TUNE” dial counterclockwise to decrease
it.
Press the “FM” or “AM” button (type A
audio)/“FM/AM” button (type B audio) Each time the dial is turned, the frequency
when the radio is off to turn on the radio. “FM/AM” button interval can be changed between 10 kHz
in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
& FM selection (type A audio) Press the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is on to select the preferred reception ! Stereo indicator (type A audio)
mode. The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
“FM” button Each brief press of the “FM/AM” button when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
changes the radio in the following se- ! Seek tuning (SEEK)
Press the “FM” button when the radio is on quence starting from the last radio band
with you selected. Type A audio:
to select the preferred reception mode.
Each brief press of the “FM” button
changes the radio in the following se- Seek up
quence starting from the last FM radio
band that you selected.
& Tuning Seek down

! Manual tuning
Type B audio:
“TUNE” dial:
& AM selection (type A audio)
Seek up
Type A audio
“AM” button
Seek down

Each time the “AM” button is briefly

pressed the radio changes in the following Type B audio If you press the indicated button briefly,
sequence starting from the last radio band the radio will automatically search for a
that you selected. receivable station and stop at the first one
it finds. This function may not be available
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to in-
 Audio/FM/AM radio operation 5-11

when radio signals are weak. When this audio) This operation only changes the display. It
happens, perform manual tuning to select does not change the station that is
the preferred station. Automatic tuning may not function prop- currently being received.
erly if the station reception is weakened by
! Scan tuning (SCAN) distance from the station or proximity to ! Seek in PTY (Program type)
“SCAN” button: tall buildings and hills. group
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception) (type A audio) Seek up
Type A audio

“PTY/CAT” button Seek down

Type B audio
In the PTY selection mode, when the
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to preferred PTY group has been selected,
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode, the PTY selection mode. At this time, the pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ”
the radio scans through the radio band PTY group that you are currently listening seeks within that PTY group. In this case,
until a station is found. The radio will to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY “PTY SEEK” is displayed on the screen.
briefly stop at the station while displaying selection mode, “PTY SEL” is displayed The control function returns to the normal
the frequency, after which scanning will on the screen. mode after approximately 10 seconds.
continue until the entire band has been ! PTY (Program type) group selec-
scanned. tion
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode. If you press the “SCAN” In the PTY selection mode, press the
button while the radio is stopped at a following button to change the PTY group
station, the radio stays stopped at that by one step at a time.
station. If you press the button while the
radio is scanning, the radio stops as PTY group up by
one step
follows.
. At a frequency when the “SCAN”
PTY group down by
button is pressed (type A audio) one step
. At the next receivable station (type B
– CONTINUED –
5-12 Audio/FM/AM radio operation

& HD RadioTM Technology (Di- programming, please visit www.hdradio. ! HD RadioTM Technology Trouble-
gital AM and FM Radio) (type com. shooting
B audio) ! Using HD RadioTM Technology 1. Station blending: When acquiring a
As a consumer works through the analog radio station, as usual, the radio will play
radio stations, (where applicable) the radio content in analog. If the radio verifies the
receiver will automatically tune from an broadcast is an HD Radio Technology
analog signal to a digital signal within five station, it will then shift or blend smoothly
seconds. An orange logo indicator will to a digital signal within five seconds.
be seen on the screen when in digital. Depending on the station quality, the
consumer may hear a slight sound change
NOTE when the station switches from the analog
The logo will first appear in a gray to digital signal.
color indicating the station is indeed 2. Reception area: Topography of the
(an analog and) a digital station. Once earth can affect radio signals. For exam-
the digital signal is acquired, the logo ple, when a vehicle is behind a hill or large
will be a bright orange color. building from the radio tower location
! HD Radio Technology Information analog reception will be poor and it is
! Benefits of HD RadioTM Technol- highly likely that HD Radio reception will
TM
! What is HD Radio Technology ogy not occur. When a consumer is on the
and how does it work? 1. Information: The song title, artist name multicast or supplemental programming
HD RadioTM Technology is the digital and music genre will appear on the screen (HD2/HD3/HD4) and the reception is
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your when available by the radio station. weak or lost, this will result in a “mute”
radio product has a special receiver which 2. Multicast: On the FM radio frequency condition. On the main or HD1 program, a
allows it to receive digital broadcasts most digital stations have “multiple” or weak or lost digital signal will result in the
(where available) in addition to the analog supplemental programs on one FM sta- playing of an analog signal until a digital
broadcasts it already receives. Digital tion. When the consumer pushes the signal is available.
broadcasts have better sound quality than multicast button, they will move between 3. Station issues: In order to provide the
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts the multiple unique program content. best experience, a contact form has been
provide free, crystal clear audio with no 3. Clear Reception: Unlike analog radio developed to report any radio station
static or distortion. For more information, signals, digital signals do not pass along issues found while listening to a broad-
and a guide to available radio stations and static, hiss or pops. cast. Every radio station is independently
owned and operated. These stations are
 Audio/FM/AM radio operation 5-13

responsible for ensuring all audio streams

Experience Cause Action
and data fields are accurate. The form can
be found at www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ Mismatch of time alignment- The radio stations analog and None, radio broadcast issue.
report_radio_station_experiences. Customer may hear a short digital volume is not properly
period of programming re- aligned or the station is in Consumer can contact the
played or an echo, stutter or ballgame mode. radio station.
skip.
Reception issue, may clear-up
Sound fades, blending in and Radio is shifting between ana- as you continue to drive. HD
out. log and digital audio. Radio off button can force radio
in an analog audio.

Audio mute condition when on The radio does not have ac- This is normal behavior, wait
an HD2/HD3 multicast chan- cess to digital signals at the until the digital signal has re-
nel, had been playing. moment. turned. If out of coverage area,
seek a new station.
The digital multicast content is
Audio mute delay when se- not available until HD Radio
lecting HD2/HD3 multicast broadcast can be decoded and This is normal behavior, wait for
channel preset. make the audio available. This the audio availability.
takes up to seven seconds.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Text information does not Data service issue by the radio Complete the form: www.ibi-
match the present song audio. broadcaster. quity.com/automotive/report_ra-
dio_station_experiences.
Broadcaster should be notified.
No text information shown for Data service issue by the radio Complete the form: www.ibi-
the present selected fre- broadcaster. quity.com/automotive/report_ra-
quency. dio_station_experiences.

– CONTINUED –
5-14 Audio/FM/AM radio operation

! Other information ventional radio. ! Type B audio

HD Radio Technology manufactured un- ! HD Radio indicator Press and hold the “HD/TEXT” button to
der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora- show the next page when the text is not
The indicator illuminates while the fully displayed while the PSD (Program
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD
digital broadcast is received during the
RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and Service Data) or RT (Radio Text) service
HD Radio ON mode. is received.
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp. & RBDS text display
NOTE
! HD Radio selection
. When the HD Radio function is
Press the button while receiving FM Type A audio turned on, PSD provides additional
radio (except analog broadcast). The next information about the broadcast. Text
channel of the station that is being data such as “Title” and “Artist” is
received will play. Type B audio displayed on the screen. To display text
! Mode selection data other than that which is currently
Turn the “SETTING” dial and select the being displayed, turn the “SETTING”
! Type A audio dial.
HD Radio ON mode (hybrid mode) or OFF
mode (analog mode). For details, refer to If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or . When the HD Radio function is
“Audio settings (type B audio)” F5-8. RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing turned off (HD Radio off mode), the
the “TEXT” button changes the display radio text is displayed on the screen
NOTE among PS, RT and frequency. The initial while receiving the broadcasting sta-
Depending on the broadcasting area, setting is “PS”. tion with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data
the digital signal may not be received in System).
an area where the analog signal can be
NOTE . The maximum number of characters
properly received, or the system fre- . The maximum number of characters that can be displayed is 128.
quently switches the channels between that can be displayed for PS is 8.
the digital and analog signals. How- . The maximum number of characters
ever, this does not indicate a malfunc- that can be displayed for RT is 64.
tion. If this frequent switching between . If RT is 16 characters or longer,
digital and analog causes annoyance, press and hold the “TEXT” button in
set the radio to the analog mode (HD order to change the page.
Radio off mode) that provides the same
radio broadcasting quality as a con-
 Audio/FM/AM radio operation 5-15

& Station preset (from to ) briefly. NOTE

. When you use Auto-store, the new
! How to preset stations stations replace any stations pre-
NOTE
1. Select the preferred reception mode. For type B audio, if the preset button viously stored.
2. Select the preferred station. which stores a broadcasting station . Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci-
3. Press and hold one of the preset with SPS (Supplemental Program Ser- dentally press the Auto-store button,
buttons (from to ) to store the vice) while the HD Radio OFF mode is you can cancel the Auto-store function
frequency. If the button is pressed briefly, selected, “No digital data available” will before it has been completed as fol-
the preceding selection will remain in the be displayed and the volume will be lows.
memory. reduced to zero. – Switch to the other source mode.
– Switch to the other band.
! Auto-store – Press the Auto-store button.
NOTE
Auto-store button: – Press the “SCAN” button (type A
. Up to six stations for each reception audio).
mode may be preset.
– Press the “SEEK” button.
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason Type A audio – Press any of the preset buttons.
such as vehicle maintenance or radio – Turn the “TUNE” dial.
removal, all stations stored in the – Turn off the audio system.
preset buttons are cleared. If this – Turn off the ignition switch.
Type B audio
occurs, it is necessary to reset the . When you use the Auto-store func-
preset buttons. tion while selecting the FM mode, even
. For type B audio, if you press and Using the Auto-store function, you can if you have selected the FM1 or FM2
hold a preset button while receiving a automatically store 6 stations on the station, the new stations are stored in
broadcasting station with SPS (Supple- current waveband by pressing and holding the FM-AS (type A audio)/FM3 (type B
mental Program Service), the station the Auto-store button. Use Auto-store to audio) station memory.
will be stored in the memory for that quickly find the strongest stations, for . For type A audio, when you use the
preset button. example when traveling through different Auto-store function while selecting the
reception areas. AM mode, even if you have selected the
! Selecting preset stations “AM” station, the new stations are
1. Select the preferred reception mode. stored in the AM-AS station memory.
2. Press the preferred preset button . If it is only possible to receive less

– CONTINUED –
5-16 Audio/Satellite radio operation

than 6 stations, the available stations Satellite radio operation (if stances that may result in signal loss
are stored from preset 1 in order by include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
frequency and the unused preset but-
equipped) or driving on the lower level of a multi-
tons are not registered to a station. tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
. For type B audio, the previously To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to To help reduce this condition, satellite
registered station memories of the install the SUBARU genuine satellite radio providers have installed ground-
unused preset buttons are cleared. receiver for some models, and to enter based repeaters in heavily populated
into a contract with a satellite radio areas. However, you may still experience
. For type A audio, the previously network service such as “Sirius XMTM
registered station memories of the reception problems in some areas.
satellite radio” (for U.S.A. only). For de-
unused preset buttons are not cleared. tails, please contact your SUBARU dealer. ! Sirius XMTM satellite radio reception
. If no stations can be received, the tips (for U.S.A. only — if equipped)
previously stored stations are not re- & Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio The Sirius XMTM satellite radio receiver
placed.
Activation (for U.S.A. only) that is fitted to your vehicle receives the
. After pressing the Auto-store but- necessary signals from two specially
ton, if more than 1 station is stored, the Models with Sirius XMTM are eligible for a
3-month complimentary subscription to designated satellites that are in a geosta-
radio receives the station stored in tionary orbit over the equator. One satellite
preset 1. the Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio service.
covers the east coast and the other covers
. After pressing the Auto-store but- ! Activation process the west coast. Both of them direct their
ton, if no stations are stored, the radio If you would like to activate your Satellite signals north. These signals are then
receives the band and station that the Radio online, please visit http://www.sir- relayed throughout the radio reception
radio received before pressing the iusxm.com/activationhelp and follow the area by a network of ground repeater
button. step-by-step instructions for easy activa- stations. The satellite radio signals are
tion. transmitted as “line of sight” signals. The
line of sight signals can be blocked by
& Satellite radio reception objects such as buildings, but the network
of repeater stations allows signal cover-
Satellite radio signals are best received in
age within urban areas such as cities.
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees, You may experience problems in receiving
tunnels or other structures that may Sirius XMTM satellite radio signals in the
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there following situations.
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
 Audio/Satellite radio operation 5-17

. If you are driving northward in a coastal . If you are driving on a mountain road & Displaying satellite radio ID
area where the southern direction is blocked by of tuner
Because the satellite radio antenna is mountains
When you activate satellite radio, you
located on the windshield, the signal should have your satellite radio tuner ID
comes from the south and may not be ready because each tuner is identified by
able to reach the antenna in some its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
circumstances when you are driving north.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
For details, contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Band selection

Type A audio
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more), Type B audio
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . The signal can become weak in some Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
covered parking area areas that are not covered by the repeater off to turn on the radio.
. If you are driving beneath the top level station network. Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
of a multi-level freeway on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
Please note that these may be other tion.
. If you drive under a bridge unforeseen circumstances when there
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle are problems with the reception of Sirius
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the XMTM satellite radio signals.
signal
. If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the signal
from the south

– CONTINUED –
5-18 Audio/Satellite radio operation

! Category selection (type B audio)

& Channel and category selec- Press the “SCAN/A.S” button again to
tion cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
Change the cate- displayed channel.
! Channel selection by operating the gory up by one step
dial
Change the cate-
& Channel preset
“TUNE” dial: gory down by one
step ! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
To activate the category search mode, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
Type A audio press the “ ” or “ ” button. When in the 2. Select the preferred channel.
category search mode, press the “ ” or
“ ” button to change the category up or 3. Press and hold one of the preset
down. buttons (from to ) to store the
channel. If the button is pressed briefly,
Type B audio When a category is selected, turning the the preceding selection will remain in the
“TUNE” dial selects channels only within memory.
the selected category.
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to select The control function returns to the normal
the next channel and turn the “TUNE” dial mode after approximately 6 seconds. NOTE
counterclockwise to select the previous . Up to six SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3
! Channel scan (type B audio)
channel. channels each may be preset.
. If the connection between the radio
! Skip channel selection (type A and battery is broken for any reason
audio) “SCAN/A.S” button
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
When in the SAT mode, press and hold removal, all channels stored in the
the following buttons to change to the Press the “SCAN/A.S” button to change preset buttons are cleared. If this
channel selection mode. the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, occurs, it is necessary to reset the
under the selected category, the radio preset channels.
Change the channel scans through the channel until a station
up by 10 channels is found. The radio will stop at the station
for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
Change the channel number, after which scanning will continue
down by 10 channels until the entire channel has been scanned.
 Audio/CD player operation 5-19

! Selecting preset channels Message Status CD player operation

1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1, The antenna cannot be
SAT2 or SAT3 reception. detected because it
CHECK ANTENNA has become discon-
CAUTION
2. Press the preferred preset button
nected, etc.
(from to ) briefly.
There is no reception
This is a class I laser product. Use of
because the system controls or adjustments or perfor-
& When the following mes- NO SIGNAL cannot obtain signals mance of procedures other than
sages are displayed (type B that are strong enough. those specified herein may result
audio) The system temporarily in hazardous radiation exposure. Do
If one of the following messages is cannot be used be- not open covers and do not attempt
LOADING cause it is currently
displayed when receiving XM signals, receiving signals or is to repair this unit by yourself. Refer
determine the cause based on the follow- decoding. servicing to qualified personnel.
ing information. If you cannot clear these The channel that has
messages, contact your SUBARU dealer. CHANNEL OFF AIR been selected is cur-
rently off air. NOTE
CHAN UNAVAIL- The service cannot
. Make sure to always insert a disc
ABLE currently be used. with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, the
A channel for which
CH UNAUTHOR- you do not have a player displays “CHECK DISC”.
IZED subscription has been Refer to “When the following messages
selected. are displayed” F5-25.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. After the last track finishes, the disc
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc) and will auto-
matically play back.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain

– CONTINUED –
5-20 Audio/CD player operation

ones. MP3: AAC (type B audio):

. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are . Based on MPEG 1, 2 and 2.5 Layer 3 . Based on MPEG2 AAC and MPEG4
not supported, and if inserted, they will (type A audio) AAC
be immediately ejected. . Based on MPEG 1, 2 and 2.5 Layer 2 . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
. Audio data recorded in the MP3/ and 3 (type B audio) 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
WMA/AAC formats may not be played . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, . Bit rate (kbps): 24 to 320
depending on the data recording con- 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
dition. . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
. CDs that can be played back are . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 (type A audio)
accompanied by the following restric- . Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 320 (type B audio) & How to insert a CD
tions. . Supports variable bit rates While the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or
– Maximum number of folders: 255 “ON” position, hold a disc with a finger in
WMA (type A audio): the center hole while gripping the edge of
– Maximum number of files in a
folder: 255 . Based on Windows Media Audio 9 the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with
– Maximum number of files on a . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32 the label side up) and the player will
CD: 510 (type A audio)/512 (type B . Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192 automatically pull the disc into position.
audio)
WMA (type B audio): NOTE
– Maximum number of layers: 8
. Based on Windows Media Audio 7, 8 DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
(including the root folder)
and 9 DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
& Play file . Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192 & How to play back a CD
NOTE
. Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC AAC (type A audio): ! When there is no CD inserted
files will not be played by the system. . Based on MPEG4 AAC Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
The player will automatically skip to the . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, CD” F5-20.
next file (track). 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 When a CD is loaded, the player will start
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Profes- . Bit rate (kbps): 24 to 320 playback of the CD, beginning with the
sional and WMA9 voice cannot be . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch first track.
played.
 Audio/CD player operation 5-21

! When CD is in the player ! By using the dial (type A audio) Press the “ ” button briefly to skip to the
beginning of the next track. Each time the
button is briefly pressed, the indicated
Type A audio track number will increase.
“TRACK” dial
Press the “ ” button briefly to skip to the
beginning of the current track. Each time
Type B audio the button is briefly pressed, the indicated
Turn the “TRACK” dial clockwise to skip to track number will decrease.
Each brief press of the “CD/AUX” button the beginning of the next track. Each time
changes the modes in the following the dial is turned, the indicated track & Fast-forwarding and rewind-
sequence. number will increase. ing
Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclockwise
Type A audio:
to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the dial is turned, the
indicated track number will decrease. Fast-forwarding
*: For type A audio, “BT-A” is displayed. ! By using the button
When the CD mode is selected, the player Type A audio: Rewinding
will start playback.
Forward direction Type B audio:
& To select a track from the
beginning
Backward direction Fast-forwarding
NOTE
With an MP3, WMA or AAC:
. Skipping past the last track will take Type B audio: Rewinding
you back to the first track in the folder.
. Skipping past the first track will take Forward direction Press and hold the “ ” button to fast-
you to the last track in the folder.
forward the track. Release the button to
stop fast-forwarding.
Backward direction
Press and hold the “ ” button to rewind
the track. Release the button to stop
– CONTINUED –
5-22 Audio/CD player operation

rewinding. sequences. NOTE

The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
NOTE Type A audio:
if you perform any of the following
. If you fast-forward to the end of the steps:
last track, fast-forwarding will stop and . Press the “ ” button.
the player will start playback beginning . Press the “SCAN” button.
with the first track. For an MP3, WMA or . Turn the “TUNE” dial during repeat
AAC folder, the player will start play- playback of a single track (type B
back beginning with the first track of Type B audio:
audio).
the next folder.
. If you rewind to the beginning of the
first track, rewinding will stop and the & Random playback
player will start playback. For an MP3, Random button:
WMA or AAC folder, the player will start
playback beginning with the first track NOTE
of the current folder. . The “TRACK RPT” (type A audio)/ Type A audio*1
“ONE” (type B audio) indication refers
& Repeating to the repeat playback of a single track.
It repeats the track that is playing.
Repeat button: Type B audio*2
. The “FOLDER RPT” (type A audio)/
“FOLDER” (type B audio) indication
refers to the repeat playback of a folder. *1: Press and hold the button.
Type A audio It repeats the all of the tracks in the *2: Press the button briefly.
folder. It is possible to select the
To play back tracks at random, press the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
random button.
mat track is playing.
Type B audio Each time you press the button, the mode
To cancel the track repeat-play mode, changes in the following sequences.
briefly press the repeat button and select
To repeat a track, briefly press the repeat CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will turn
button while the track is playing. off, and the normal playback mode will be
Each time you briefly press the repeat resumed.
button, the mode changes in the following
 Audio/CD player operation 5-23

Type A audio: playing. upward beginning with the track following

To cancel the random playback mode, the currently selected one.
press the random button and select After all tracks in the disk/folder have been
CANCEL. scanned, normal playback will be re-
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the sumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
normal playback mode will be resumed. the “SCAN” button again.
Type B audio:
NOTE NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if The scan mode will be cancelled if you
you perform any of the following steps: perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “ ” button. . Press the “RPT/RDM” button (type A
. Press the “SCAN” button. audio).
NOTE . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the . Press the “RPT” button (type B
. The “RDM” indication refers to the “FOLDER” button when an MP3/WMA/ audio).
random playback of the tracks. It AAC format track is playing (type A . Press the “RDM” button (type B
randomly repeats the tracks on the audio). audio).
CD. It is possible to select the function . Turn the “TUNE” dial during random . Turn the “TUNE” dial.
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/ playback of the disc (type B audio). . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
AAC format CD is playing. “FOLDER” button (type A audio).
. The “FOLDER RDM” (type A audio)/ . Press the “ ” button.
& Scan . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER” (type B audio) indication
refers to the random playback in the “SEEK” button.
folder. It randomly repeats the tracks in . Select the radio or AUX mode.
the folder. It is possible to select the Type A audio
. Turn off the power of the audio
function when an MP3/WMA/AAC for- equipment.
mat track is playing. . Turn the ignition switch to the
. The “ALL RDM” (type A audio)/ “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
“ALL” (type B audio) indication refers Type B audio
to the random playback of a disc. It
randomly repeats the tracks on the CD. The scan mode lets you listen to the first
It is possible to select the function 10 seconds of each track in succession.
when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is Press the “SCAN” button to start scanning
– CONTINUED –
5-24 Audio/CD player operation

& Display selection (type A & Folder selection ! Type B audio

audio) NOTE
. Selecting folders in this way is
“TEXT” button possible only within a single disc. “TUNE” dial
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re-
cognized when an attempt to select the
If you press the “TEXT” button during next or previous folder is made. If no Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to select
playback, the indication will change to the appropriate folder exists on the disc, the next folder. Turn the dial counter-
next one in the following sequence. performing the following procedures clockwise to go back to the previous
starts playback beginning with the first folder.
For CD-DA:
track.
– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the & How to eject a CD from the
“FOLDER” button (type A audio). player
– Turn the “TUNE” dial (type B
audio). When a disc is being played back or when
For MP3/WMA/AAC: a disc is in the player, press the eject
! Type A audio button . The disc will be ejected.
Press the following buttons briefly. NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
To select the next sticking out. The CD may fall out due to
! Page (track/folder title) scroll folder
vibration.
If you press and hold the “TEXT” button . If you do not remove the ejected
while displaying the title (name), the title To go back to the
previous folder disc within approximately 15 seconds
will be scrolled so you can see all of it. (type A audio)/20 seconds (type B
NOTE audio), a disc protection function will
operate, automatically reloading the
The display is designed to show titles disc. In this case, the disc is not played.
for up to 30 characters.
 Audio/Auxiliary input jack 5-25

& When the following mes- your SUBARU dealer. Auxiliary input jack
sages are displayed ! When “No audio file” is displayed
If one of the following messages is (type B audio)
displayed while operating the CD player, Press the button to eject the disc.
determine the cause based on the follow- This message appears when a CD has
ing information. If you cannot clear those been loaded that does not contain any
messages, please contact your SUBARU playable files. Insert a CD that contains
dealer. playable files.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
Press the button to eject the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deforma-
tion, and also check that the correct disc is
inserted. Do not try to eject the disc
forcibly. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will 1) Models without Hands-free system
be immediately ejected. If the disc cannot 2) Models with Hands-free system
be ejected or this message remains
displayed, please contact your SUBARU You can connect an external audio device
dealer. to the vehicle’s audio system and play
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the button to eject the discs. An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is equipped
Check that the disc is not damaged or in the center console. A stereo mini pin
scratched, and also check that the disc is plug (3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack.
inserted correctly. This message may The connection cable is available at
appear when using some CD-RW discs. electrical appliance or similar stores.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch To use the AUX input jack:
CDs are not supported) and data format 1. Connect a portable audio player to the
are correct. This player can only play CD- AUX input jack.
DA, MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If
the disc cannot be ejected or this mes-
sage remains displayed, please contact
– CONTINUED –
5-26 Audio/Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc

case, adjust the sound volume of the Precautions to observe when

portable audio player.
Type A audio
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
handling a compact disc
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the audio system. Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
Type B audio
Try cleaning the stereo jack and audio CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
plug. following illustration. Also, some compact
2. Press the AUX input selection button . If noise is not reduced, check for discs cannot be played.
“CD/AUX” on the audio control panel to disconnection of the cord or a malfunc-
select the AUX mode. Refer to “When CD tion of the portable player.
is in the player” F5-21.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the instruction manual of the
portable audio player.

NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set is
very low. If you turn up the volume of
the audio set, the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the player to the other portable audio
player, the sound may become a lot
louder. Turn down the volume when
you change between them.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound quality may become
impaired when you turn up the volume
of the vehicle audio system. In this
 Audio/Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc 5-27

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a rough cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
– CONTINUED –
5-28 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations

USB storage device / iPod® NOTE

operations . HUB class USB memory cannot be
played.
NOTE . ATAPI subclass USB cannot be
played.
For models with the genuine SUBARU . High Speed USB 2.0 cannot be
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s played.
Manual supplement for the navigation . A USB memory that is powered by a
system. source other than the USB power
supply (for example, an AC power
& Play file adapter, etc.) cannot be operated.
. A USB memory that is connected to
Refer to “Play file” F5-20. the memory card reader or multi card
& Connectable USB storage reader cannot be operated.
device . If the USB memory consists of two
drives or more, the system will recog-
Mass storage class USB memory can be nize only one of the drives after con-
connected. USB storage devices that can necting the USB memory.
be played back are accompanied by the . The contents stored on the USB
following restrictions. memory may not be played in the same
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers order as they appear on a personal
(including the ROOT) computer.
. Maximum number of files in a folder: . A personal computer cannot be
255 used even if it is connected to the
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type system using a USB cable.
A audio)/255 (type B audio) (including the . If the USB memory has a security
ROOT) function, the contents stored on the
. Maximum number of files on the USB memory cannot be played by the
device: 130,560 (type A audio)/2,500 system.
(type B audio) . A USB memory and an iPod® cannot
be connected to the system at the
same time.
 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations 5-29

& Connectable iPod® models Type B audio: or material that is legally permitted to
Type A audio: be copied and played by using an
Model Firmware version iPod® and iTunes. Copyright infringe-
Model Firmware version 5G 1.2.1~1.3 ment is prohibited by law.
. To check the firmware version of an
5G 1.3 classic 1.0.0~1.1.2
iPod®, connect it to a computer and
5.5G 1.3 nano 1.3.1 check the device manager. For further
classic 1G 2.0.4 iPod®
nano 2G 1.1.3 information, see the User’s Guide for
the iPod®.
classic 2G nano 3G 1.0.0~1.1.3
. To update the firmware version of an
nano 2G 1.1.3 nano 4G 1.0.0~1.0.3 iPod®, visit the Apple Inc. website.
iPod® . Depending on the model and firm-
nano 3G 1.1.3 touch 1.1~2.2.1
ware version of an iPod®, it may not
nano 4G 1.0.4 1G 3.1.3
work properly or not operate at all.
nano 5G 1.0.2 3G 4.2.1
iPhone®
touch 1G 3.1.2 3G S 4.2.1 & Connecting USB storage de-
touch 2G 3.1.2 4 4.2.1 vice / iPod®
1G 3.1.2
WARNING
iPhone® 3G 3.1.2 CAUTION
3G S 3.1.2 Do not operate an iPod ® while
Do not connect an iPod® other than
driving. Doing so may distract your
the previously stated models. Doing
attention from driving and could
so may result in a malfunction or,
lead to an accident.
depending on conditions, cause a
fire.
CAUTION
NOTE . If the data stored on an iPod® is
. iPod® is a registered trademark of deleted while it is connected to
Apple Inc. the in-vehicle system, the data
. You are only permitted to personally cannot be recovered.
copy and play copyright-free material
– CONTINUED –
5-30 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations

. Do not store an iPod® in the operation, disconnect the connection & How to play back
vehicle. If an iPod® is left in the cable from the iPod® and reset it. For
vehicle for a long period of time, the resetting procedure, see the User’s NOTE
it may be deformed, discolored Guide for the iPod®. . Depending on the number of files
or damaged by high temperature. . If an iPod® and the connection cable stored on the iPod® and the firmware
are connected improperly, the iPod® version, the iPod® may not activate
cannot be powered on or will not be smoothly after operation or not work
NOTE recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In properly.
. Even if a USB storage device or this case, disconnect the connection . Do not disconnect the connector
iPod® is connected, it cannot be played cable from the iPod®, and then connect from the iPod® during iPod® operation.
unless the USB/iPod® mode is se- it again.
! Type A audio
lected.
. Movies stored on a USB storage 1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
device or an iPod® cannot be played 2. Press the button. Each time you
while the storage device or iPod® is briefly press the button, the mode
connected to the system. changes as follows.
. While an iPod® is connected, the
iPod® cannot be operated using the
click wheel on the iPod® (except some
models).
. When using an iPod® by connecting
it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of When the USB/iPod® mode is selected,
the list items displayed on the in- the player will start playback of the USB
vehicle equipment may be different storage device/iPod®.
from that on the iPod®. However, this The USB connector is located in the ! Type B audio
does not indicate a malfunction. center console. Use the connector to
. An iPod® battery that is connected connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
! When a USB storage device/
to in-vehicle equipment will be charged iPod® is not connected
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” Connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
or “Acc” position. However, activation Then the player will start playback of the
of the iPod® may be delayed if the USB storage device/iPod®.
battery charge of the iPod® is low.
. If an iPod® does not activate after
 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations 5-31

! When a USB storage device/ details, refer to “Fast-forwarding and Each time you briefly press the repeat
iPod® is already connected rewinding” F5-21. button, the mode changes in the following
sequence.
Press the button. Each time you NOTE
briefly press the button, the mode Type A audio:
When connecting iPod®:
changes as follows.
. When the end of a track is reached
while fast-forwarding, fast-forwarding Type B audio:
ends and play begins from the begin-
ning of the next track.
. When the beginning of a track is
When the USB/iPod® mode is selected,
reached while rewinding, rewinding
the player will start playback of the USB
ends and play begins from the begin-
storage device/iPod®.
ning of the track. NOTE
& To select a track from the
. The “ALL RPT” (type A audio)/“ALL”
beginning & Repeating (type B audio) indication refers to the
Select a track in the same way as for a repeat playback of all tracks in the
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track ! When connecting USB storage de-
entire iPod® (type A audio)/playing list
from the beginning” F5-21. vice
(type B audio).
Repeating is operated in the same way as . The “SONG RPT” (type A audio)/
& To select a chapter from the for a CD. For details, refer to “Repeating” “ONE” (type B audio) indication refers
beginning when connecting F5-22. to the repeat playback of a single track.
iPod® ! When connecting iPod® It repeats the track that is playing.
When playing podcasts or audiobooks, Repeat button: . When an audiobook is playing, the
select a chapter in the same way as for a mode does not change even if you
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track press the repeat button. For type B
from the beginning” F5-21. audio, refer to “Setting the playing
Type A audio speed (only when the audiobook is
playing) (type B audio)” F5-35.
& Fast-forwarding and rewind-
ing
Type B audio
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are oper-
ated in the same way as for a CD. For
– CONTINUED –
5-32 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations

& Random playback When connecting iPod® (type A audio): tracks on the iPod®.
Random button: . When an iPod® is connected, the
files are played back at random by the
shuffle function of the iPod®. There-
fore, iPod® operation may be different
Type A audio*1 When connecting iPod® (type B audio): depending on the model of the con-
nected iPod®. Visit the Apple Inc.
website for details.
Type B audio*2
. When an audiobook or a podcast is
playing, the mode does not change
even if you press the random button.
*1: Press and hold the button. NOTE
*2: Press the button briefly. To cancel the random playback mode,
. The “FOLDER RDM” (type A audio)/ press the random button and select
To playback a track at random, press the “Folder” (type B audio) indication re- CANCEL. The “RDM” indication will turn
random button while the track is playing. fers to the random playback in the off, and the normal playback mode will
Each time you press the button, the mode folders. It randomly repeats all of the resume.
changes in the following sequences. tracks in the folder.
. The “ALL RDM” (type A audio)/“All” & SCAN (only when connecting
When connecting USB storage device (type B audio) indication refers to the USB storage device)
(type A audio): random playback on the entire USB
Scan is operated in the same way as for a
storage device. It randomly repeats all
CD. For details, refer to “Scan” F5-23.
of the tracks on the USB storage
device. NOTE
. The “ALBUM RDM” (type A audio)/ When an iPod® is connected, you
When connecting USB storage device “Album” (type B audio) indication re- cannot select the SCAN mode.
(type B audio): fers to the shuffle playback of the
album. It sequentially plays back all of
the tracks on the album.
. The “SONG RDM” (type A audio)/
“Track” (type B audio) indication refers
to the shuffle playback on the entire
iPod®. It randomly repeats all of the
 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations 5-33

& Selecting category (only

when connecting iPod®)
! Type A audio

“LIST” button

To select the category, press the dial. To

“TUNE” dial
close the iPod® menu, press and hold the
“LIST” button. To return to the previous
screen, briefly press the “LIST” button.
When the “LIST” button is pressed briefly, ! Type B audio
the iPod® menu is displayed.
Each time you turn the “TUNE” dial clock-
wise, the displayed category changes in “LIST” button
the following sequence. Each time you
turn the dial counterclockwise, the dis-
“BACK” button
played category changes in the opposite
sequence.

“TUNE” dial

When the “LIST” button or “BACK” button

is pressed briefly, the iPod® menu is
displayed as follows.

– CONTINUED –
5-34 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations

1st layer 2nd layer 3rd layer 4th layer 5th layer
& Display selection (type A
audio)
Now playing — — — —
If you press the button during
Playlists Playlists List Songs List — — playback, the indication will change to
Artists Artists List Albums List Songs List — the next one in the following sequence.
Albums Albums List Songs List — — For USB storage device:
Songs Songs List — — —
Podcasts Podcasts List Songs List — —
Genres Genres List Artists List Albums List Songs List
Composers Composers List Albums List Songs List — For iPod®:
Audiobooks Audiobooks List — — —
Shuffle Songs — — — —

Turn and press the “TUNE” dial to select the category. To return to the upper layer, press
the “BACK” button. To return to the 1st layer, press the “LIST” button. ! Page scroll
Refer to “Page (track/folder title) scroll”
F5-24.

& Folder selection (only when

connecting USB storage de-
vice)
Refer to “Folder selection” F5-24.
NOTE
When an iPod® is connected, you
cannot select a folder.
 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations 5-35

& Selection from list (only & When the following mes-
when connecting USB sto- sages are displayed
rage device) (type B audio) If one of the following messages is
displayed while connecting the USB sto-
rage device/iPod®, determine the cause
based on the following information. If you
“TUNE” dial
cannot clear those messages, please
contact your SUBARU dealer.

“BACK” button

You can select folder/track/file(s) from the

list. Turn and press the “TUNE” dial to
select the folder/track/file. To return to the
upper layer, press the “BACK” button.

& Setting the playing speed

(only when the audiobook is
playing) (type B audio)
Each time you briefly press the “RPT”
button while the audiobook is playing, the
playing speed changes in the following
sequence.

– CONTINUED –
5-36 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations

Message Cause Action

“CHECK DEVICE” . When there is a short in the USB bus Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod® and
. When an incompatible device (for example a USB mouse) is check it.
connected
. When an incompatible iPod® is connected
. When a connected iPod® is frozen
. When a transmission malfunction occurs
. When an iPod® confirmation malfunction occurs
. When a HUB class USB storage device is connected
“NO DEVICE” (type A audio) Connect a supported USB storage device/iPod®.
“No USB” (type B audio) . No USB storage devices/iPod® are connected.
“No iPod” (type B audio) . An incompatible USB storage device/iPod® is connected.
“NO FILE” (type A audio) There are no playable audio files on the connected USB storage Connect a USB storage device that has playable
“No song” (type B audio) device. audio files stored on it.
“NO MUSIC” (type A audio) Connect an iPod® that has playable audio files
“No Songs” (type B audio) There are no playable audio files on the connected iPod®. stored on it.
 Audio/Audio control buttons 5-37

Audio control buttons & MODE button Type B audio:

NOTE
For models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.
! Type A audio
Press and hold this button if you wish to
This button is used to select the desired
immediately cut the volume to zero.
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the The audio display will show “MUTE”.
following sequence. If you press and hold the button again, the
Type A audio: original sound volume will return and
“MUTE” turns off.

These buttons are located on the spokes

of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only when the device is connected.

– CONTINUED –
5-38 Audio/Audio control buttons

& “ ” and “ ” switch When a MP3/WMA/AAC format track is & Volume control switch
playing, press and hold the switch to the
“ ” side to select the next folder. Press
and hold the switch to the “ ” side to go
back to the previous folder.
! With iPod® mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip
forward in the track order. Press the switch
to the “ ” side to skip backward in the
track order. The track number will be
shown on the audio display.
! With SAT mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
briefly. The radio will seek the next preset Press the switch to the “+” side to increase
! With radio mode selected channel and stop at it. the volume. Press the switch to the “−”
Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side Press and hold the switch to the “ ” or side to reduce the volume.
briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press “ ” side. The radio will seek the next A number indicating the volume will be
and hold the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side receivable channel and stop at it. shown on the audio display.
to seek the next receivable station and The channel will be shown on the audio
stop at it. display.
That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.
! With CD/USB/Bluetooth® audio
mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side briefly to
skip forward in the track order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side briefly to skip
backward in the track order.
The track number will be shown on the
audio display.
 Audio/Bluetooth® audio 5-39

Bluetooth® audio NOTE . AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control

. The Bluetooth® audio function may Profile)
NOTE not operate properly under the follow-
ing conditions. & Setting Bluetooth® audio
For models with the genuine SUBARU – The device is turned off. (type A audio)
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s – The battery of the device has run
Manual supplement for the navigation 1. Select “BT-A SETUP” by pressing the
down. “MENU” button.
system.
– The device is not connected to 2. Perform the following procedure by
the system. operating the “TUNE” dial while “BT-A” is
– The device is behind the seat or displayed.
in the glove box.
– A metal material is covering or
touching the device. NOTE
. Depending on the type of device that You cannot set Bluetooth® audio while
is used, operation and sound volume driving.
may be different from normal use of
! Registering (pairing) device
those devices.
. The sound quality may degrade due NOTE
to the influence of the device that is Only one device can be registered.
connected to the system or the circum- 1. Select the “PAIR AUDIO” menu.
stances of the Bluetooth network.
NOTE – If a device is already registered,
. When another Bluetooth® device is “MEMORY FULL” is displayed and the
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are simultaneously connected, noise may
registered trademarks of Bluetooth mode changes to the Bluetooth®
be heard. audio setting mode.
SIG, Inc.
2. After the passkey is shown on the
This function enables you to play back & Media format display, input the passkey into the device.
audio sources from Bluetooth® audio
Bluetooth® audio devices cannot be – If the registering procedure is fin-
devices. You need to register the Blue-
connected if they are not compatible with ished, “PAIRED” and the name of the
tooth® audio device in the system before
the following Bluetooth® profiles. device are displayed.
using it.
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution – If the registering procedure was not
Profile) successful, “FAILED” is displayed.
– CONTINUED –
5-40 Audio/Bluetooth® audio

After the name of the device or “FAILED” entered.

is displayed, the mode changes to the 2. Input the new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit
Bluetooth® audio setting mode. number) by operating the “TUNE” dial.
NOTE 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The new passkey is displayed, the
After the ignition switch is turned to the passkey is changed and the mode
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the registered changes to the Bluetooth® audio
device is not automatically connected setting mode.
to the system even if the ignition switch
is turned to the “Acc” or “ON” position. ! Deleting device
! Selecting device 1. Select the “DELETE AUDIO” menu.
1. Select the “SELECT AUDIO” menu. – If no devices are registered,
– If no devices are registered, “EMPTY” is displayed and the mode Talk switch
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode changes to the Bluetooth® audio
2. Press the talk switch .
changes to the Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
setting mode. 2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. NOTE
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. – “DELETED” is displayed and the If a device and a cell phone are already
– Then the name of the selected mode changes to the Bluetooth® registered, “BT” menu will be dis-
device is displayed. audio setting mode. played. Then perform the following
– If the device is connected, “SE- procedure.
LECTED” is displayed and the mode & Setting Bluetooth® audio (1) Press the talk switch and
changes to the Bluetooth® audio (type B audio) say “Setup”.
setting mode. 1. Press the button to select the (2) Press the talk switch again
– If the device cannot be connected, “BT Audio” mode. and say “Bluetooth audio setup”.
“FAILED” is displayed and the select- The “BT Audio Setup” will then be
ing procedure was not successful. displayed.
3. After the “BT Audio Setup” menu is
! Setting passkey displayed, select the following menus by
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. using the voice command system or by
– After the currently set passkey is operating the “TUNE” dial.
displayed, a new passkey can be
 Audio/Bluetooth® audio 5-41
NOTE ! Registering (pairing) device 6. Press the talk switch .
. You cannot set Bluetooth® audio 7. Say “Confirm” to select the device, or
1. Press the talk switch and say “Pair
while driving. say “Go back” to go back.
audio player”.
. After the ignition switch is turned to – If the device is connected, “Se-
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the regis- 2. Press the talk switch and say the
lected” will be displayed.
tered device/cell phone may be auto- name of the device to be registered.
– If the device cannot be connected,
matically connected to the system if 3. Press the talk switch . “Failed” will be displayed.
the ignition switch is turned to the 4. Say “Confirm” to register the device, or
“Acc” or “ON” position. say “Go back” to go back. ! Changing the registered name
. When a cell phone is already con- 5. After saying “Confirm”, the passkey
1. Press the talk switch and say
nected, the system will disconnect the will be shown on the display. Then input
“Change name”.
phone to setup a new device. You may the passkey into the device.
need to reconnect the phone after – If the registering procedure is fin- 2. Press the talk switch .
setup is complete. ished, “Audio Players Paired.” will be 3. Say the name of the registered device,
. Up to 2 devices (excluding cell displayed. or “List audio players” and select the
phones for Hands-free system) can be – If the registering procedure was not registered device (for details, refer to “List
registered. successful, “Unable to pair audio audio player function” F5-42).
. Up to 6 devices (including cell players.” will be displayed. 4. Press the talk switch .
phones for Hands-free system) can be 5. Say “Confirm” to select the device, or
registered. ! Selecting device say “Go back” to go back.
1. Press the talk switch and say 6. After saying “Confirm”, press the talk
! By using voice command system
“Select audio player”. switch .
NOTE 7. Say a new name to be registered.
2. Press the talk switch .
If no devices are registered, you can 8. Press the talk switch .
3. Say the name of the registered device,
only select from the following menu. 9. Say “Confirm” to change the name, or
or “List audio players” and select the
. “Pair audio player” (refer to “Regis- registered device (for details, refer to “List say “Go back” to go back.
tering (pairing) device” F5-41) audio player function” F5-42). – If the name is changed, “Name
. “Set passkey” (refer to “Selecting changed.” will be displayed.
4. Press the talk switch and say
device” F5-41)
“Confirm”.
5. Press the talk switch and say
“From car” or “From audio”.

– CONTINUED –
5-42 Audio/Bluetooth® audio

! List audio player function – If the passkey is set, the new F5-43)
The names of the registered devices are passkey will be displayed.
! Registering (pairing) device
spoken by using the list audio player
function. To use the list audio player ! Deleting device 1. Select the “Pair Audio Players” menu.
function, perform the following procedure. 1. Press the talk switch and say 2. Select the “Record Name” menu.
“Delete audio player”. 3. Say the name of the device to be
1. Press the talk switch and say “List
audio player”. 2. Press the talk switch . registered.
– The names will then be spoken. 3. Say the name of the device, or “List 4. Select the “Confirm pair audio?” menu.
audio player” and select the device (for – The passkey will then be shown on
2. Press the talk switch while the
details, refer to “List audio player function” the display.
name is being spoken to select the device.
F5-42). 5. Input the passkey into the device.
– After the talk switch is pressed,
“Audio player selected.” will be dis- 4. Press the talk switch . – If the registering procedure is fin-
played. 5. Say “Confirm” to delete the device, or ished, “Audio Players Paired.” will be
3. Press the talk switch and say the say “Go back” to go back. displayed.
following words. – If the device is deleted, “Deleted.” – If the registering procedure was not
. “Select audio player” (refer to “Se- will be displayed. successful, “Unable to pair audio
lecting device” F5-41) players.” will be displayed.
! By operating the dial
. “Change name” (refer to “Changing ! Selecting device
the registered name” F5-41) Select the menu by turning and pressing
. “Delete audio player” (refer to “De- the “TUNE” dial. 1. Select the “Select Audio Player” menu.
leting device” F5-42) 2. Select the preferred device.
NOTE
3. Select the “Confirm select audio
! Setting passkey . Select the “Go Back” menu to go
player?” menu.
back to the previous menu.
1. Press the talk switch and say “Set . If no devices are registered, you can 4. Select the “From Car” menu or “From
passkey”. only select from the following menu. Audio Player” menu.
2. Press the talk switch and say the – “Pair Audio Players” to register 5. Select the “Confirm select audio
new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit number). the device (refer to “Registering player?” menu.
3. Press the talk switch . (pairing) device” F5-42) – If the device is connected, “Se-
4. Say “Confirm” to set the passkey, or – “Set Passkey” to set a new lected” will be displayed.
say “Go back” to go back. passkey (refer to “Setting passkey” – If the device cannot be connected,
 Audio/Bluetooth® audio 5-43

“Failed” will be displayed. leting device” F5-43) & Bluetooth® audio operation
! Changing the registered name ! Setting passkey NOTE
Depending on the connected device, it
1. Select the “Change Name” menu. 1. Select the “Set Passkey” menu. may not activate as per the following
2. Select the preferred device. 2. Press the “TUNE” dial. items or not work smoothly. Refer to
3. Select the “Record Name” menu. 3. Input the new passkey (a 4 - 8 digit the instruction manual of the con-
4. Say the new name. number) by turning and pressing the nected device.
5. Select the “Confirm name change?” “TUNE” dial.
menu. 4. After inputting the new passkey, press ! How to play back
– If the name is changed, “Device the “TUNE” dial again.
name has been changed.” will be – If the passkey is set, the new
Type A audio
displayed. passkey will be displayed.

! List audio player function ! Deleting device Type B audio

For details about the list audio player 1. Select the “Delete Audio Player”
function, refer to “List audio player func- menu.
tion” F5-42. Press the “CD/AUX” button and select the
2. Select the preferred device. “BT-A” (type A audio)/“BT Audio” (type B
1. Select the “List Audio Players” menu. 3. Select the “Confirm delete audio audio) mode.
– The names will then be spoken. Player?” menu.
– If the device is deleted, “Audio ! To select a track from the beginning
2. Press the talk switch while the Select a track in the same way as for a
name is being spoken to select the device. player has been deleted.” will be
displayed. CD. Refer to “To select a track from the
– After the talk switch is pressed, beginning” F5-21.
“Audio player selected.” will be dis-
played. ! Repeating (type A audio)
3. Select from the following menu. Repeating is operated in the same way as
. “Select Audio Player” (refer to “Se- for a CD. Refer to “Repeating” F5-22.
lecting device” F5-42) Each time you briefly press the
. “Change name” (refer to “Changing button, the mode changes in the following
the registered name” F5-43) sequence.
. “Delete Audio Player” (refer to “De-
– CONTINUED –
5-44 Audio/Hands–free system

! Fast-forwarding and rewinding Hands-free system

(type B audio)
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are oper- NOTE
ated in the same way as for a CD. Refer to . For models with the genuine
“Fast-forwarding and rewinding” F5-21. SUBARU navigation system, refer to
! Folder selection the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
! Random playback (type A audio) navigation system.
Select a folder in the same way as for a
Random playback is operated in the same . When selling your vehicle, make
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-24.
way as for a CD. Refer to “Random sure that you initialize the Hands-free
playback” F5-22. Each time you press system to prevent personal data from
and hold the button, the mode being improperly accessed.
changes in the following sequence. The Hands-free system operates while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.

& Tips for the Hands-free sys-

tem
! Display selection (type A audio)
! Bluetooth®
Select an indication in the same way as
for a CD. Refer to “Display selection (type It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
A audio)” F5-24. Each time you briefly in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
press the button, the indication tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
changes in the following sequence. call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
an incoming phone call.
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
ment and the cell phone can be made
without placing them in close vicinity of
each other. The cell phone can be used
with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-45
NOTE . When the ignition switch is turned to . The sound quality may degrade due
. The Hands-free system may not the “LOCK”/“OFF” position during a to the influence of the cell phone that is
operate properly under the following call, the call may be disconnected or connected to the system or the circum-
conditions. continued on the cell phone depending stances of the Bluetooth network.
– The cell phone is turned off. on the type of cell phone that is used. . When another Bluetooth® device is
– The cell phone is not in the Note that operation of the cell phone simultaneously connected, noise may
phone call area. may be necessary if the call is con- be heard in the voice coming from the
– The battery of the cell phone has tinued on the cell phone. hands-free phone.
run down. . Do not speak at the same time as the
other party during a call. If you and the ! Corresponding profiles for the cell
– The cell phone is not connected phone
to the Hands-free system. party speak at the same time, it may be
– The cell phone is behind the seat difficult for the other party to hear your . HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
or in the glove box. voice and vice versa. This is normal. . OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
– A metal material covers or . The receiver sound volume should
touches the cell phone. be set as low as possible. Otherwise, & Certification for the Hands-
. Depending on the type of cell phone the party you are calling may notice an free system
that is used, the screen on the cell undesirable echo sound.
phone may remain illuminated while . Speak clearly and loudly. CAUTION
the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Your voice may be difficult to be
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- heard by the party under the following FCC WARNING
nation off by adjusting the cell phone conditions. Changes or modifications not ex-
settings. – Driving on a rough road. pressly approved by the party re-
. Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving at a high speed. sponsible for compliance could void
phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving with a window open. the user’s authority to operate the
activated after making a call. Deacti- – When air from the ventilator equipment.
vate the automatic dial lock function of blows directly towards the micro-
the cell phone before using the Hands- phone. FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
free system. – When the sound coming from the IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
. Depending on the type of cell phone ventilator is loud. Made in Japan
that is used, operation and the sound – When the cell phone is too close
volume may be different from those of to the microphone.
cell phones currently used.
– CONTINUED –
5-46 Audio/Hands–free system

NOTE . Reorient or relocate the receiving . This transmitter must not be co-
This device complies with Part 15 of antenna. located or operated in conjunction with
the FCC Rules and Industry Canada . Increase the separation between the any other antenna or transmitter.
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Op- equipment and receiver.
eration is subject to the following two . Connect the equipment into an out- ! Mexico models
conditions: (1) this device may not let on a circuit different from that to
cause harmful interference, and (2) this which the receiver is connected.
device must accept any interference, . Consult the dealer or an experi-
including interference that may cause enced radio/TV technician for help.
undesired operation of this device. . Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
NOTE sible for compliance could void the
This equipment has been tested and user’s authority to operate the equip-
found to comply with the limits for a ment.
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part . This equipment complies with FCC/
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are IC radiation exposure limits set forth
designed to provide reasonable protec- for an uncontrolled equipment and
tion against harmful interference in a meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
residential installation. This equipment Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
may cause harmful interference to to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
radio communications, if it is not frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
installed and used in accordance with equipment has very low levels of RF
the instructions. However, there is no energy that it deemed to comply with-
guarantee that interference will not out maximum permissive exposure
occur in a particular installation. If this evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
equipment does cause harmful inter- that it should be installed and operated
ference to radio or television reception, keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or
which can be determined by turning the more away from person’s body (ex-
equipment off and on, the user is cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
encouraged to try to correct the inter- and ankles).
ference by one or more of the following
measures.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-47

& Safety precautions . When using the cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
WARNING in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
too close to the in-vehicle equip- method. The expected inflicting
. For safety reasons, avoid operat- ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than
ing the cell phone while driving. in tone quality or a poor connect- 33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
. Do not make a phone call while ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band
driving. When you have an in- . In the frequency band used by used by a movable body identifi-
coming call, stop the vehicle in a this equipment, along with indus- cation device.
safe location before taking the trial, scientific and medical
incoming phone call. When you equipment such as a microwave
have to absolutely take a phone oven, radio stations (a license is & Using the Hands-free system
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you required) to be used by the
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
back”. And then call the caller production line in the factory to
back after stopping the vehicle in identify movable bodies, specific
a safe location. small power radio stations (a
. Part 15 FCC Rules license is not required) and ama-
teur radio stations (a license is
FCC Warning:
required) are being operated.
Any unauthorized changes of (These three types of radio sta-
modifications to this equipment tions are hereinafter referred to
would void the user’s authority to as “other radio stations”.) Before
operate this device. using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio
stations” are being operated in
CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
. Do not leave the cell phone in the 1) OFF hook switch
equipment to “other radio sta-
vehicle. The temperature in the 2) ON hook switch
tions”, move the equipment to
vehicle may become extremely 3) Talk switch
another location as soon as
high and cause a malfunction of
possible to avoid radio interfer- To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
the cell phone.
ence. The frequency band used OFF hook switch . To turn off the
– CONTINUED –
5-48 Audio/Hands–free system

Hands-free mode, press the ON hook Select the menus by operating the “TUNE” 7. Select the “Confirm pair phone?”
switch . dial. menu.
! Preparation for using the Hands- Type A audio: 8. Select the “Phone Only” menu to
free system register only a cell phone, or select “Int.
1. Press the OFF hook switch . Audio” menu to register internal audio in
Before using the Hands-free system, it is 2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by addition to the cell phone.
necessary to register a cell phone in the operating the “TUNE” dial.
system. Perform the following procedure 9. After “Car Multi-Media” is displayed, a
– “WELCOME!” will then be dis- pass key will be displayed.
to register a cell phone. played.
10. Input the displayed pass key into the
NOTE 3. Press the “TUNE” dial or the talk cell phone while “Passkey: ****” is dis-
switch . played.
. Up to 5 cell phones can be regis-
tered (for type A audio). 4. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu, or
. Up to 6 cell phones (including Blue- press the talk switch . ! Registering by using voice com-
tooth® audio devices) can be registered 5. Say the name to be registered. mand system (type B audio)
(for type B audio). 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
. When the ignition switch is turned to – After “CAR M_MEDIA” is displayed, NOTE
the “Acc” or “ON” position, the regis- a pass key will be displayed. If no cell phone is registered, when the
tered cell phone may be automatically 7. Input the displayed pass key into the OFF hook switch is pressed, “Wel-
connected to the system. cell phone while “PKY: ****” is displayed. come!!” is shown on the screen. In this
case, perform the procedure after step
! Registering by operating dial Type B audio: 4.
“TUNE” dial: 1. Press the OFF hook switch .
– If no cell phone is registered, 1. Select a mode other than “BT Audio”
“Welcome!!” is shown on the screen. mode.
In this case, perform the procedure 2. Press the talk switch and say
Type A audio “Setup”.
after step 4.
2. Select the “Setup” menu. 3. Press the talk switch and say
3. Select the “Phone Setup” menu. “Phone Setup”.
4. Select the “Pair Phone” menu. 4. Press the talk switch and say “Pair
Type B audio Phone”.
5. Select the “Record Name” menu.
5. Press the talk switch and say the
6. Say the name to be registered. name to be registered.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-49

6. Press the talk switch and say

“Confirm”.
7. Press the talk switch .
8. Say “Phone Only” to register only a
cell phone, or say “Internal Audio” to
register internal audio in addition to the
cell phone.
9. Press the talk switch and say
“Confirm pair phone?”.
– After “Car Multi-Media” is displayed,
a pass key will be displayed.
10. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while “Passkey: ****” is dis-
played.

! Menu list of the Hands-free system

Turn the “TUNE” dial to select a menu,
and then press the dial to enter the
selected menu.

– CONTINUED –
5-50 Audio/Hands–free system

Type A audio:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
PHONE BOOK* ADD ENTRY BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-57
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-57
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-58
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-58
GO BACK
LIST NAMES — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-59
CHANGE NAME — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-59
SET SPD DIAL — Registering a speed dial 5-60
DELETE ENTRY — Deleting phonebook data 5-60
DEL SPD DIAL — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-60
GO BACK —
REDIAL DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-61

STORE — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-58
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-60
GO BACK —
CALLBACK DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61

STORE — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-59
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
GO BACK —

*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-51

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

SETUP SECURITY SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-62
PHBK LOCK*1 Locking the phonebook 5-62
*1
PHBK UNLOCK Unlocking the phonebook 5-63
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone*2 5-48
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-63
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-64
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-64
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-64
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-64
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP GUIDANCE VOL Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-65
INITIALIZE Initialization 5-65
SEL LANGUAGE Selecting the language (using the Hands-free system) 5-65
GO BACK
GO BACK —

*1: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.

– CONTINUED –
5-52 Audio/Hands–free system

Type B audio:
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page
Phonebook* Add Entry By Voice Adding a new number by voice 5-57
By Phone Adding a new number by cell phone 5-57
Manual Input Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-58
Call History Adding a new number from the call history 5-58
Go Back
Change Name — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-59
List Names — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-59
Speed Dial — Registering a speed dial 5-60
Delete Entry — Deleting phonebook data 5-60
Delete Speed Dial — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-60
Go Back —
Redial* Dial — Redialing 5-61

Store — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-58
memory
Delete — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-60
Go Back —
CallBack* Dial — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61

Store — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-59
memory
Delete — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-61
Go Back —

*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-53

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

Setup Security*1 Set PIN Setting a PIN code 5-62
Phonebook Lock Locking the phonebook 5-62
Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phonebook 5-63
Go Back
Phone setup Pair Phone Registering a new cell phone*3 5-48
*1
Select Phone Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-63
Change Phone Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-64
Name*1
*1
List Phones Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-64
Set Passkey Changing the pass key 5-64
Delete Phone*1 Deleting the registered cell phone 5-64
Handsfree Power*1 Turning the Hands-free power ON/OFF 5-65
Go Back
BT Audio Setup*1 Pair Audio Players Registering an audio player (device)*3 5-42
*2
Select Audio Player Selecting the registered audio player (device) 5-42
Change Name*2 Changing the name of the registered audio player (device) 5-43
List Audio Players*2 Speaking the names of the registered audio players (devices) 5-43
Set Passkey Setting a new passkey for the registered audio player (device) 5-43
Delete Audio Player*2 Deleting the registered audio player (device) 5-43
Go Back

*1: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
*2: If a device is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
*3: Up to 6 cell phones and Bluetooth® audio devices can be registered.

– CONTINUED –
5-54 Audio/Hands–free system

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

Setup System setup* Guidance Volume Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-65
Device Name Showing the device name and BD address of the audio 5-65
Reset Settings Initialization 5-65
Go Back
Go Back —

*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-55

! Voice command system The commands available for the voice

19 setup réglages
command system are listed in the follow-
NOTE ing charts. phone book add ajouter l’entrée
20
Press the talk switch and say entry dans le registre
“Help” to listen to the help guidance. Type A audio: phone book modifier le nom
21 change name dans le registre
Command
22 phone book delete supprimer l’entrée
English Français entry du registre
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro) phone book list lister les noms du
23 names registre
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
phone book set configurer compo-
3 2 (two) 2 (deux) 24 sition abrégée pour
speed dial le registre
4 3 (three) 3 (trois)
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre)
25 phone book delete supprimer compo-
sition abrégée pour
speed dial le registre
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq)
7 6 (six) 6 (six) 26 phone book unlock déverrouiller
gistre
le re-
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
1) OFF hook switch 27 cancel annuler
2) ON hook switch 9 8 (eight) 8 (huit)
3) Talk switch 28 help aide
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
29 repeat répéter
To turn on the voice command system, 11 * (star) * (étoile)
press the talk switch briefly. To turn off 30 go back retourner
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse)
the voice command system, wait for 5 31 dial composer
seconds without using the voice command 13 + (plus) + (plus)
32 previous précédent
system. 14 callback rappel
33 delete supprimer
15 redial recomposer
34 store enregistrer
16 dial by number composer par nu-
méro 35 confirm confirmer
17 dial by name composer par nom 36 phone setup réglages du télé-
phone
18 phonebook registre
– CONTINUED –
5-56 Audio/Hands–free system

Type B audio:
37 security sécurité 20 call history historique des ap-
pels
jumeler le télé- Command
38 pair phone phone 21 call transfer transfert d’appel
English Français
39 change name modifier le nom 22 callback rappel automatique
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro)
40 select phone sélectionner le tél- 23 cancel annuler
éphone 2 1 (one) 1 (un)
24 change name changer nom
lister les télé- 3 2 (two) 2 (deux)
41 list phones phones 25 confirm valider
4 3 (three) 3 (trois)
configurer le 26 delete supprimer
42 set pass key 5 4 (four) 4 (quatre)
passe-partout 27 delete audio supprimer audio
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq)
43 add entry ajouter l’entrée
7 6 (six) 6 (six) 28 delete audio player supprimer
audio
lecteur
44 delete entry supprimer l’entrée
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept) 29 delete entry supprimer entrée
45 delete speed dial supprimer compo-
sition abrégée 9 8 (eight) 8 (huit) supprimer télé-
30 delete phone phone
46 by voice vocalement 10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
47 by phone par téléphone 11 * (star) * (étoile) 31 delete speed dial supprimer compo-
sition rapide
48 call history historique d’appels 12 # (pound) # (dièse)
32 dial composer
49 set speed dial configurer compo- 13 + (plus) + (plus)
sition abrégée 33 dial by name composer par nom
14 add entry ajouter entrée
50 incoming entrant 34 dial by number composer par nu-
Bluetooth Audio configuration méro
51 outgoing sortant 15 setup Audio Bluetooth
35 from audio depuis audio
52 list names lister les noms configuration
16 BT-A setup Audio Bluetooth 36 from car depuis voiture
53 set PIN configurer NIP
configuration 37 go back retour
verrouiller le regis- 17 BT-Audio setup Audio Bluetooth
54 phone book lock tre alimentation mains
38 hands free power libres
18 by phone par téléphone
19 by voice par la voix 39 help aide
40 incoming appel d’arrivée
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-57

the phonebook is 50 (type A audio)/20

41 internal audio audio interne 59 phonebook annuaire
(type B audio).
42 list audio players lister lecteurs phonebook delete annuaire suppri- . After registering phonebook data,
audio 60 speed dial mer composition you can add a phone number to the
rapide
43 list names lister noms speed dial memory. For details, refer to
61 previous précédent “Registering speed dial” F5-59.
44 list phones lister téléphones
62 redial recomposer
45 mute sourdine ! Registering by voice
63 repeat répéter
46 next suivant 1. Select the “BY VOICE” menu.
64 security sécurité
47 outgoing appel de départ 2. Press the talk switch .
jumeler lecteur 65 select audio player sélectionner
teur audio
lec- 3. Say the phone number to be regis-
48 pair audio player audio tered.
66 select phone sélectionner télé- 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
49 pair phone jumeler téléphone phone
phone book add annuaire ajouter 5. Perform either of the following proce-
50 67 send envoyer
entry entrée dures.
68 set pass key définir mot de – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
51 phone book annuaire changer passe
change name nom by operating the “TUNE” dial.
69 set PIN définir NIP – Press the talk switch .
52 phone book delete annuaire suppri-
entry mer entrée 70 set speed dial définir composition 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
rapide registered.
53 phone book list annuaire lister
names noms 71 setup configurer 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
54 phone book lock annuaire bloquer 72 store enregistrer – The phone number is then regis-
tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
55 phone book set annuaire définir 73 turn on activer “Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
speed dial composition rapide
74 turn off désactiver is displayed.
56 phone book unlock annuaire
quer
déblo-
! Updating phonebook data ! Registering by phone
57 phone only téléphone unique-
ment NOTE 1. Select the “BY PHONE” menu.
. The maximum number of phone- 2. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
58 phone setup configuration télé-
phone book entries that can be registered in “Confirm Transfer phonebook entry?”
(type B audio) menu.
– CONTINUED –
5-58 Audio/Hands–free system

3. Transfer the data from the cell phone. ! Registering by inputting manu- – “Incoming Call History” or “Outgoing
For details about transferring the data, ally Call History” (type B audio)
refer to the instruction manual of the cell 3. Select the phone number by operating
1. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by
phone. the “TUNE” dial.
operating the “TUNE” dial.
NOTE 2. Input the phone number to be regis- 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (type A
tered. audio).
For type B audio, you can select the
3. Perform either of the following proce- 5. Perform either of the following proce-
data to be registered by performing
dures. dures.
either of the following procedures until
the preferred data is displayed. – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial. by operating the “TUNE” dial.
. Press the talk switch and saying
– Press the talk switch . – Press the talk switch .
“Previous” or “Next”.
. Operate the “TUNE” dial. 4. Say the name (voice tag) to be 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered. registered.
4. Select the phone number to be regis- 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
tered by operating the “TUNE” dial. 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– The phone number is then regis- – The phone number is then regis-
5. Perform either of the following proce- tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
dures. tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio) “Phone number stored.” (type B audio)
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu is displayed.
is displayed.
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch . ! Registering from redial
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be NOTE
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
registered. While inputting the phone numbers, if
“GO BACK” is chosen using the 2. Select the phone number by operating
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. the “TUNE” dial.
– The phone number is then regis- “TUNE” dial, the character that was
input last is deleted. 3. Select the “STORE” menu.
tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio) ! Registering from call history “Confirm store number?” (type B audio)
is displayed.
1. Select the “CALL HISTORY” menu. menu.
2. Select one of the following menus. 5. Perform either of the following proce-
– “INCOMING” or “OUTGOING” (type dures.
A audio) – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-59

– Press the talk switch . ! Registering speed dial choose the following menus.
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be 1. After registering phonebook data, per- . “DIAL” to make a phone call
registered. form either of the following procedures. . “CHANGE NAME” to change the name
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. – Select the “SPEED DIAL” menu by (voice tag)
– The phone number is then regis- operating the “TUNE” dial. . “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET SPEED DIAL”/
tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/ – Press the talk switch and say “Speed Dial” to set the speed dial
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio) “SET SPEED DIAL”. . “DELETE ENTRY” to delete the name
is displayed. 2. Press the preset button (from to (voice tag) from the phonebook
) to which you want to register the . “GO BACK” to go back to the menu
! Registering from call back mode
phone number.
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu. . “HELP” to listen to the help guidance
2. Select the phone number by operating NOTE (only when using the voice command
the “TUNE” dial. system)
If the number to be used is already
3. Select the “STORE” menu. registered in speed dial, “OVER-
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
NOTE
WRITE?” will be displayed. Select the . After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
“Confirm store number?” (type B audio) “CONFIRM” menu to overwrite, or
menu. the OFF hook switch is pushed, the
select the “GO BACK” menu to cancel. selected number is called.
5. Perform either of the following proce-
! List names function . After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if
dures.
no operation is performed, the mem-
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu The voice tags registered in the phone- ories are displayed and voice tags are
by operating the “TUNE” dial. book are spoken by using the list names spoken. After all memories/voice tags
– Press the talk switch . function. To use the list names function, are displayed/spoken, “END OF LIST”
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be perform the following procedure. is displayed and the mode changes to
registered. 1. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu. the “PHONE BOOK” menu mode.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 2. Choose the registered data by per-
– The phone number is then regis- ! Changing voice tag
forming either of the following procedures.
tered and “STORED” (type A audio)/ – Press the talk switch . 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
“Phone number stored.” (type B audio) 2. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial (type A
is displayed. 3. Select the phone number by perform-
audio only).
ing one of the following procedures.
After “SELECTED” is displayed, you can
– CONTINUED –
5-60 Audio/Hands–free system

– Operate the “TUNE” dial. – Press the talk switch and say – Press the talk switch and say
– Press the talk switch and say “SET SPEED DIAL”. the voice tag.
the voice tag. 2. Select the phone number by perform- – Press the talk switch and use
– Press the talk switch , say “List ing one of the following procedures. the list names function (type B audio).
Names” and use the list names func- – Operate the “TUNE” dial. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
tion. – Press the talk switch and say “Confirm delete entry?” (type B audio)
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ the voice tag. menu.
“Confirm name change?” (type B audio) – Press the talk switch , say “List – Then “DELETED” (type A audio)/
menu (only after saying the voice tag). Names” and use the list names func- “Phonebook entry deleted.” (type B
– Then the selected phone number/ tion (type B audio). audio) is displayed and the selected
name is displayed. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ phonebook data is deleted.
5. Perform either of the following proce- “Confirm Name?” (type B audio) menu
dures. (only after saying the voice tag). ! Deleting the speed dial
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu 4. Press the preset button (from to 1. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE
by operating the “TUNE” dial. ) to which you want to register the SPEED DIAL” menu.
– Press the talk switch . phone number. 2. Press the preset button (from to
6. Say the new voice tag. ) to which you want to delete the
NOTE speed dial.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm name change?” (type B audio) If the number to be used is already 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
menu. registered in speed dial, “OVER- “Confirm delete speed dial entry?” (type B
WRITE?” will be displayed. Select the audio) menu.
– Then “CHANGED” (type A audio)/
“CONFIRM” (type A audio)/“Confirm – Then “DELETED” (type A audio)/
“Name successfully changed.” (type B
Overwrite speed dial?” (type B audio) “Speed dial entry * deleted.” (type B
audio) is displayed.
menu to overwrite, or select the “GO audio) is displayed and the selected
! Set speed dial BACK” menu to cancel. speed dial is deleted.
1. Perform either of the following proce-
! Deleting the phonebook data ! Deleting the redial data
dures.
– Select the “SET SPD DIAL” menu 1. Select the “DELETE ENTRY” menu. 1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
(type A audio) /“Speed Dial” menu 2. Select the phone number by perform- 2. Select the phone number by operating
(type B audio) by operating the ing either of the following procedures. the “TUNE” dial.
“TUNE” dial. – Operate the “TUNE” dial. 3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-61

4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ ! Making a phone call by saying ! Redial
“Confirm delete number?” (type B audio) number
menu. 1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
1. Press the talk switch . 2. Select the preferred number by turning
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and
the selected redial data is deleted. 2. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”. the “TUNE” dial.
3. Press the talk switch again. 3. Perform either of the following proce-
! Deleting the callback data 4. Say the preferred phone number to be dures.
called. – Press the OFF hook switch .
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
5. Select the “DIAL” menu, or press the – Select the “DIAL” menu.
2. Select the phone number by operating
the “TUNE” dial. OFF hook switch .
! Callback
3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
! Making a phone call from speed 1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ dial
“Confirm delete number?” (type B audio) 2. Select the preferred number by turning
menu. It is possible to select a phone number the “TUNE” dial.
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and from speed dial registered with the in- 3. Perform either of the following proce-
the selected callback data is deleted. vehicle equipment to make a phone call. dures.
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). – Press the OFF hook switch .
! Making a phone call 2. Press the preset button (from to – Select the “DIAL” menu.
! Making a phone call by saying ) to which the preferred number is
registered. ! Making a phone call from list
name name
3. Press the OFF hook switch .
1. Press the talk switch . It is possible to select a phone number
2. Say “DIAL BY NAME”. from the list name registered with the in-
NOTE vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
3. Press the talk switch again.
When a preset button for which num- For details, refer to “List names function”
4. Say the preferred name (voice tag) to
bers are not registered is pressed, an F5-59.
be called. For type B audio, you can use
error message is indicated on the audio
the list names function. ! Top redial
screen.
5. Select the “DIAL” menu, or press the 1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
OFF hook switch .
2. Press the OFF hook switch and
load the outgoing call history.

– CONTINUED –
5-62 Audio/Hands–free system

3. Select the preferred number by turning ! Volume control & Bluetooth® setting
the “TUNE” dial.
4. Perform either of the following proce- ! Security setting
dures. After selecting the “SECURITY” menu,
– Press the OFF hook switch . perform the following procedure.
– Select the “DIAL” menu. ! Setting PIN code
! Taking a phone call and declining The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is
an incoming call used when locking the phonebook.
To take a phone call: Press the OFF 1. Select the “SET PIN” menu.
hook switch . 2. Input the current PIN code by perform-
ing one of the following procedures.
To put an incoming call on hold (only if
the cell phone has this function): Press the – Operate the “TUNE” dial.
ON hook switch briefly. – Press the talk switch and say
You can adjust the phone call volume, the the number.
To decline an incoming call (only if the voice volume and the voice guidance
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
cell phone has this function): Press and volume. Refer to “Volume control switch”
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
hold the ON hook switch . F5-38.
4. Input the new PIN code by performing
! Ending a call ! Adjustable level of each volume one of the following procedures.
Press the ON hook switch . – Operate the “TUNE” dial.
Volume Range Initial setting – Press the talk switch and say
Phone call 0 to 14 7 the number.
Voice 0 to 14 7
5. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu.
0 to 6*1 3*1
Voice guidance 1 to 7*2 4*2
! Locking the phonebook
*1: type A audio 1. Select the “PHBK LOCK”/“PHONE-
*2: type B audio
BOOK LOCK” menu.
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-63
NOTE NOTE 1. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu.
If the phonebook is locked, “LOCKED” If the phonebook is not locked, “UN- – If no cell phones are registered,
(type A audio)/“The phonebook is LOCK” (type A audio)/“The phonebook “EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones
locked.” (type B audio) is displayed is unlocked.” (type B audio) is dis- have been paired.” (type B audio) is
and the mode changes to the security played and the mode changes to the displayed and the mode changes to
mode. security mode. the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Input the PIN code by performing one 2. Input the PIN code by performing one 2. Select the cell phone by performing
of the following procedures. of the following procedures. one of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE” dial. – Operate the “TUNE” dial. – Operate the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say – Press the talk switch and say – Press the talk switch and say
the number. the number. the voice tag.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ – Press the talk switch and use
“Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu. “Confirm PIN?” (type B audio) menu. the list phones function (refer to “List
phones function” F5-64.)
– If the inputted PIN code is correct, – If the inputted PIN code is correct,
“LOCKED” (type A audio)/“The phone- “UNLOCKED” (type A audio)/“The 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
book is locked.” (type B audio) will be phonebook is unlocked.” (type B “Confirm Phone selection?” (type B audio)
displayed and the phonebook is audio) will be displayed and the menu (only after saying the voice tag).
locked. phonebook is unlocked. – “SELECTED” (type A audio)/
“Phone is selected.” (type B audio) is
! Phone setup displayed, the selected cell phone is
NOTE connected to the in-vehicle equipment
While the phonebook is locked, if the After selecting the “PHONE SETUP” and the mode changes to the “PHONE
operation restricted menu is selected, menu, perform the following procedure. SETUP” mode.
“PHBK LOCK” (type A audio)/“Phone- ! Pairing phone
book locked!” (type B audio) is dis- NOTE
played. Refer to “Preparation for using the Hands-
For type A audio, if the cell phone
free system” F5-48.
cannot be connected to the in-vehicle
! Unlocking the phonebook ! Selecting phone equipment, “FAILED” is displayed and
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONE- To select the registered cell phone for the mode changes to the “PHONE
BOOK UNLOCK” menu. connecting to the in-vehicle equipment, SETUP” mode.
perform the following procedure.

– CONTINUED –
5-64 Audio/Hands–free system

! Changing the voice tag of the cell displayed and the mode changes to displayed, a new passkey can be
phone the “PHONE SETUP” mode. entered.
2. Registered cell phones are displayed 2. Input the new passkey by performing
1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” (type A
in the saved order. While displayed, if the one of the following procedures.
audio)/“Change Phone Name” (type B
“TUNE” dial is turned, the next registered – Operate the “TUNE” dial.
audio) menu.
cell phone is displayed. Press the ON – Press the talk switch and say
– If no cell phones are registered, hook button to close the Hands-free
“EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones the passkey.
menu. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
have been paired.” (type B audio) is
displayed and the mode changes to 3. Select a cell phone by performing “Confirm passkey?” (type B audio) menu.
the “PHONE SETUP” mode. either of the following procedures. – The new passkey is displayed, the
– Operate the “TUNE” dial. passkey is changed and the mode
2. Select the cell phone by performing
one of the following procedures. – Press the talk switch . changes to the “PHONE SETUP”
– Operate the “TUNE” dial. 4. After “SELECTED” (type A audio)/ mode.
– Press the talk switch and say “Phone is selected.” (type B audio) is
displayed, you can select the following ! Deleting registered cell phone
the voice tag. from the list
menus.
– Press the talk switch and use
the list phones function (refer to “List . “SELECT PHONE” to connect the 1. Select the “DELETE” (type A audio)/
phones function” F5-64.). selected cell phone “Delete Phone” (type B audio) menu.
3. Register the voice tag. For details, . “CHANGE NAME” (type A audio)/ 2. Select a cell phone to be deleted by
refer to “Preparation for using the Hands- “Change Phone Name” (type B audio) to performing one of the following proce-
free system” F5-48. change the voice tag dures.
. “DELETE” (type A audio)/“Delete – Operate the “TUNE” dial.
! List phones function Phone” (type B audio) to delete the – Press the talk switch and say
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell selected cell phone from the list the voice tag.
phone list are displayed by using the list . “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE – Press the talk switch and use
phones function. SETUP” mode the list phones function.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/
1. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu. “Confirm delete phone?” (type B audio)
! Setting passkey
– If no cell phones are registered, menu.
“EMPTY” (type A audio)/“No Phones 1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. – “DELETED” (type A audio)/“Phone
have been paired.” (type B audio) is – After the currently set passkey is has been deleted.” (type B audio) is
 Audio/Hands–free system 5-65

displayed, the data is deleted and the ! System setup ! Selecting language
mode changes to the “PHONE SET- After selecting the “SYSTEM SETUP” To select the language, perform the
UP” mode. menu, perform the following procedure. following procedure.
You can select the following menus only
! Turning the Hands-free power on/ Type A audio:
by operating the “TUNE” dial.
off (type B audio) 1. Select the “SEL LANGUAGE” menu.
You can turn the Hands-free power on or ! Setting guidance volume 2. Select the desired language by oper-
off. If the Hands-free power is ON, the To set the guidance volume, perform the ating the “TUNE” dial.
registered cell phones are automatically following procedure.
connected to the system when the ignition Type B audio:
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “ON” 1. Select the “GUIDANCE VOL” (type A
position. audio)/“Guidance Volume” (type B audio)
“HD/TEXT” button
menu.
1. Select the “Hands-free Power”/ 2. Set the guidance volume by operating
“Handsfree Power” menu. the “TUNE” dial. 1. Press and hold the “HD/TEXT” button
2. To turn off the Hands-free power when to select “Select Langu” menu.
the Hands-free power is ON, perform ! Initializing the registered data 2. Select the preferred language by
either of the following procedures. To initialize the registered data, perform operating the “TUNE” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say the following procedure.
“Turn off”. ! Device name function (type B
– Select “Turn off” by operating the 1. Select the “INITIALIZE” (type A audio)/ audio)
“TUNE” dial. “Reset Settings” (type B audio) menu.
Select the “Device Name” menu to show
2. Select the “CONFIRM” (type A audio)/ the device name and BD address of the
To turn on the Hands-free power when the “Confirm reset settings?” (type B audio)
Hands-free power is OFF, perform either audio.
menu.
of the following procedures. – “INITIALIZED” (type A audio)/“Set-
– Press the talk switch and say tings have been reset.” (type B audio)
“Turn on”. is displayed, the registered data is
– Select “Turn on” by operating the initialized and the mode changes to
“TUNE” dial. the last mode.
 Interior equipment

Interior light ......................................................... 6-2 Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-12

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Coat hook........................................................... 6-13
Map light............................................................. 6-2 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-14
Cargo area light (Outback)................................... 6-3 Legacy .............................................................. 6-14
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3 Outback ............................................................ 6-14
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 Floor mat ............................................................ 6-14
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4 Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)....... 6-15
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5 Using the cover ................................................. 6-15
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5 To remove the cover housing ............................. 6-16
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6 Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-16
Center console box ............................................. 6-6 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-17 6
Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-8 Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback)............. 6-17
Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-8 Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-18
Cup holder ........................................................... 6-8 Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-18
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-9 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-20
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-9 Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-20
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9 Help line............................................................ 6-21
Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-10
6-2 Interior equipment/Interior light

Interior light DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- & Map light
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate
CAUTION (Outback) is opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are un-
When leaving your vehicle, make locked using the keyless access function
sure the lights are turned off to (if equipped). Refer to “Locking and
avoid battery discharge. unlocking with “keyless access” entry
function” F2-13.
. The doors or the rear gate (Outback)
& Dome light are unlocked using the remote keyless
entry system. Refer to “Remote keyless
entry system” F2-19.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- To turn on the map light, press the switch.
tion. To turn it off, press the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.

1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions:
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
 Interior equipment/Interior light 6-3

! Door interlock switch do not illuminate when only the rear gate following positions.
is opened. DOOR: The light illuminates only when
. The doors are unlocked using the the rear gate is opened.
keyless access function (if equipped). OFF: The light remains off.
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with ON: The light remains on continuously.
“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.
. The doors are unlocked using the & OFF delay timer
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-19. The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- . dome light
tion. . map light
. cargo area light (Outback)
& Cargo area light (Outback) After being illuminated automatically,
1) Door interlock switch
these lights remain on for several seconds
Although the map light switches are in the and then gradually turn off under the
OFF position (manually off), the map lights following conditions.
can be set to illuminate automatically in . after all doors and the rear gate (Out-
conjunction with a door opening, etc. by back) are closed (dome light)
use of the door interlock switch. The door . after all doors are closed (map light)
interlock switch has the following posi- . after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
tions. light)
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate While the lights are illuminated, if any of
automatically in conjunction with a door the following operations are performed,
opening. But, the lights can be turned on the lights turn off immediately.
manually by pressing the map light
switches. . The ignition switch is turned from the
1) DOOR “LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “Acc” or
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto- 2) OFF “ON” position.
matically in the following cases. 3) ON
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
. Any of the doors (other than the rear are locked using the keyless access
The cargo area light switch has the
gate or trunk lid) is opened. The map lights
– CONTINUED –
6-4 Interior equipment/Sun visors

function (if equipped). Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the remote keyless entry
system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without EyeSight system

To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.

Models with EyeSight system

With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
 Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-5

the gap between the sun visor and center & Vanity mirror with light Storage compartment
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you CAUTION
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it CAUTION
toward the front of the vehicle. Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com-
being blinded by glare. partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.

CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
with the sun visor positioned over sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
the windshield. The extension plate The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
would obstruct your view of the nate when the mirror cover is opened.
rearview mirror.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.

– CONTINUED –
6-6 Interior equipment/Storage compartment

& Glove box & Center console box To use as storage space:
! Center console box (front)

1) Lock Pull out the divider plate of the dual cup

2) Unlock holder.
If you remove the divider plate from the
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To dual cup holders, you can use the center
close it, push the lid firmly upward. console box as a storage space.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, use the me-
chanical key to lock or unlock the glove
box. For details, refer to “Keyless access
with push-button start system (Outback –
if equipped)” F2-9.
 Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-7

To use again as cup holders: ment and a lower compartment. ! Lower compartment
! Upper compartment

Insert the divider plate into the console 1) Lower compartment lock release
box.
1) Upper compartment lock release Pull up the lower compartment lock
! Center console box (rear) release to open the lower compartment.
Pull up the upper compartment lock
release to open the upper compartment.

The center console box has a two-layer

structure consisting of an upper compart-
– CONTINUED –
6-8 Interior equipment/Cup holder

& Overhead console (if & Pocket (if equipped) Cup holder
equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you
and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage up-
holstery or carpets.
To open the console, push on the lid lightly CAUTION
and it will automatically open.
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
CAUTION or leave a lighted cigarette in the
pocket. This could cause a fire.
When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of To use the pocket, open the lid.
the overhead console heats up.
Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
 Interior equipment/Bottle holders 6-9

& Front passenger’s cup holder CAUTION Bottle holders

When a cup containing a beverage
is in the cup holder, do not fold CAUTION
down or recline any seat. Otherwise,
the beverage could spill while driv- . Do not pick up a bottle from the
ing and, if the beverage is hot, it bottle holder or put a bottle in the
could burn you and/or your passen- holder while you are driving, as
gers. this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
The dual cup holder is built into the center the door or while driving and, if
console. the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder

The bottle holder equipped on each door

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
– CONTINUED –
6-10 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets

and other items.

Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)

Accessory power outlets are provided

Power outlet below the climate control below the climate control, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
Power outlet in the center console power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets 6-11

CAUTION tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette contact or cause the plug to get
lighter in the accessory power stuck. Only use plugs that fit
outlet. properly.
. Do not place any foreign objects, . Use of an electric appliance in the
especially metal ones such as accessory power outlet for a long
coins or aluminum foil, into the period of time while the engine is
accessory power outlet. That not running can cause battery
could cause a short circuit. Al- discharge.
ways put the cap on the acces- . Before driving your vehicle, make
sory power outlet when it is not sure that the plug and the cord
in use. on your electrical appliance will Upper compartment
. Use only electrical appliances not interfere with your shifting
which are designed for 12V DC. gears and operating the accel-
The maximum power rating of an erator and brake pedals. If they
appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical
is 120W. Do not use an appliance appliance while driving.
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use Lower compartment
double adapters or more than NOTE
one electrical appliance.
When the lid of the center console is
. If the plug on your electric appli- closed, a gap remains between the
ance is either too loose or too center console and the lid to allow the
– CONTINUED –
6-12 Interior equipment/Ashtray

power outlet in the center console to be Ashtray (if equipped)

used. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder. For the locations of the
cigarette butt and start a fire. cup holders, refer to “Cup holder” F6-8.
. Do not put flammable material in When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
the ashtray. ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
 Interior equipment/Coat hook 6-13

Coat hook WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing correct airbag deploy-
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are The coat hook is attached to each rear
no pointed objects in the pockets. passenger’s hand grip.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.

CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
6-14 Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook

Shopping bag hook & Outback Floor mat

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.

& Legacy

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.
CAUTION
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each . Be sure to use a genuine
inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk SUBARU floor mat designed with
lid opening. grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
 Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped) 6-15

. Do not use more than one floor Cargo area cover WARNING
mat. (Outback – if equipped)
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
The cargo area cover is provided for weight on the extended cover can
covering the cargo area and to protect its break it and an object on the cover
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is could tumble forward in the event of
detachable to make room for additional a sudden stop or collision. This
cargo. could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s on the stays could cause leakage
side floor. of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
The floor mat should be properly secured
rear gate open.
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them . When reclining the rear seatback,
downward. move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.

– CONTINUED –
6-16 Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)

& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

1. To open the lid, pull the handle up. 3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
2. Hold down the button on the right-
hand rear quarter panel and lift up the
right-hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.

2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook

(provided on the back of the lid) on the 4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
rear edge of the roof. area end.
 Interior equipment/Convenient tie–down hooks (Outback) 6-17

& To install the cover housing Convenient tie-down hooks storing recesses.
(Outback)

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are

designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

1. Insert both ends of the cover housing

into the retainers.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
2. Make sure to fix the front part of the When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
cargo area cover behind the rear seat. down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
6-18 Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment

Under-floor storage compart- Rear view camera (if

ment equipped)
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the sub-
floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
Legacy
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
Legacy
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.

Outback
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open. Outback
 Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-19

A rear view camera is attached to the may result in accident, fire or different rating may result in a
trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback). electric shock. malfunction.
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the . If the rear view camera is used for
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT a long time while the engine is
CAUTION not operated, the battery may
or CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear . If your vehicle is washed with a become completely discharged.
view image behind the vehicle on the high-pressure washer, do not
audio/navigation monitor or on the inside allow water to contact the camera
mirror depending on the model. NOTE
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con- . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
WARNING densation, malfunction, fire or benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
electric shock. discoloration may occur. To remove
. Since the rear view camera uses contamination, wipe the camera with a
a wide-angle lens, the image on . Since the camera is a precision cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
the monitor is different from the device, do not subject it to strong detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
actual view in terms of distance. impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, dry cloth.
fire or electric shock may occur. . When waxing the vehicle, be careful
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should . If mud or snow sticks to or is not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
always check the rear view and frozen on the camera, you must comes in contact with the camera,
the surrounding area with your be very careful removing it. moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
eyes and mirrors, and move Otherwise, damage done to the neutral detergent to remove the wax.
backward at a slow speed. Mov- camera may cause a fire or . The camera lens has hard coating to
ing backward only by checking electric shock. Pour water or help prevent scratches. However, when
the rear view image from the lukewarm water over the camera washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera could cause an accident. to remove mud and ice, and wipe camera lens, be careful not to scratch
it with a soft, dry cloth. the camera lens. Do not use a washing
. Do not disassemble or modify the
. Do not put a flame close to the brush directly on the camera lens. The
camera, switch or wiring. If
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- monitor screen may be adversely af-
smoke comes out or you smell
mage or fire may occur. fected.
a strange odor, stop using the
. Strong light shined on the camera
rear view camera immediately. . When replacing the fuse, be sure lens may develop white light stripes
Contact your SUBARU dealer to use a fuse with the specified around the light source. This is not a
for an inspection. Continued use rating. Use of a fuse with a
– CONTINUED –
6-20 Interior equipment/Rear view camera

malfunction. . It may be difficult to see the image of & Viewing range on the screen
. Under fluorescent lighting, the dis- the rearview camera in the following
play may flicker. However, this is not a cases. This is not a malfunction of the
malfunction. camera.
. The image of the rear view camera – The vehicle is in a dark place (at
may be slightly different from the night, in a tunnel, etc.).
actual color of the objects. – The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
& How to use the rear view – An object (such as raindrops,
camera snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
When the shift lever or select lever is set
to the lens of the camera.
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the – Strong light shined directly on
vehicle. When the lever is set to other the camera lens (occasionally, there
positions, the image before setting to “R” are vertical lines on the screen). Range of view
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.

NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, the image
of the rear view camera has priority
over other screen displays. To operate
other screens, set the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT and CVT
models) to a position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera is Range of view
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
 Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-21

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.

& Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle
Image from camera Range of view width line) is a guide to help you realize
The area from the rear end of the bumper the actual distance from the screen.
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.

CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be Help lines displayed on the audio/naviga-
tion monitor
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

– CONTINUED –
6-22 Interior equipment/Rear view camera

CAUTION ! When there is an upward slope at

the back
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
Help lines displayed on the inside mirror when the vehicle is inclined
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) against the road, the indication
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper is different from the actual posi-
(green horizontal line) 1) 3 feet (1 m)
tion.
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper The distance on the screen looks farther
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper ! Difference between screen and ac- than the actual distance.
(yellow horizontal line) tual road
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line) The distance markers show the distance
6) Vehicle centerline for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
When the shift lever or select lever is set distance depending on the loading condi-
to position “R”, the monitor screen dis- tions or road conditions.
plays the help lines together with the rear
view image.
 Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-23

! When there is a downward slope ! Feature of distance marker

at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
 Starting and operating

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Remote transmitter program (models without

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 “keyless access with push-button start
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4 system”).......................................................... 7-18
System maintenance.......................................... 7-19
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7
Manual transmission ......................................... 7-21
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8
Selecting reverse gear ....................................... 7-21
Starting and stopping the engine (models Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-21
without push-button ignition switch) .............. 7-8 Driving tips........................................................ 7-22
Starting engine.................................................... 7-8
Automatic transmission/Continuously
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-10
variable transmission ..................................... 7-23
Starting and stopping engine (models with Select lever ....................................................... 7-24
push-button start system) .............................. 7-11 Shift lock function ............................................. 7-25
Safety precautions ............................................. 7-11
Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-27
Operating range for push-button start
Driving tips........................................................ 7-28
7
system............................................................. 7-11
Starting engine................................................... 7-11 Power steering................................................... 7-29
Stopping engine ................................................. 7-12 Braking ............................................................... 7-29
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-13 Braking tips....................................................... 7-29
Remote engine start system (dealer Brake system .................................................... 7-29
option).............................................................. 7-13 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-30
Models with “keyless access with push-button ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-30
start system” ................................................... 7-14 ABS self-check .................................................. 7-31
Models without “keyless access with push-button ABS warning light.............................................. 7-31
start system” ................................................... 7-15 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote system ............................................................. 7-31
start................................................................. 7-17 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-31
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-32
shutdown......................................................... 7-18
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-34
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-18 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-34
Service mode (models without “keyless access Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
with push-button start system”)........................ 7-18 equipped) ........................................................ 7-35
Starting and operating

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-37 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-43
Electronic parking brake..................................... 7-37 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-43
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-41 To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-44
Cruise control..................................................... 7-41 Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-45
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-42 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-45
 Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3

Fuel ! Unleaded gasoline caused by the type of fuel used, repairs

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed may not be covered by your warranty.
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler ! MMT
CAUTION nozzle. Under no circumstances should Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
leaded gasoline be used because it will hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
Use of a fuel which is low in quality damage the emission control system and clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
or use of an inappropriate fuel may impair driveability and fuel economy. you use such fuels, your emission control
additive may cause engine damage.
! California fuel system performance may deteriorate and
If your vehicle was certified to California the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
& Fuel requirements Emission Standards as indicated on the function indicator light may turn on. If this
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to happens, return to your authorized
The engine is designed to operate using SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating optimize engine and emission control
system performance with gasoline that determined that the condition is caused
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
! Fuel octane rating fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in be covered by your warranty.
This octane rating is the average of the any other state than California, your ! Gasoline for cleaner air
Research Octane and Motor Octane vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
numbers and is commonly referred to as Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- CAUTION
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). side California is permitted to have higher
Using a gasoline with a lower octane sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
rating can cause persistent and heavy mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
knocking, which can damage the engine. and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or taining alcohol may cause paint
Do not be concerned if your vehicle smell. SUBARU recommends that you try damage, which is not covered under
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive a different brand of unleaded gasoline the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your having lower sulfur to determine if the
dealer or a qualified service technician if problem is fuel related before returning Your use of gasoline with detergent
you use a fuel with the specified octane your vehicle to an authorized dealer for additives will help prevent deposits from
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or service. The CHECK ENGINE warning forming in your engine and fuel system.
persistently. light/malfunction indicator light may also This helps keep your engine in tune and
turn on. If this occurs, return to your your emission control system working
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis. properly, and is a way of doing your part
If it is determined that the condition is for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
– CONTINUED –
7-4 Starting and operating/Fuel

high quality fuel with the proper detergent suited for your vehicle as explained in the Be sure to observe any other precautions
and other additives, you should never following. that are posted at the service station.
need to add any fuel system cleaning . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
agents to your fuel tank. octane rating no lower than that specified
Many gasolines are now blended with in this manual.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE Methanol can be used in your vehicle
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in mixture AND if it is accompanied by
your vehicle, but should contain no more sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
proper operation of your SUBARU. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
Do not use any gasoline that contains under these conditions.
more than 10% ethanol, including from . If undesirable driveability problems are 1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 experienced and you suspect they may be release lever up. The lever is on the floor
(which are only some examples of fuel fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- at the left of the driver’s seat.
containing more than 10% ethanol). line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, & Fuel filler lid and cap
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter- ! Refueling
gents and oxygenates and if they have Only one person should be involved in
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- refueling. Do not allow others to approach
sions. the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
As additional guidance, only use fuels pipe while refueling is in progress. 2. Open the fuel filler lid.
 Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5

WARNING slowly counterclockwise.

Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING

first touch the vehicle body or a
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
metal portion of the fuel pump or
mable. Before refueling, always
similar object to discharge any
first stop the engine and close all
static electricity that may be present
vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry-
Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark
or electrical sparks in the adja-
could ignite the fuel, which could
cent area. Refueling must be
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
performed outside. Quickly wipe
static electric charge, do not get
up any spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling 4. Hook the cord that is attached to the
is in progress. . When opening the cap, grasp it fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
firmly and turn it slowly to the filler lid.
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pres- WARNING
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot . When refueling, insert the fuel
weather. If you hear a hissing nozzle securely into the fuel filler
sound while you are removing pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
the cap, wait for the sound to fully inserted, its automatic stop-
stop and then slowly open the ping mechanism may not func-
cap to prevent fuel from spraying tion, causing fuel to overflow the
out and creating a fire hazard. tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
1) Open tinue to add fuel, temperature
2) Close changes or other conditions
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it may cause fuel to overflow from

– CONTINUED –
7-6 Starting and operating/Fuel

the tank and create a fire hazard. NOTE mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler right until it clicks to ensure that
pump automatically turns off. Do not add it is fully tightened. If the cap is
any more fuel. not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
CAUTION driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
Make sure that the cap is tightened
creating a fire hazard.
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident. . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise fuel may damage the paint, be
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
not to catch the tether under the cap while quickly. Paint damage caused by
tightening. spilled fuel is not covered under
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If
you spill any fuel on the painted surface, gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the
painted surface could be damaged. the vehicle. wrong cap, it may not fit, and
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened your fuel tank and emission con-
until it clicks or if the tether is caught trol system may be damaged. It
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE could also lead to fuel spillage
warning light/malfunction indicator and a fire.
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
whenever the low fuel warning
dicator light” F3-16.
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank
CAUTION could cause damage to the en-
gine.
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
 Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
only) system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is
test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to a burned out bulb) or
WARNING your vehicle’s registration. there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model that monitors the performance of the . A state emission inspection may reject
must NEVER be performed on a engine’s emission control system. Certi- (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
single two-wheel dynamometer. At- fied emission inspectors will inspect the OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
tempting to do so will result in On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as READY” is greater than one. If the
uncontrolled vehicle movement and part of the state emission inspection vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
may cause an accident or injuries to process. The OBDII system is designed placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
persons nearby. to detect engine and transmission pro- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- not ready for the emission test. Under this
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII condition, the vehicle driver should be
CAUTION inspections apply to all 1996 model year instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
and newer passenger cars and trucks. days to reset the readiness monitors and
. At state inspection time, remem- return for an emission re-inspection.
ber to tell your inspection or Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspec- . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
service station in advance not to should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle tion of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system service.
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission consists of a visual operational check of Some states still use dynamometers in
damage will result. the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- their emission inspection program. A
function indicator light (MIL) and an dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
. Resultant vehicle damage due to examination of the OBDII system with an
improper testing is not covered testing device that allows your vehicle’s
electronic scan tool. wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of . A vehicle passes the OBDII system one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
the state inspection program or inspection if proper operation of the on a dynamometer, tell your emission
its contractors or licensees. “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob- inspector not to place your SUBARU
served, there are no stored diagnostic AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
California and a number of federal states trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
monitors are all complete. sion damage will result.
– CONTINUED –
7-8 Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

The U.S. Environmental Protection Preparing to drive Starting and stopping the
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
engine (models without
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
You should perform the following checks push-button ignition switch)
and adjustments every day before you
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
start driving. & Starting engine
dynamometer. There are some states that 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
use four-wheel dynamometers in their lights are clean and unobstructed. CAUTION
testing program. When properly used, this 2. Check the appearance and condition
equipment should not damage a SUBARU of the tires. Also check tires for proper Do not operate the starter motor
AWD vehicle. inflation. continuously for more than 10 sec-
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of onds. If the engine fails to start after
Under no circumstances should the rear leaks. operating the starter for 5 to 10
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
should the driveshaft be disconnected for more before trying again.
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
state emission testing.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
! General precautions when starting
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
engine
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
WARNING
8. Check the operation of the warning . Never start the engine from out-
and indicator lights when the ignition side the vehicle. It may result in
switch is turned to the “ON” position. an accident.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- . Do not leave the engine running
ing lights after starting the engine. in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
NOTE The exhaust gas may enter the
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, vehicle or indoors, and it may
washer fluid and other fluid levels result in carbon monoxide poi-
should be checked daily, weekly or at soning.
fuel stops. . Do not start the engine near dry
 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch) 7-9

foliage, paper, or other flam- . On rare occasions, transient knock- (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
mable substances. The exhaust ing may be heard from the engine when “LOCK” position and wait for at least
pipe and exhaust emissions can the accelerator is operated rapidly 10 seconds. After checking that the
create a fire hazard at high such as a rapid start-up and a rapid parking brake is applied, turn the
temperatures. acceleration. This is not a malfunction. ignition switch to the “START” position
. The engine starts more easily when while depressing the accelerator pedal
the headlights, air conditioner and rear slightly (approximately a quarter of the
CAUTION window defogger are turned off. full stroke). Release the accelerator
. After the engine starts, the engine pedal as soon as the engine starts.
. If the engine is stopped during speed will be kept high until the engine (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
driving, the catalyst may over- has warmed up sufficiently. the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
heat and burn. position and wait for at least 10
. When starting the engine, be sure ! MT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
to sit in the driver’s seat (except 1. Apply the parking brake. erator pedal and turn the ignition
when using the remote engine 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- switch to the “START” position. If the
start system). cessories. engine starts, quickly release the
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor accelerator pedal.
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold (3) If this does not start the engine,
NOTE turn the ignition switch again to the
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- the engine. The starter motor will only “LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
eration immediately after the engine operate when the clutch pedal is de- seconds or longer, turn the ignition
has started. pressed fully to the floor. switch to the “START” position without
. For a short time after the engine has depressing the accelerator pedal.
started, the engine speed is kept high. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
When the warm-up is completed, the contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
engine speed lowers automatically. warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12. for assistance.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
to start the engine depending on the 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
fuel and the usage condition (repeated started. The fuel injection system auto-
driving of a distance in which the tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently). engine warms up.
In such a case, it is recommended that If the engine does not start, perform the
you change to a different brand of fuel. following procedure.
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch)

! AT and CVT models ignition switch to the “START” position & Stopping the engine
while depressing the accelerator pedal
CAUTION slightly (approximately a quarter of the WARNING
full stroke). Release the accelerator
If you restart the engine while the Do not stop the engine when the
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
vehicle is moving, shift the select vehicle is moving. This will cause
lever into the “N” position. Do not (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” loss of power to the power steering
attempt to place the select lever of a and the brake booster, making steer-
moving vehicle into the “P” posi- position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- ing and braking more difficult. It
tion. could also result in accidental acti-
erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the vation of the “LOCK” position on the
1. Apply the parking brake. ignition switch, causing the steering
engine starts, quickly release the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- accelerator pedal. wheel to lock.
cessories. (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” The ignition switch should be turned off
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position (preferably “P” position). The only when the vehicle is stopped and the
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
starter will only operate when the select engine is idling.
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
lever is at the “P” or “N” position. “START” position without depressing
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal.
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12. for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
If the engine does not start, perform the engine warms up.
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
“LOCK” position and wait for at least sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
parking brake is applied, turn the applied.
 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system) 7-11

Starting and stopping engine CAUTION the brake pedal, the engine starter
operates for a maximum of 10 seconds
(models with push-button and after starting the engine, the starter
. When the operation indicator on
start system) the push-button ignition switch is stops automatically.
flashing in orange, there may be . When the push-button ignition
& Safety precautions a malfunction with the vehicle. switch is pressed while depressing
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11. Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- the brake pedal, the engine can be
diately. started regardless of the power status.
& Operating range for push- . If the indicator on the push- . If the security indicator light illumi-
button start system button ignition switch is flashing nates when you attempt to start the
Refer to “Operating range for push-button in green after the engine has engine but the engine does not start,
start system” F3-5. started, it means that the steering press the push-button ignition switch
is still locked. While moving the to switch the power to “OFF” and then
try to start the engine again.
& Starting engine steering wheel right and left,
. If the engine does not start, press
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition the push-button ignition switch without
WARNING depressing the brake pedal to switch
switch.
the power to “OFF”. Then, while de-
. There are some general precau- . Do not continue pushing the pressing the brake pedal more force-
tions when starting the engine. push-button ignition switch for fully, press the push-button ignition
Carefully read the precautions more than 10 seconds. Doing so switch.
described in “General precau- could cause a malfunction. If the . The engine start procedures may
tions when starting engine” F7- engine does not start, stop push- not function depending on the radio
8. ing the push-button ignition wave conditions around the vehicle. In
. If the indicator on the push- switch and turn off the engine. such a case, refer to “Starting engine”
button ignition switch flashes in Wait 10 seconds, and then push F9-21.
green after the engine has the push-button ignition switch . If the vehicle battery is discharged,
started, never drive the vehicle. to start the engine. the steering cannot be unlocked.
The steering is still locked, and it Charge the battery.
may result in an accident.
NOTE
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

indicator does not turn green. & Stopping engine

5. While depressing the brake pedal, 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
press the push-button ignition switch.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
NOTE 3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
. While pressing the select lever but- The engine will stop, and the power will be
ton in, the indicator on the push-button switched off.
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position. WARNING
. In case the engine does not start by
. Do not touch the push-button
the normal engine start procedure,
ignition switch during driving.
1) Operation indicator move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “Acc”. When the push-button ignition
2) Push-button ignition switch
Depress the brake pedal, and press the switch is operated as follows,
When the push-button ignition switch is the engine will stop.
pressed while depressing the brake pedal, push-button ignition switch for at least
the engine will start. The starting proce- 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only – The switch is pressed and held
dure for the engine is as follows. use this engine start procedure in case for 3 seconds or longer.
of emergency. – The switch is pressed briefly 3
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the . When the engine is not started, the times or more in succession.
driver’s seat. brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more When the engine stops, the brake
2. Apply the parking brake.
forcefully than usual. Check that the booster will not function. A great-
3. Shift the select lever into the “P” er foot pressure will be required
position. The engine can also start when operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press on the brake pedal.
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the the push-button ignition switch to start The power steering system will
“P” position. the engine. not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
and it may result in an accident.
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting . If the engine stops during driving,
with the select lever in the “N” position, the do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-13

doors until the vehicle is stopped Remote engine start system you to start the engine from outside the
in a safe location. It is dangerous vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
(dealer option) start system can activate the heater or air
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a conditioner, providing you with a comfor-
safe place, and contact a WARNING table cabin upon entry.
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. There are some general precau- NOTE
tions when starting the engine. The length of time for which it is
CAUTION Carefully read the precautions acceptable to allow the engine to
described in “General precau- remain idling may be bound by local
. Do not stop the engine while the tions when starting engine” F7- laws and regulations. Check the local
select lever is in a position other 8. rules when using the remote engine
than the “P” position. start system.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
. If the engine is stopped while the an enclosed environment (e.g.
select lever is in a position other closed garage). Prolonged opera-
than the “P” position, the power tion of a motor vehicle in an
will be in “Acc”. If the vehicle is enclosed environment can cause
left in this condition, the battery a harmful build-up of Carbon
may be discharged. Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
NOTE ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
Although you can stop the engine by ness or in extreme cases uncon-
operating the push-button ignition sciousness and/or death.
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency. . Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
& When access key does not the remote engine start system in
operate properly service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
Refer to “Access key – if access key does ing the engine.
not operate properly” F9-20.
The remote engine start system allows
– CONTINUED –
7-14 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

& Models with “keyless access . The select lever is in the “P” position. ! Automatic engine shutdown
with push-button start sys- . All doors including the rear gate are The remote engine start system will
tem” closed. automatically shut down or will not start
. The engine hood is closed. the engine under the following conditions.
NOTE
. The push-button ignition switch is in the . The total run-time has exceeded 20
For more details, refer to the Owner’s “OFF” position. minutes.
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system. ! When starting the engine . Any door or the rear gate is opened.
To start the engine with remote engine . The select lever is moved to any
start system, briefly press the lock button position other than “P”.
twice within 2 seconds, then press and . The engine hood is opened.
hold the lock button for 3 seconds. . The push-button ignition switch is
pressed.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once . The brake pedal is depressed.
and the keyless buzzer chirps once. . The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock more.
button briefly again. The hazard warning The time until the engine automatically
flashers then flash once again, and the stops differs according to the setting.
keyless buzzer chirps once again.
To change the time until the engine
3. After step 2, immediately press and automatically stops, contact your
Access key hold the lock button. The hazard warning SUBARU dealer. However, local laws
1) Lock button flashers then flash three times, and the and regulations may prohibit changing
horn will honk once. this time.
An access key can be used as the remote 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
engine start transmitter. Operate the lock release the lock button. The engine will
button to start or stop the engine as then start successfully.
follows.
! Before starting the engine ! When stopping the engine
Before using the remote engine start Press and hold the lock button to stop the
system to start the engine, confirm the engine with remote engine start system.
following conditions.
 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-15

& Models without “keyless ac- honk the horn and flash the side marker state.
cess with push-button start lights, tail lights and parking lights once. *: Provided that the remote engine start
system” The system will check certain precondi- transmitter is within the operating range of
tions before starting, and if all safety the system.
parameters are correct, the engine will
! Remote start safety features
start within 5 seconds. Upon successful
engine start, the remote start confirmation For safety and security reasons, the
transmitter button will flash twice every 5 system will fail to start and honk the horn
seconds* and the vehicle will honk the twice or shut down the engine during
horn and flash the side marker lights, tail remote start operation if any of the
lights and the parking lights once, then the following occur:
lights will illuminate and remain illumi- . Any of the doors or the rear gate are
nated, indicating that the engine is run- open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
ning. While the vehicle is operating via the honk six times and the side marker lights,
remote engine start function, the power tail lights and the parking lights will flash
window features will be disabled. Also, the six times indicating that a vehicle door or
system has a timer and will shut down rear gate was open when the remote
! Starting your vehicle after 15 minutes if you do not operate the engine start system was activated).
vehicle. Press and hold the “ ” button for . The brake pedal is depressed
NOTE 2 seconds to turn the engine off. The . The key was already in the ignition
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and remote start confirmation transmitter but- switch
rear gate must be closed prior to ton will flash three times* indicating that
activating the remote engine start sys- . The engine hood is opened
the engine has shut down. If the starter
tem. Any open entry point will prevent . The remote start system “Service
cranks but does not start or starts and
starting or cause the system to shut mode” is engaged
stalls, the remote engine start system will
down. power off and then attempt to start the . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
engine an additional three times unless reached a level over 3,500 RPM
The remote engine start function is acti-
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice the remote engine start system deter- . The alarm is triggered by opening a
within 3 seconds on your remote engine mines that a vehicle malfunction is pre- door or the rear gate.
start transmitter. Upon successful activa- venting the system from starting. If the . The select lever is not in the “P”
tion the remote start confirming transmitter engine does not start after additional position (AT and CVT models)
button will flash once* and the vehicle will attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate
– CONTINUED –
7-16 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

In addition to the items above, if the are outlined in the following chart.
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk
three times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine start activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing twice
approximately every 2 seconds), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine start activa-
tion (the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing once
approximately every 3 seconds), the
alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start confirmation trans-
mitter feature
Your remote engine start transmitter is
equipped with a unique bidirectional con-
firmation feature. This feature will allow
the transmitter’s backlit button to display
the status of the system under the condi-
tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
Typical transmitter button flash sequences
 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-17

Transmitter flash sequence Feature description

& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
Flashes when button is Indicates that the system is transmitting an RF signal.
pressed 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or
Two long flashes following re- Indicates that the transmitter did not receive the remote start
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
mote start activation (transmit- activation confirmation from the vehicle system. The transmitter
ter button is pressed two times will automatically send one additional remote start activation
attempt. This usually occurs when the operational range is at its
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
within 3 seconds) limit or has been exceeded. the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
One flash following remote Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the to activating the remote engine start
start activation (transmitter transmitter is moved outside of the operating range of the
button is pressed two times system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute system) and the engine will turn off.
within 3 seconds) vehicle run cycle. Perform either of the following procedures
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the to disarm the alarm system. Refer to
transmitter is removed outside of the operating range of the “Alarm system” F2-25.
2 flashes every 5 seconds system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute . Insert the key into the ignition switch
vehicle run cycle. and turn it to the “ON” position (models
Indicates that the engine has turned off due to a remote start without “keyless access with push-
3 flashes system 15-minute timeout, vehicle safety parameter or normal button start system”)
shutdown.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “Acc” or “ON” position (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”)
. Press any button on the access key/
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or rear gate is opened.

– CONTINUED –
7-18 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

4. For models without “keyless access Models without automatic climate con- indicate that the service mode has been
with push-button start system”, insert the trol system: engaged or honk one time to indicate that
key into the ignition switch and turn to the Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- the service mode has been disengaged.
“START” position to restart the engine. For perature controls to the desired setting
models with “keyless access with push- and operation. After the system starts the NOTE
button start system”, press the push- engine, the heater or air conditioning will
button ignition switch while depressing When taking your vehicle in for service,
activate and heat or cool the interior to it is recommended that you inform the
the brake pedal to restart the engine. your setting. service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
& Entering the vehicle follow- & Service mode (models with- system.
ing remote engine start shut- out “keyless access with
down push-button start system”) & Remote transmitter program
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is In service mode, the remote engine start (models without “keyless ac-
opened by the remote keyless entry function is temporarily disabled to prevent cess with push-button start
system/keyless access function within a the system from unexpectedly starting the system”)
few seconds immediately following remote engine while being serviced. New transmitters can be programmed to
engine start shutdown. the remote engine start system in the
To engage or disengage service mode:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling damaged or additional transmitters are
the interior of the vehicle doors and the rear gate.
desired (the system will accept up to eight
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P” transmitters). New remote engine start
Models with automatic climate control position (AT and CVT models)
system: transmitters can be programmed accord-
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal ing to the following procedure.
After the system starts the engine, the
automatic climate control system will 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
activate the “FULL AUTO” mode and heat door must remain opened throughout the
or cool the interior to the predetermined 5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter “ ” button three times. entire process).
median (room) temperature. No pre-
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
setting of controls is necessary.
each time the button is pressed. 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
6. The system will pause for 1 second “LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, back
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to to “ON” then “LOCK”, then back to “ON” a
fourth time and leave the ignition “ON”
 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-19

throughout the programming process. prior to activating the remote engine For models with “keyless access with
4. The system will flash the side marker start system. This is required to allow push-button start system:
lights, tail lights and parking lights and the vehicle electronic systems to re- Perform the procedure described in “Re-
honk the horn three times, indicating that synchronize. placing battery of access key” F11-54.
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode. ! Changing the batteries For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system:
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
CAUTION The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine
6. The system will flash the side marker . Do not let dust, oil or water get on start transmitter should last approximately
lights, tail lights and parking lights and or in the remote engine start one year, depending on usage. When the
honk the horn one time, indicating that the transmitter when replacing the batteries begin to weaken, you will notice
system has learned the transmitter. Upon battery. a decrease in range (distance from the
successful programming, the remote start . Be careful not to damage the vehicle that your remote control operates).
confirmation transmitter button will flash printed circuit board in the re- Follow the instructions below to change
one time. mote engine start transmitter the remote engine start transmitter bat-
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional when replacing the battery. teries.
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters). . Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
8. The system will exit the transmitter
moved parts; children could
learn mode if the key is turned to the
swallow them.
“LOCK” position, the door is closed or
after 2 minutes. . There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
& System maintenance is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
NOTE tery.
For models without “keyless access . Batteries should not be exposed
with push-button start system”: to excessive heat such as sun-
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is shine, fire or the like.
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle 1. Remove the small Phillips type screw
a minimum of one time using the key located on the back side lower left corner

– CONTINUED –
7-20 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

of the transmitter. batteries and replace with new ones. Be ments and void user’s authority to
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start sure to observe the (+) sign on the old operate the device.
transmitter halves apart using a small flat- batteries before removing them to ensure
head screwdriver. that the new batteries are inserted prop-
erly (battery “+” should be pointed away
from the transmitter circuit board on both
batteries).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the Phillips type screw
and test the remote engine start system.

NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF expo-
sure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
3. Remove the circuit board from the or the device could result in the device
bottom half of the case and remove the exceeding the RF exposure require-
 Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-21

Manual transmission

WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., The manual transmission is a full synchro- 1) Slider
release the clutch pedal) sud- mesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-reverse- You must raise the slider and hold it in that
denly when starting the vehicle. speed transmission. position before you can move the shift
By doing so the vehicle might The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever to the “R” position.
unexpectedly accelerate or the lever knob.
transmission could malfunction. To change gears, fully depress the clutch
& Selecting reverse gear pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
CAUTION If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
Shift into reverse ONLY when the pedal momentarily, and then try again.
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis- & Shifting speeds
sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving. ! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
– CONTINUED –
7-22 Starting and operating/Manual transmission

enter the red area if these speeds are transmission components.

Shift up mph (km/h)
exceeded.
1st to 2nd 15 (24) When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
With the exception of cases where sudden speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) acceleration is required, the vehicle or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
should not be driven with the tachometer’s lower gear before the engine starts to
needle inside the red area. Failure to labor.
4th to 5th 45 (72) observe this precaution can lead to
5th to 6th 50 (80) excessive engine wear and poor fuel On steep downgrades, downshift the
economy. transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
! Maximum allowable speeds mph (km/h) as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
Gear Legacy Outback speed and to extend brake pad life.
WARNING 1st 30 (48) 29 (48) In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
When shifting down a gear, ensure 2nd 53 (85) 53 (85) the brakes while descending a hill, they
that the vehicle is not travelling at a 3rd 79 (128) 79 (128) may overheat and not work properly.
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- 4th
lowable Speed for the gear which is The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
5th Legal speed limit when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
about to be selected. Failure to (Posted limit speed)
observe this precaution can lead to 6th
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
engine over-revving and this in turn phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
can result in engine damage. NOTE
In addition, sudden application of Never exceed posted speed limits.
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can & Driving tips
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- Do not drive with your foot resting on the
quence, control of the vehicle may clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
be lost and the risk of an accident hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
increased. upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
The following table shows the maximum
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
speeds that are possible with each differ-
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will
 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission 7-23

Automatic transmission/Con- than 5 seconds in any position mal timing after the engine has warmed
except the “N” or “P” position up.
tinuously variable transmis- . Immediately after transmission fluid
when the brake is applied or
sion when chocks are used in the is replaced, you may feel that the
wheels. This may cause the transmission operation is somewhat
The automatic transmission is electroni- transmission fluid to overheat. unusual. This results from invalidation
cally controlled and provides 5 forward . Avoid shifting from one of the of data which the on-board computer
speeds and 1 reverse speed. The con- forward driving positions into the has collected and stored in memory to
tinuously variable transmission is electro- “R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the
nically controlled and provides an infinite the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current
number of forward speeds and 1 reverse stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
speed. cause damage to the transmis- shifting will be restored as the vehicle
Both the automatic transmission and sion. continues to be driven for a while.
continuously variable transmission have . When driving a vehicle that is
a manual mode. . When parking the vehicle, first equipped with CVT under continuous
securely apply the parking brake heavy load conditions such as towing a
WARNING and then place the select lever in camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the “P” position. Avoid parking the engine speed or the vehicle speed
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select may automatically be reduced. This is
position into the “D” or “R” position lever in any other position as not a malfunction. This phenomenon
while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead results from the engine control func-
pedal. This may cause the vehicle battery. tion maintaining the cooling perfor-
to lurch forward or backward. mance of the vehicle. The engine and
NOTE vehicle speed will return to a normal
speed when the engine is able to
CAUTION . For AT models, when the engine maintain the optimum cooling perfor-
coolant temperature is still low, the mance after the heavy load decreases.
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position transmission will upshift to higher
only after the vehicle is comple- Driving under a heavy load must be
engine speeds than when the coolant performed with extreme care. Do not
tely stopped. Shifting while the temperature is sufficiently high in order
vehicle is moving may cause try to pass a vehicle in front when
to shorten the warm-up time and driving on an uphill slope while towing.
damage to the transmission. improve driveability. The gearshift tim- . The continuously variable transmis-
. Do not race the engine for more ing will automatically shift to the nor- sion is a chain type system that
– CONTINUED –
7-24 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission

provides superior transmission effi- ! P (Park)

ciency for maximum fuel economy. At This position is for parking the vehicle and
times, depending on varying driving starting the engine.
conditions, a chain operating noise
In this position, the transmission is me-
may be heard that is characteristic of
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
this type of system.
from rolling freely.
& Select lever When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift other position, you should depress the
while pressing the select lever button brake pedal fully then move the select
in lever. This prevents the vehicle from
: Shift while pressing the select lever lurching when it is started.
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever ! R (Reverse)
button This position is for backing the vehicle.
The select lever has four positions, “P”, To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate the vehicle completely then move the
1) Select lever button for using the manual mode. lever to the “R” position.
NOTE ! N (Neutral)
For some models, to protect the engine This position is for restarting a stalled
while the select lever is in the “P” or engine.
“N” position, the engine is controlled In this position the wheels and transmis-
so that the engine speed may not sion are not locked. In this position, the
become too high even if the accelerator transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
pedal is depressed hard. freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission
 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission 7-25

neutral. transmission will automatically downshift. & Shift lock function

During coasting, there is no engine brak- When you release the pedal, the transmis- The shift lock function helps prevent the
ing effect. sion will return to the original gear posi- improper operation of the select lever.
tion.
NOTE . The select lever cannot be operated
To use the manual mode, move the lever unless the ignition switch is turned to the
If the select lever is in the “N” position from this position into the manual gate. “ON” position and the brake pedal is
when you stop the engine for parking,
NOTE (AT models only) depressed.
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd may . The select lever cannot be moved from
this happens, turn the ignition switch to occur even when driving on a level the “P” position to any other position
the “ON” position. You will then be able road depending on conditions, such as before the brake pedal is depressed.
to move the select lever to the “P” how hard you depress the brake pedal. Depress the brake pedal first, and then
position. operate the select lever.
! While climbing a grade . Only the “P” position allows you to turn
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is the key from the “Acc” position to the
WARNING
prevented from taking place when the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove the
Do not drive the vehicle with the accelerator is released. This minimizes key from the ignition key cylinder.
select lever in the “N” (neutral) the chance of subsequent downshifting to . If the ignition switch is turned to the
position. Engine braking has no a lower gear when accelerating again. “LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
effect in this condition and the risk This prevents repeated upshifting and lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
of an accident is consequently in- downshifting resulting in a smoother op- may not be moved to the “P” position after
creased. eration of the vehicle. a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
NOTE brake pedal depressed soon after the
! D (Drive)
The transmission may downshift, de- ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
This position is for normal driving. The pending on the way the accelerator “OFF” position.
transmission automatically shifts into a pedal is depressed to accelerate the
suitable gear according to the vehicle vehicle again. ! Shift lock release
speed and the acceleration you require.
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
When more acceleration is required in this the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position, depress the accelerator pedal position then move the select lever to the
fully to the floor and hold that position. The “P” position with the select lever button

– CONTINUED –
7-26 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission

pressed and brake pedal depressed. ! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform Perform the following procedure to release
the following steps. the shift lock.
. When the select lever cannot be 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
shifted from “P” to “N”: engine.
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-26.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “Acc” position, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the 3. While depressing the brake pedal,
select lever button pressed and brake insert the electronic parking brake release
pedal depressed. tool into the hole, press the shift lock
release button using the tool, and then
If you must perform the above procedure, move the select lever.
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon 2. Remove the shift lock cover using a NOTE
as possible. flat-head screwdriver. To prevent damage to the shift lock
cover, cover the tip of the flat-head
If the select lever does not move after screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth
performing the above procedure, refer to before removing the cover.
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-26. If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission 7-27

& Selection of manual mode

Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator
With the vehicle either moving or station- 2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
ary, move the select lever from the “D” 3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode. When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range
(AT models) or 1st-to-6th gear range (CVT
models). The upshift and downshift indi-
cators show when a gearshift is possible.
When the upshift indicator “ ” is on,
upshifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possi-
ble. When both indicators are on, upshift-
ing and downshifting are both possible.
When the vehicle stops (for example, at

– CONTINUED –
7-28 Starting and operating/Automatic transmission/Continuously variable transmission

traffic signals), the downshift indicator CAUTION warning light turns off.
turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the Do not place or hang anything on & Driving tips
shift paddle behind the steering wheel. the shift paddles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting. . On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
NOTE from a standstill safely and easily by first
Please read the following points care- selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
fully and bear them in mind when using mode.
the manual mode. . Always apply the foot or parking brake
. If you attempt to shift down when when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when “R” position.
a downshift would push the tachometer . Always apply the parking brake when
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
be emitted to warn you that the down- vehicle with only the transmission.
shift is not possible. . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
. If you attempt to shift up when the position on an uphill grade by using the
To upshift to the next higher gear position, vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- “D” position. Use the brake instead.
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated sion will not respond. . The engine may, on rare occasions,
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear . You can perform a skip-shift (for knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–” example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
indicated on it. the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- This phenomenon does not indicate a
To deselect the manual mode, return the sion. malfunction.
select lever to the “D” position from the “M” . The transmission automatically se- . A slight reduction in output torque may
position. lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops occur in the models with a 3.6 L engine
While driving with the select lever in the moving. before the engine warms up.
“D” position, if you change gears by . If the temperature of the transmis-
operating the shift paddle, the gear posi- sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
tion indicator light illuminates and shows OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
the current gear condition. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
 Starting and operating/Power steering 7-29

Power steering Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually
& Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
CAUTION road to a safe place.
WARNING
Do not hold the steering wheel at the & Brake system
fully locked position left or right for Never rest your foot on the brake
more than 5 seconds. This may pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
damage the power steering pump. dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
brakes and needless wear on the system. Each circuit works diagonally
The power steering system operates only brake pads and linings. across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
when the engine is running. brake system should fail, the other half of
If you lose power steering assist because ! When the brakes get wet the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the engine stops or the system fails to the brake pedal will go down much closer
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to
function, you can steer but it will take
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much
much more effort.
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the
NOTE longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle.
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
Right after the engine has been started ! Brake booster
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
and before it has warmed up, you may The brake booster uses engine manifold
hear a noise coming from areas adja- ! Use of engine braking
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
cent to the power steering pump which Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because
is located at the right-front area of the in addition to foot braking. When descend- that will turn off the brake booster, result-
engine compartment. This noise is ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power.
normal. It does not indicate power the brakes may start working improperly
steering system trouble. The brakes will continue to work even
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops
caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to depress the pedal much
get stronger engine braking. harder than normal and the braking dis-
! Braking when a tire is punctured tance will increase.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –
7-30 Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)

! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
assist system is operating properly.
tem)
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. WARNING
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear the sound of ABS
brings more braking ability to the operating from the engine compart- Always use the utmost care in
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- ment. driving – overconfidence because
ity. Always use the utmost care you are driving with an ABS
when driving regarding vehicle equipped vehicle could easily lead
speed and safe distance. & Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators to a serious accident.

CAUTION CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly, . The ABS does not always de-
continue depressing the brake pedal crease stopping distance. You
strongly to bring the effect of the should always maintain a safe
brake assist. following distance from other
vehicles.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver . When driving on badly surfaced
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
and the brake power is insufficient. over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
Brake assist generates the brake power
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
according to the speed at which the driver The disc brake pad wear warning indica- one without. When driving under
depresses the brake pedal. tors on the disc brakes give a warning these conditions, therefore, re-
NOTE noise when the brake pads are worn. duce your speed and leave ample
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard distance from other vehicles.
When you depress the brake pedal
from the disc brakes while braking, im- . When you feel the ABS operating,
strongly or suddenly, the following
mediately have your vehicle inspected by you should maintain constant
phenomena occur. However, even
the nearest SUBARU dealer. brake pedal pressure. Do not
though these occur, they do not indi-
 Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 7-31

pump the brake pedal since Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
doing so may defeat the opera- tribution (EBD) system malfunctions
tion of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels The EBD system maximizes the effective-
which may occur during sudden braking or ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
braking on slippery road surfaces. This brakes to supply a greater proportion of
helps prevent the loss of steering control the braking force. It functions by adjusting
and directional stability caused by wheel the distribution of braking force to the rear
lock-up. wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear The EBD system is an integral part of the
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
in the brake pedal. This is normal when nents to perform its function of optimizing
the ABS operates. the distribution of braking force. If any of
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle the ABS components used by the EBD
Type A
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 function fails, the EBD system also stops
km/h). working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
& ABS self-check may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
You may feel a slight shock in the brake vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
pedal and hear the operating noise of the and does not indicate a malfunction.
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate
any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

Type B
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
– CONTINUED –
7-32 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

system warning light and ABS warning 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the Vehicle Dynamics Control
light illuminate simultaneously. “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
system
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected.
warning light illuminate simultaneously WARNING
during driving. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Always use the utmost care in
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- Instead, have the vehicle towed to the driving – overconfidence because
tional braking system will still function. nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
However, the rear wheels will be more namics Control system equipped
prone to locking when the brakes are vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
WARNING
ious accident.
cle’s motion may therefore become some- . Driving with the brake system
what harder to control. warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system CAUTION
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the . Even if your vehicle is equipped
take the following steps. with Vehicle Dynamics Control
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately. system, winter tires should be
flat place. used when driving on snow-cov-
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. . If at all in doubt about whether ered or icy roads; in addition,
3. Release the parking brake. If both the brakes are operating prop- vehicle speed should be reduced
warning lights turn off, the EBD system erly, do not drive the vehicle. considerably. Simply having a
may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle towed to the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- tem does not guarantee that the
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU pair.
dealer and have the system inspected. vehicle will be able to avoid
4. If both warning lights illuminate again accidents in any situation.
and remain illuminated after the engine . Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
has been restarted, shut down the engine namics Control system is an
again, apply the parking brake, and check indication that the road being
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” travelled on has a slippery sur-
F11-24. face; since having Vehicle Dy-
 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-33

namics Control is no guarantee flat tire. With a temporary sideways during steering operations. Acti-
that full vehicle control will be spare tire, the effectiveness vation of this function is indicated by
maintained at all times and under of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
all conditions, its activation trol system is reduced and operation indicator light.
should be seen as a sign that this should be taken into ac-
the speed of the vehicle should count when driving the vehi- NOTE
be reduced considerably. cle in such a condition. . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
. Whenever suspension compo- . If non-matching tires are used, tem may be considered normal when
nents, steering components, or the Vehicle Dynamics Control the following conditions occur.
an axle are removed from a system may not operate cor- – Slight twitching of the brake
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle rectly. pedal is felt.
Dynamics Control system, have – The vehicle or steering wheel
an inspection of that system In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding shakes to a small degree.
performed by an authorized on a slippery road surface and/or during – An operating noise from the en-
SUBARU dealer. cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, gine compartment is heard briefly
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system when starting the engine and when
. The following precautions should
adjusts the engine’s output and the driving off after starting the engine.
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- wheels’ respective braking forces to help – The brake pedal seems to jolt
trol system is operating properly. maintain traction and directional control. when driving off after starting the
. Traction Control Function engine.
– All four wheels should be . In the following circumstances, the
fitted with tires of the same The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on vehicle may be less stable than it feels
size, type, and brand. Further- to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
more, the amount of wear slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control. Control System may therefore operate.
should be the same for all Such operation does not indicate a
four tires. Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction.
– Keep the tire pressure at the operation indicator light. – on gravel-covered or rutted
proper level as shown on the roads
vehicle placard attached to . Skid Suppression Function – on unfinished roads
the driver’s side door pillar. The skid suppression function is designed – when the vehicle is towing a
– Use only the specified tem- to help maintain directional stability by trailer
porary spare tire to replace a suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide – when the vehicle is fitted with
– CONTINUED –
7-34 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

snow tires or winter tires & Vehicle Dynamics Control light turns off.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics OFF switch You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Control system will cause operation of Dynamics Control system except under
the steering wheel to feel slightly the above-mentioned situations.
different compared to that for normal
conditions. CAUTION
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner, The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
even if the vehicle is equipped with tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
Vehicle Dynamics Control. motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
. Always turn off the engine before
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
Control system unless it is abso-
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
lutely necessary. If you must turn off
system unable to operate correctly.
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully based on
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Pressing the switch to deactivate the the road surface condition.
system monitor Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- facilitate the following operations.
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- . a standing start on a steeply sloping NOTE
tion indicator light” F3-24 and “Vehicle road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or . When the switch has been pressed
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3- otherwise slippery surface to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
25. . extrication of the vehicle when its Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
When the switch is pressed during engine switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control position and the engine is restarted.
OFF indicator light on the combination . If the switch is held down for 10
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics seconds or longer, the indicator light
Control system will be deactivated. When turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
the switch is pressed again to reactivate system is activated, and the system
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the ignores any further pressing of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator switch. To make the switch usable
 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) 7-35

again, turn the ignition switch to the Tire pressure monitoring vides the driver with a warning message
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the by sending a signal from a sensor that is
engine.
system (TPMS) (if equipped) installed in each wheel when tire pressure
. When the switch is pressed to is severely low.
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- The tire pressure monitoring system will
trol system, the vehicle’s running per- activate only when the vehicle is driven at
formance is comparable with that of a speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle this system may not react immediately to a
Dynamics Control system. Do not de- sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control a blow-out caused by running over a
system except when absolutely neces- sharp object).
sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics WARNING
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may If the low tire pressure warning light
still activate. When the brake control illuminates while driving, never
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
brake suddenly and keep driving
namics Control operation indicator straight ahead while gradually redu-
light illuminates. cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
Low tire pressure warning light (type B) warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
– CONTINUED –
7-36 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

cool thoroughly before adjusting for tire and sensor replacement and/ Changes or modifications not ex-
their pressures to the standard or system resetting. pressly approved by the party respon-
values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or sible for compliance could void the
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-28. aerosol tire sealant into the tires, user’s authority to operate the equip-
The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of ment.
does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light
is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for
pressures, increase the vehicle approximately one minute, promptly
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have
to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected.
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Do not place metal film or any metal
If this light still illuminates while parts under the driver’s seat. This
driving after adjusting the tire pres- may cause poor reception of the
sure, a tire may have significant signals from the tire pressure sen-
damage and a fast leak that causes sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have ing system will not function prop-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire erly.
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a NOTE
wheel rim is replaced without the This device complies with Part 15 of
original pressure sensor/transmitter the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
being transferred, the low tire pres- Industry Canada. Operation is subject
sure warning light will illuminate to the following two conditions: (1) This
steadily after blinking for approxi- device may not cause harmful inter-
mately one minute. This indicates ference, and (2) this device must
the TPMS is unable to monitor all accept any interference received, in-
four road wheels. Contact your cluding interference that may cause
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible undesired operation.
 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-37

Parking your vehicle & Electronic parking brake and contact your SUBARU deal-
er.

WARNING
CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could . When the electronic parking
accidentally injure themselves or brake system has a malfunction
others through inadvertent op- and the parking brake cannot be
eration of the vehicle. Also, on applied, contact your SUBARU
hot or sunny days, the tempera- dealer immediately for an inspec-
ture in a closed vehicle could tion. If you have to park your
quickly become high enough to vehicle in such conditions, per-
cause severe or possibly fatal form the following procedure.
injuries to them. – Stop your vehicle in a flat
1) Parking brake switch
. Do not park the vehicle over 2) Hill Holder switch location.
flammable materials such as dry 3) Indicator light – Shift the shift lever in the “1”
grass, waste paper or rags, as or reverse position (MT mod-
they may burn easily if they come els).
near hot engine or exhaust sys- WARNING
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
tem parts. . Before exiting the vehicle, make position (AT or CVT models).
. Be sure to stop the engine if you sure that you turn off the engine. When the select lever cannot
take a nap in the vehicle. If Otherwise, the parking brake be shifted into the “P” posi-
engine exhaust gas enters the may be released and an accident tion, you must release shift
passenger compartment, occu- may occur. lock. Refer to “Shift lock func-
pants in the vehicle could die . If the brake system warning light tion” F7-25.
from carbon monoxide (CO) con- flashes, the electronic parking – Use tire stops under the tires
tained in the exhaust gas. brake system may be malfunc- to prevent the vehicle from
tioning. Immediately stop your moving.
vehicle in a safe location, use . Never drive while the parking
tire stops under the tires to brake is applied because this will
prevent the vehicle from moving
– CONTINUED –
7-38 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

cause unnecessary wear on the without depressing the brake pedal or . The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
brake linings. Before starting to the clutch pedal, the parking brake is
drive, always make sure that the not released. If the parking brake is automatically
parking brake has been released . When the parking brake is being released, the brake system warning light
and the brake system warning applied or released, noise may be and the indicator light on the parking brake
light has turned off. noticed. However, this is not a malfunc- switch turn off.
tion.
. When the electronic parking brake
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the system has a malfunction or the elec- Even if you have applied the parking
parking brake by operating the parking tronic parking brake operation is pro- brake by pressing the parking brake
brake switch. hibited temporarily, if the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be auto-
switch is operated, a chirp sound is matically released when the accelera-
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and heard and the brake system warning tor pedal is depressed.
press the parking brake switch firmly. light flashes.
To release: Pull the parking brake switch ! Hill Holder function
. When you cannot release the park-
toward you while the ignition switch is in ing brake due to, for example, a system The electronic parking brake system has a
the “ON” position and the brake pedal (all malfunction, you can release it by Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
models) and the clutch pedal (MT models) using the parking brake release tool. function is activated, the parking brake
are depressed. Refer to “Electronic parking brake – if will be automatically applied when stop-
the electronic parking brake cannot be ping on an uphill slope with the brake
When the parking brake is applied while pedal depressed. In this case, the brake
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, released” F9-17.
system warning light and the indicator light
the brake system warning light and the ! Automatic release function by ac- on the parking brake switch illuminate.
indicator light on the parking brake switch celerator pedal
illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning NOTE
light” F3-21. The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The park- . The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
NOTE ing brake will be automatically released by
case, manually apply the electronic
. If the parking brake switch is pulled depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does parking brake.
with the ignition switch in the “Acc” or . If you do not depress the brake
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the parking not operate under the following conditions.
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-
brake is not released. . Any door (other than the trunk lid or tion may not operate properly. How-
. If the parking brake switch is pulled rear gate) is open. ever, this is not a malfunction. When
 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-39

stopping on an uphill slope, depress the brake system warning light has . When you do not frequently use the
the brake pedal firmly and release it illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill parking brake when stopping on an uphill
after the brake system warning light Holder function may not operate slope
illuminates. properly and an accident may occur.
. Depending on the condition of the NOTE
road surface and braking force, the . If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
brakes operate temporarily and feel for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
different than usual. Holder indicator light turns off, the
. When the electronic parking brake brake system warning light flashes
system has a malfunction while the Hill and the system ignores any further
Holder function is activated, a chirp pressing of the switch. To activate the
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica- switch again, turn the ignition switch to
tor light turns off and the brake system the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart
warning light flashes. the engine.
. The Hill Holder function does not . When the Hill Holder function is
reactivate when parking with the elec- deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tronic parking brake released after the tion has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder function is activated. If Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
necessary, manually apply the electro- 1) Parking brake switch
nic parking brake. 2) Hill Holder switch
. If the seatbelt is not fastened when 3) Indicator light
the Hill Holder function is activated, the You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
vehicle may not start moving smoothly function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
from a stop, or a noise may be heard
from the brake components. To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
! Hill Holder switch switch again.
WARNING Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
When stopping on an uphill slope . When towing a trailer
with the Hill Holder function acti- . When carrying a heavy load
vated, release the brake pedal after
– CONTINUED –
7-40 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

! Emergency brake
! Hill Holder indicator light ! Electronic parking brake system
warning
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in CAUTION
case of an emergency. If the emer-
If the brake system warning light
gency brake is excessively used,
flashes, the electronic parking brake
the brake parts will wear down
system may be malfunctioning. Im-
faster or the brake may not work
mediately stop your vehicle in the
sufficiently due to rear wheel brake
nearest safe location and contact
overheating.
your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

While using the emergency brake, the parking brake system, the brake system
Type A brake system warning light and the warning light flashes. Refer to “Electronic
indicator light on the parking brake parking brake system warning” F3-22.
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pressing the
parking brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
brake system warning light and the in-
dicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate and a chirp sounds.

Type B
When the Hill Holder function is activated,
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-23.
 Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-41

& Parking tips Cruise control

When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items. NOTE
. Apply the parking brake. For models with EyeSight system:
. For MT models, place the shift lever in Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
the “1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) ment for the EyeSight system.
for a downgrade.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
. For AT and CVT models, place the constant vehicle speed without holding
select lever in the “P” (Park) position. your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
Never rely on the transmission alone to operative when the vehicle speed is 25
hold the vehicle. mph (40 km/h) or more.

When facing downhill, the front wheels WARNING

should be turned into the curb.
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When NOTE
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front Make sure the cruise control system is
wheels should be turned away from the turned off when the cruise control is
curb. not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.

– CONTINUED –
7-42 Starting and operating/Cruise control

& To set cruise control “SET” side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control indicator light (type B)

Cruise control main button The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate. Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
1. Press the cruise control main button. 1) U.S. spec. models
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
2) Except U.S. spec. models
vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Cruise control indicator light (type A)

Cruise control set indicator light (type B)
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
 Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-43

At this time, the cruise control set indicator & To temporarily cancel the The cruise control set indicator light in the
light is illuminated in the combination cruise control combination meter turns off when the
meter. For models with a type A combina- cruise control is canceled.
tion meter, the set speed will be shown on The cruise control can be temporarily
the combination meter. canceled in the following ways.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
. Press the “CANCEL” button. cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
. Depress the brake pedal. km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models). switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
WARNING The cruise control set indicator light in the
For AT and CVT models, do not combination meter will automatically illu-
place the select lever in the “N” minate at this time.
position while driving. If the select
lever is shifted into the “N” position, & To turn off the cruise control
cruise control can be canceled but There are two ways to turn off the cruise
the engine brake will no longer control:
work. This could result in an acci- . Press the cruise control main button
dent. again.

– CONTINUED –
7-44 Starting and operating/Cruise control

. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the the vehicle speed.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the “RES” side quickly. . Except U.S. spec. models
vehicle is completely stopped). If the difference between the actual
Except U.S. spec. models
vehicle speed when the switch is
& To change the cruising speed When the difference between the actual pressed and the speed last time you
vehicle speed and the set speed is less set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/ than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
SET” switch) increased 1 km/h each time by pressing occurs because the cruise control
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side system regards this operation as that
quickly. intended to decrease the vehicle
! To increase the speed (by accel- speed.
erator pedal)
! To decrease the speed (by the
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to “RES/SET” switch)
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches NOTE
the desired speed. Then, release the . U.S. spec. models
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment If the difference between the actual
will be memorized and treated as the new vehicle speed when the switch is
set speed. pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
U.S. spec. models
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
When the difference between the actual the desired speed. Then, release the
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
vehicle speed and the set speed is less switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
cruise control system regards this
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can will be memorized and treated as the new
operation as that intended to decrease
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
 Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-45

set speed. & Cruise control indicator light

U.S. spec. models Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
When the difference between the actual F3-32.
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can & Cruise control set indicator
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by light
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
“SET” side quickly. F3-32.
Except U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the first Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-12
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 (Outback) ........................................................ 8-14
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) .............. 8-18
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-18
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-20
Legacy................................................................ 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-20
Outback .............................................................. 8-6 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-20
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-20
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-24
Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-24
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26 8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
km) The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
. Always properly maintain the en-
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
. Avoid remaining in a parked
tire wear and fuel consumption.
The same break-in procedures should be vehicle for a long time while the
. Use the air conditioner only when engine is running. If that is
applied to a newly installed or overhauled necessary.
engine or when brake pads or brake unavoidable, then use the venti-
. Keep the front and rear wheels in lation fan to force fresh air into
linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
. The indication of the ECO gauge or other obstructions to ensure
shows a reference for saving fuel. For that the ventilation system al-
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-11. ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
 Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3

exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter

vehicle, have the probl em
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive WARNING
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or near flammable materials (e.g.
rear gate (Outback) closed while grass, paper, rags or leaves),
driving to prevent exhaust gas because the catalytic converter
from entering the vehicle. operates at very high tempera-
tures.
NOTE . Keep everyone and flammable
Due to the expansion and contraction materials away from the exhaust 3.6 L models
of the metals used in the manufacture pipe while the engine is running. The catalytic converter is installed in the
of the exhaust system, you may hear a The exhaust gas is very hot. exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
crackling sound coming from the ex- reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
haust system for a short time after the gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
engine has been shut off. This sound is
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
normal.
ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
2.5 L models . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
– CONTINUED –
8-4 Driving tips/Periodic inspections

your vehicle checked and repaired by an Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
prevention treatment to the heat shield of at all times, always have the recom- another country:
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys- mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
tem. the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and re-
level. formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
intervals.
 Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD vehicles 8-5

Driving tips for AWD vehicles . You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumferences,
construction, manufacturer,
WARNING brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
. Always maintain a safe driving index. Mixing tires of other sizes,
speed according to the road and circumferences or constructions
weather conditions in order to may result in severe mechanical
avoid having an accident on a damage to the drive train of your
sharp turn, during sudden brak- vehicle and may affect ride,
ing or under other similar condi- handling, braking and speed-
tions. ometer/odometer calibration. It
. Always use the utmost care in also may be dangerous and lead
driving – overconfidence be- to loss of vehicle control. All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
cause you are driving an All- power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily provide better traction when driving on
lead to a serious accident. CAUTION slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
. When replacing a tire, you must when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
If you use a temporary spare tire to By shifting power between the front and
use a tire that is of the same size, replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
circumference, speed symbol rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
original temporary spare tire stored provide added traction during accelera-
and load index as the original in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
tires listed on the tire placard. tion, and added engine braking force
result in severe mechanical damage during deceleration.
Using tires of other sizes, cir- to the drive train of your vehicle.
cumferences or constructions Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may result in severe mechanical may handle differently than an ordinary
damage to the drive train of your two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
vehicle and may affect ride, some features unique to AWD. For safety
handling, braking, speedometer/ purposes as well as to avoid damaging
odometer calibration, and clear- the AWD system, you should keep the
ance between the body and tires. following tips in mind:
It also may be dangerous and . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
lead to loss of vehicle control. steeper roads under snowy or slippery

– CONTINUED –
8-6 Driving tips/Off road driving

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. Off road driving under warranty. If you do take your
There is little difference in handling, SUBARU off road, you should review the
however, during extremely sharp turns or common sense precautions in the next
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING section (applicable to the Outback) for
down a slope or turning corners, be sure general guidance. But please keep in
to reduce your speed and maintain an . Always maintain a safe driving mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil-
ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and ities are more limited than those of the
. Always check the cold tire pressure weather conditions in order to Outback.
before starting to drive. The recom- avoid having an accident on a Never attempt to drive through pools and
mended tire pressure is provided on the sharp turn, during sudden brak- puddles, or roads flooded with water.
tire placard, which is located on the door ing or under other similar condi- Water entering the engine air intake or
pillar on the driver’s side. tions. the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
. There are some precautions that you . Always use the utmost care in electrical parts may damage your vehicle
must observe when towing your vehicle. driving – overconfidence be- and may cause it to stall.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing” cause you are driving an All-
F9-14. Wheel Drive vehicle could easily & Outback
lead to a serious accident.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But
& Legacy please keep in mind that an AWD
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- SUBARU is a passenger car and is
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain neither a conventional off-road vehicle
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
primarily for on-road use. The AWD your SUBARU off-road, certain common
feature gives it some limited off-road sense precautions such as those in the
capabilities in situations in which the following list should be taken:
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc- . Make certain that you and all of your
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road passengers are wearing seatbelts.
driving conditions. Operating it under other
. Carry some emergency equipment,
than those conditions could subject the
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
vehicle to excessive stress which might
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
result in damage not eligible for repair
citizens band radio.
 Driving tips/Off road driving 8-7

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never could be thrown around in the vehicle and
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or attempt to drive through rushing water; cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
over rough terrain. regardless of its depth, it can wash away the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
. Slow down and employ extra caution at the ground from under your tires, resulting center of gravity and make it more prone
all times. When driving off-road, you will in possible loss of traction and even to tip over.
not have the benefit of marked traffic vehicle rollover. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and . Always check your brakes for effec- from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
the like. tiveness immediately after driving in sand, pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
. Do not drive across steep slopes. mud or water. Do this by driving slowly select lever back and forth between “1”/
Instead, drive either straight up or straight and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
down the slopes. A vehicle can much that process several times to dry out the engine. For the best possible traction,
more easily tip over sideways than it can brake discs and brake pads. avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or . Do not drive or park over or near free the vehicle.
down slopes that are too steep. flammable materials such as dry grass or . When the road surface is extremely
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The slippery, you can obtain better traction by
cially at higher speeds. exhaust system is very hot while the starting the vehicle with the transmission
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the engine is running and right after the in 2nd than 1st (both for MT, AT and CVT).
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the engine stops. This could create a fire For AT and CVT models, refer to “Selec-
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive hazard. tion of manual mode” F7-27.
with your fingers and thumbs on the . After driving through tall grass, mud, . Never equip your vehicle with tires
outside of the rim. rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there larger than those specified in this manual.
. If driving through water, such as when is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
crossing shallow streams, first check the sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the road driving. Suspension components are
depth of the water and the bottom of the underbody. Clear off any such matter from particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
stream bed for firmness and ensure that the underbody. If the vehicle is used with need to be washed thoroughly.
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly these materials trapped or adhering to the . Frequent driving of an AWD model
and completely through the stream. The underbody, a mechanical breakdown or under hard-driving conditions such as
water should be shallow enough that it fire could occur. rough roads or off roads will necessitate
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- . Secure all cargo carried inside the more frequent replacement of the follow-
riage. Water entering the engine air intake vehicle and make certain that it is not ing items than that specified in the
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing piled higher than the seatbacks. During maintenance schedule described in the
onto electrical parts may damage your sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
– CONTINUED –
8-8 Driving tips/Winter driving

– Engine oil Winter driving Keep the door locks from freezing by
– Brake fluid squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
– Rear differential gear oil Forcing a frozen door open may damage
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod- or separate the rubber weather strips
els) around the door. If the door is frozen,
– Automatic transmission fluid (AT use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
models) wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models) Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
– Front differential gear oil (AT and tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
CVT models) engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
Remember that damage done to your the vehicle.
SUBARU while operating it off-road and SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
not using common sense precautions tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
such as those listed above is not eligible & Operation during cold surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
for warranty coverage. weather perature varies according to how much it
Carry some emergency equipment, such is diluted, as indicated in the following
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, table.
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. Washer Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Temperature
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity. 30% 10.48F (−128C)
The battery must be in good condition to
50% −48F (−208C)
provide enough power for cold winter
starts. 100% −498F (−458C)

It normally takes longer to start the engine In order to prevent freezing of washer
in very cold weather conditions. Use an fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity the table above when adjusting the fluid
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil concentration to the outside temperature.
will make it harder to start the engine. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
 Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9

a different concentration from the one ! Before driving your vehicle 1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT
used previously, purge the old fluid from Before entering the vehicle, remove any models, or the select lever in “P” for AT
the piping between the reservoir tank and snow or ice from your shoes because that models and CVT models.
washer nozzles by operating the washer could make the pedals slippery and 2. Use tire stops under the tires to
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if driving dangerous. prevent the vehicle from moving.
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside While warming up the vehicle before When the vehicle is parked in snow or
temperature, it may freeze and block the driving, check that the accelerator pedal, when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
nozzles. brake pedal, and all other controls operate the glass to prevent damage to them.
smoothly. When the vehicle has been left parked
CAUTION after use on roads heavily covered with
Clear away ice and snow that has
. Adjust the washer fluid concen- accumulated under the fenders to avoid snow, or has been left parked during a
tration appropriately for the out- making steering difficult. During severe snowstorm, icing may develop on the
side temperature. If the concen- winter driving, stop when and where it is brake system, which could cause poor
tration is inappropriate, sprayed safe to do so and check under the fenders braking action. Check for snow or ice
washer fluid may freeze on the periodically. buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
windshield and obstruct your and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
! Parking in cold weather If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank. being careful not to damage the disc
WARNING brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
. State or local regulations on ness.
volatile organic compounds may Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
restrict the use of methanol, a gases under your vehicle. Keep ! Refueling in cold weather
common windshield washer anti- snow clear of the exhaust pipe and To help prevent moisture from forming in
freeze additive. Washer fluids from around your vehicle if you park the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
containing non-methanol anti- the vehicle in snow with the engine use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
freeze agents should be used running. tank is recommended during cold weather.
only if they provide cold weather Use only additives that are specifically
protection without damaging Do not use the parking brake when designed for this purpose. When an
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades parking for long periods in cold weather antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
or washer system. since it could freeze in that position. longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
Instead, you should observe the following fuel level reaches half empty.
tips.
– CONTINUED –
8-10 Driving tips/Winter driving

If your SUBARU is not going to be used vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
for an extended period, it is best to have when necessary.) and deicer” F3-49.
the fuel tank filled to capacity. Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
& Driving on snowy and icy to stick on the surface of the windshield
leading to loss of vehicle control.
roads despite wiper operation, use the defroster
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- with the airflow selection in “ ” and the
WARNING hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- temperature set for maximum warmth.
mance on snowy and icy roads. For After the windshield gets warmed enough
Do not use the cruise control on information about braking on slippery to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
slippery roads such as snowy or icy surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake using the windshield washer. Refer to
roads. This may cause loss of System)” F7-30 and “Vehicle Dynamics “Windshield washer” F3-47.
vehicle control. Control system” F7-32.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is
CAUTION Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
the wiper blades are not frozen to the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
Avoid prolonged continuous driving windshield or rear window. the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the warning flasher to alert other drivers.
engine’s intake system and may If the wiper blades are frozen to the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-7.
hinder the airflow, which could re- windshield or rear window, perform the
sult in engine shutdown or even following procedure. We recommend use of non-freezing type
breakdown. . To thaw the windshield wiper blades, wiper blades (winter blades) during the
use the defroster with the airflow selection seasons you could have snow and freez-
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid in “ ” and the temperature set for ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- maximum warmth until the wiper blades superior wiping performance in snowy
speed driving, and sharp turning when are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate conditions. Be sure to use blades that
driving on snowy or icy roads. control” F4-1. are suitable for your vehicle.
Always maintain ample distance between . If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper CAUTION
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
to avoid the need for sudden braking. windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- During high-speed driving, non-
To supplement the foot brake, use the ger and deicer” F3-49. freezing type wiper blades may not
engine brake effectively to control the . To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the perform as well as standard wiper
 Driving tips/Winter driving 8-11

blades. If this happens, reduce the ference, construction, manufac- since this may result in dangerous hand-
vehicle speed. turer, brand (tread pattern), de- ling characteristics. When you choose a
gree of wear, speed symbol and tire, make sure that there is enough
load index. Mixing tires of other clearance between the tire and vehicle
NOTE sizes or constructions may result body.
When the season requiring non-freez- in severe mechanical damage to
ing type wiper blades is over, replace Remember to drive with care at all times
the drive train of your vehicle and
them with standard wiper blades. regardless of the type of tires on your
may affect ride, handling, braking
vehicle.
and speedometer/odometer cali-
& Corrosion protection bration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con- & Tire chains
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4. trol.
CAUTION
. Do not use a combination of
& Snow tires radial, belted bias or bias tires Tire chains cannot be used on your
since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of
WARNING handling characteristics and lead clearance between the tires and
. When replacing original tires with to an accident. vehicle body.
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only tires of the same Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
size, circumference, speed sym- tires” which are designed to provide an NOTE
bol and load index as the original adequate measure of traction, handling When tire chains cannot be used, use
tires listed on the tire placard. and braking performance in year-round of another type of traction device (such
Using tires of other sizes and driving. In winter, it may be possible to as spring chains) may be acceptable if
constructions may affect speed- enhance performance through use of tires use on your vehicle is recommended
ometer/odometer calibration and designed specifically for winter driving by the device manufacturer, taking into
clearance between the body and conditions. account tire size and road conditions.
tires. It also may be dangerous If you choose to install winter tires on your Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
and lead to loss of vehicle con- vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size structions, especially regarding max-
trol. and type. You must install four winter tires imum vehicle speed.
that are of the same size, construction, To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
. You must install four winter tires brand and load range and you should
that are of the same size, circum- drive slowly, readjust or remove the
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires device if it is contacting your vehicle,
– CONTINUED –
8-12 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

and do not spin your wheels. Damage Loading your vehicle possible.
caused to your vehicle by use of a . When you carry something inside
traction device is not covered under the vehicle, secure it whenever
warranty. WARNING you can to prevent it from being
Make certain that any traction device thrown around inside the vehicle
you use is an SAE class S device, and Never allow passengers to ride on a during sudden stops, sharp turns
use it on the front wheels only. Always folded rear seatback, in the trunk or or in an accident.
use the utmost care when driving with in the cargo area. Doing so may
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
a traction device. Overconfidence be- result in serious injury.
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cause you are using a traction device cle’s center of gravity and make it
could easily lead to a serious accident. more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
& Rocking the vehicle prevent them from shooting for-
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from ward and causing serious injury
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- during a sudden stop.
erator pedal slightly and move the shift . Never exceed the maximum load
lever/select lever back and forth between limit. If you do, some parts on
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the your vehicle can break, or it can
engine. For the best possible traction, change the way your vehicle
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to handles. This could result in loss
free the vehicle. of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
When the road surface is extremely shorten the life of your vehicle.
slippery, you can obtain better traction by WARNING
starting the vehicle with the transmission . Do not place anything on the rear
in 2nd than 1st (for MT, AT and CVT). . Never stack luggage or other shelf behind the rear seatback
cargo higher than the top of the (Legacy) or the extended cargo
For information on holding the transmis- seatback because it could tumble area cover (Outback). Such items
sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of forward and injure passengers in could tumble forward in the event
manual mode” F7-27. the event of a sudden stop or of a sudden stop or a collision.
accident. Keep luggage or cargo This could cause serious injury.
low, as close to the floor as
 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-13

CAUTION & Vehicle capacity weight side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
Do not carry spray cans, containers belongings, any optional equipment such
with flammable or corrosive liquids as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
or any other dangerous items inside etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
the vehicle.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
NOTE Gross Axle Weight Rating)
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.

Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The load capacity of your vehicle is The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
determined by weight, not by available never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
cargo space. The maximum load you can combined total of weight of the vehicle,
carry in your vehicle is shown on the fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s optional equipment and trailer tongue
– CONTINUED –
8-14 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- & Roof rails with integrated the maximum load limit. Over-
pending on the situation. crossbars (Outback) loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
In addition, the total weight applied to
hazard.
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
The bars can be used as crossbars.
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
Cargo can be carried after setting the
vehicle.
bars as crossbars and installing the
Even if the total weight of your luggage is genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the When you carry cargo on the roof using
GAWR, depending on the distribution of the crossbars and a carrying attachment,
the luggage. never exceed the maximum load limit
When possible, the load should be evenly explained in the following. You should
distributed throughout the vehicle. also be careful that your vehicle does not
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
1) Integrated crossbars (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a CAUTION on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
vehicle scale, found at a commercial refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
weighing station. . For cargo carrying purposes, the maximum load limit of the cargo and
bars must be used as crossbars carrying attachment must not exceed the
Do not use replacement tires with a lower and be used together with the allowable load limit described in the Own-
load range than the originals because they genuine SUBARU carrying at- er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry-
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- tachment. The bars must never ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load be used alone to carry cargo. the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
range than the originals do not increase Otherwise, damage to the roof or distribute the cargo. Always properly
the GVWR and GAWR limitations. paint or a dangerous road hazard secure all cargo.
due to loss of cargo could result.
. When using the bars as cross-
bars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-15

! Installing carrying attachments on ! How to use as crossbars

the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment CAUTION
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- . Do not raise the bar higher than
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc- necessary. The base of the bar
tions and make sure that the attachment is may be damaged.
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only . Be careful not to contact the bars
attachments designed specifically for the while sliding them. Otherwise,
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is the bars may be scratched or
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach- the latch portions may be da-
ment) of not more than the allowable load maged.
limit described in the Owner’s Manual of a . Do not slide the bar more than
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. necessary when sliding the bar. 1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from
Before operating the vehicle, make sure The base of the bar may be the roof rail holders by pulling up the
that the cargo is properly secured on the damaged. covers.
attachment.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
NOTE contact the roof panel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
. Remember that the vehicle’s center
Otherwise the roof panel may be
of gravity is altered with the weight of
dented or the glass of the moon-
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
roof may be damaged.
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the original
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.

– CONTINUED –
8-16 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

3. Install the bars into the holders. 2. Undo the cap of the roof rail holder by 4. Pull out the crossbar from the roof rail
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted using the torque wrench. holder by pulling up the cover.
securely. 5. Install the crossbar into the other
holder.
! How to change the position of the
crossbar

WARNING
Carefully read the warning label
attached to the roof rail.

You can change the position of the rear

crossbar. To change the position, perform
the following procedure.
1. Take out the torque wrench from the 3. Undo the bolt of the crossbar by using
jack holder. the torque wrench.
6. Tighten the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench. The tightening
 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-17

torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12

+ 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).

2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail 4. Install the bars into the holders.
holders by pulling up the covers. 5. Make sure that the latches are fitted
7. Tighten the cap of the holder by using securely.
the torque wrench. The tightening torque
is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0
N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).

! How to re-stow bars

CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.

1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed

in the front side holder. 3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
8-18 Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped)

Trailer hitch (Outback — if could get loose and create a & Connecting a trailer
equipped) traffic safety hazard.
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
. Use only the ball mount supplied hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
with this hitch. Use the hitch only mount into the hitch receiver tube.
WARNING as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
. Never exceed the maximum distributing hitch.
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum The maximum gross trailer weight and
weight could cause an accident maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
resulting in serious personal in- cated in the following table.
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa- Maximum Maximum
tion. For possible recommenda- gross trailer gross tongue
tions and limitations, refer to weight weight
“Trailer towing” F8-20. 3.6 L models 3,000 lbs
(1,360 kg) 200 lbs
. Trailer brakes are required when
2,700 lbs (90 kg)
the towing load exceeds 1,000 2.5 L models
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer (1,224 kg) 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
has safety chains and that each hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer through the ball mount.
chain will hold the trailer’s max- towing” F8-20.
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
 Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) 8-19

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin account; however, be careful not to let Hitch harness connector
securely. them drag on the ground. 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it four-pin wire connector to the towing
does not come off the hitch receiver. WARNING trailer’s wire harness.
Do not connect safety chains to part 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
of the vehicle other than the safety wire harness by individually activating the
chain hooks. brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.

NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

– CONTINUED –
8-20 Driving tips/Trailer towing

& When you do not tow a trailer Trailer towing will be required due to the additional load.
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
onto the hitch receiver tube. and Maintenance Booklet”.)
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional Under no circumstances should a trailer
connector of the hitch wire harness to loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
protect against possible damage. brakes, tires and suspension and has an with any new powertrain component (en-
adverse effect on fuel economy. gine, transmission, differential, wheel
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
four-pin connector using terminal grease. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
(1,600 km) of driving.
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of & Maximum load limits
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary WARNING
towing equipment appropriate for your
Never exceed the maximum load
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
limits explained in the following.
instructions on correct installation and use
Exceeding the maximum load limits
provided by the trailer and other towing
could cause personal injury and/or
equipment manufacturers.
vehicle damage.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any CAUTION
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your . Adequate size trailer brakes are
failure to follow the proper instructions. required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
& Warranties and maintenance total weight.
SUBARU warranties do not apply to . Before towing a trailer, check the
vehicle damage or malfunction caused trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to and tongue load. Make sure the
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance load and its distribution in your
 Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-21

vehicle and trailer are accepta- 3.6 L models

ble. Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
! Total trailer weight When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

2.5 L models
Model Conditions Maximum total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
CVT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill 1,350 lbs (612 kg)
Total trailer weight grade continuously for over 5 miles (8
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus km) with an outside temperature of
1048F (408C) or above.
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight.
! Legacy
The total trailer weight must not exceed
1,000 lbs (453 kg).
! Outback
The maximum total trailer weight is in-
dicated in the following tables.

– CONTINUED –
8-22 Driving tips/Trailer towing

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and The total weight applied to each axle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
(GVWR) Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.

Certification label

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). Certification label
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle, To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, confirm that the total weight and weight
trailer tongue load and any other optional distribution are within safe driving limits,
equipment installed on your vehicle. you should have your vehicle and trailer
Therefore, the GVW changes depending weighed at a commercial weighing station.
on the situation. Determine the GVW each Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
time before going on a trip by putting your prevent a change in weight distribution
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. while driving.
GVWR is shown on the certification label Gross Axle Weight
located on the driver’s door of your
vehicle.
 Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-23

! Tongue load NOTE

For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value
is 200 lbs (90 kg).

F: Front
Tongue load The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
WARNING Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
If the trailer is loaded with more 60 percent of the trailer load should be in
weight in the back of trailer’s axle the front and approximately 40 percent in
than in the front, the load is taken off 1) Jack the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. 2) Bathroom scale as possible on both the left and right
This may cause the rear wheels to sides.
skid, especially during braking or The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
illustration. When weighing the tongue prevent a change in weight distribution
ing cornering, resulting in over-
load, be sure to position the towing while driving.
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
coupler at the height at which it would be
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from during actual towing, using a jack as
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight shown.
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).

– CONTINUED –
8-24 Driving tips/Trailer towing

& Trailer hitches trailer. Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tight.
! Outback
WARNING The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer & Connecting a trailer
Never drill the frame or under-body hitch is recommended. A genuine
of your vehicle to install a commer- SUBARU hitch is available from your ! Trailer brakes
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- SUBARU dealer.
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- WARNING
enter the passenger compartment able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
through the drilled hole. Exhaust vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- . Adequate size trailer brakes are
gas contains carbon monoxide, a sional hitch supplier to assist you in required when the trailer and its
colorless and odorless gas which is choosing an appropriate hitch for your cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch total weight.
Also, drilling the frame or under- manufacturer’s instructions for installation . Do not directly connect your
body of your vehicle could cause and use. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
deterioration of strength of your Never use a hitch that mounts only to the to the hydraulic brake system in
vehicle and cause corrosion around rear bumper. The bumper is not designed your vehicle. Direct connection
the drilled hole. to handle that type of load. would cause the vehicle’s brake
For all types of hitches, regularly check performance to deteriorate and
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are could lead to an accident.
CAUTION tight.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
. Do not modify the vehicle ex- ! Legacy plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
haust system, brake system, or SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer (453 kg), the trailer is required to be
other systems when installing a hitches. Consult with a professional hitch equipped with its own brake system.
hitch or other trailer towing supplier to assist you in choosing an Electric brakes or surge brakes are
equipment. appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure recommended, and must be installed
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
as they can cause damage to the instructions for installation and use. conform with Federal, state/province and/
axle housing, wheel bearings, Never use a hitch that mounts only to the or other applicable regulations. Your
wheels or tires. rear bumper. The bumper is not designed SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to handle that type of load. to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
 Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-25

dealer and professional trailer supplier for ! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
more information about the trailer’s brake cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
system. tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
! Trailer safety chains increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
WARNING
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
Always use safety chains between operation of the turn signals and the stop
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing lights each time you hitch up.
trailer without safety chains could ! Tires
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due WARNING
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage. Never tow a trailer when the tem-
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem-
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to
ball should break or become discon- provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the
nected, the trailer could get loose and without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing
create a traffic safety hazard. blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire
For safety, always connect the towing dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle.
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety conform with Federal, state/province and/
chains. Pass the chains crossing each or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
other under the trailer tongue to prevent ! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
the trailer from dropping onto the ground 9 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
in case the trailer tongue should discon- CAUTION the end of this manual.
nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
slack in the chains taking tight turn Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may proper inflation pressure should be in
situations into account; however, be care- accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
ful not to let them drag on the ground. damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of specifications.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions your vehicle’s lighting system. In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
for your hitch and trailer. when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

– CONTINUED –
8-26 Driving tips/Trailer towing

road service to repair the flat tire. the rear, check the total trailer weight, Avoid sudden braking because it may
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your confirm that the load and its distribution control.
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against are acceptable.
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
tire is firmly secured. . Check that the tire pressures are erations. For MT models, always start out
correct. in first gear and release the clutch pedal at
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are moderate engine revolution.
& Trailer towing tips
connected properly. Confirm that . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
– the trailer tongue is connected rapid lane changes.
CAUTION
properly to the hitch ball. . Slow down before turning. Make a
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) – the trailer lights connector is con- longer than normal turning radius because
when towing a trailer in hilly nected properly and trailer’s stop lights the trailer wheels will be closer than the
country on hot days. illuminate when the vehicle’s brake vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
. When towing a trailer, steering,
turn signal lights flash when the vehicle.
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif- vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated. . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
ferent from normal operation. – the safety chains are connected handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
You should never drive at exces- properly. ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
sive speeds but always employ – all cargo in the trailer is secured weather conditions or the passing of large
extra caution when towing a safety in position. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
trailer. You should also keep the – the side mirrors provide a good grip the steering wheel and slow down
following tips in mind. rearward field of view without a sig- immediately but gradually.
nificant blind spot. . When passing other vehicles, consid-
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn erable distance is required because of the
! Before starting out on a trip
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination added weight and length caused by
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- before starting out on a trip. In an area free attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
hitch mounting are in good condition. If of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
any problems are apparent, do not tow the backing up.
trailer.
! Driving with a trailer
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is . You should allow for considerably more
tipped sharply up at the front and down at stopping distance when towing a trailer.
 Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-27

engine braking effect and prevent over- nates (AT and CVT models). Refer to
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not “AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
make sudden downshifts. CVT models)” F3-18.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically . For AT and CVT models, avoid using
to protect the engine from overheating. the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
an uphill slope instead of using the
. When driving uphill in hot weather, parking brake or foot brake. That may
because the engine and transmission are cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
relatively prone to overheating, pay atten-
tion to the following items. ! Parking on a grade
– Temperature gauge (if equipped) Always block the wheels under both
– Coolant temperature high warning vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
light (if equipped) the parking brake. You should not park on
1) Left turn a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or
2) Right turn
– AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
CVT models) slope cannot be avoided, you should take
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and . If any of the following conditions occur, the following steps:
takes practice. When backing up with a immediately turn off the air conditioner and 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. stop the vehicle in the nearest safe down.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the location. Refer to “If you park your vehicle
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
in an emergency” F9-2 and “Engine
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
overheating” F9-13.
for a right turn. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
– Temperature gauge needle ap-
. If the ABS warning light illuminates release the regular brakes slowly until the
proaches the OVERHEAT zone (if
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing blocks absorb the load.
equipped). Refer to “Temperature
the trailer and have repairs performed gauge (models with type A combina- 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
immediately by the nearest SUBARU tion meter)” F3-11. apply the parking brake; slowly release
dealer. – Coolant temperature high warning the regular brakes.
light illuminates (if equipped). Refer to 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
! Driving on grades
“Coolant temperature low indicator models) or “P” (AT and CVT models) and
. Before going down a steep hill, slow shut off the engine.
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
ing light” F3-16.
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2 Towing ................................................................ 9-14

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 Towing and tie-down hooks/holes ...................... 9-14
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16
Legacy................................................................ 9-4 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Outback .............................................................. 9-5 Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6 parking brake cannot be released................. 9-17
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6 Access key – if access key does not
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if operate properly ............................................. 9-20
equipped).......................................................... 9-9 Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-20
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10 Switching power ................................................ 9-20
How to jump start............................................... 9-11 Starting engine .................................................. 9-21
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13 Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot
If steam is coming from the engine be opened ....................................................... 9-21
compartment.................................................... 9-13 Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate
If no steam is coming from the engine cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-22
compartment.................................................... 9-13 If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-23
9
9-2 In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in an emergency

If you park your vehicle in an NOTE Temporary spare tire

emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
The hazard warning flasher should be mitter being transferred, the low
used in day or night to warn other drivers tire pressure warning light will
when you have to park your vehicle under illuminate steadily after blinking
emergency conditions. for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
vated regardless of the ignition switch
dealer as soon as possible for
position.
tire and sensor replacement and/
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing or system resetting.
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-3

CAUTION Maintenance tools

Never use any temporary spare tire Your vehicle is equipped with the following
other than the original. Using other maintenance tools.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
. Jack
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle. . Jack handle
. Screwdriver
The temporary spare tire is smaller and . Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
lighter than a conventional tire and is . Wheel nut wrench
designed for emergency use only. Re- . Electronic parking brake release tool
move the temporary spare tire and re- . Torque wrench (Outback)
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
CAUTION
signed only for temporary use. 2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on The torque wrench is designed to be
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
the tread, replace the tire. used only when changing the posi-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
. The temporary spare tire must be used tion of the crossbar. Do not use the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
torque wrench in other cases. Other-
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a wise, the torque wrench may be
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare deformed.
the following precautions. tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.

– CONTINUED –
9-4 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

& Legacy 5) Tool bucket the floor cover of the trunk. The electronic
parking brake release tool is stored under
the floor of the trunk. The other tools are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-17.

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer 1) Wheel nut wrench

to “Under-floor storage compartment” 2) Screwdriver
F6-18.) 3) Jack
2) Electronic parking brake release tool 4) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
3) Jack handle
4) Spare tire The jack handle is stored on the back of
 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-5

& Outback 5) Tool bucket The jack handle is stored under the cargo
area. The electronic parking brake release
tool is stored under the floor of the cargo
area. The other tools are stored in the tool
bucket that is located in the recess of the
spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-17.

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer 1) Wheel nut wrench

to “Under-floor storage compartment” 2) Torque wrench
F6-18.) 3) Screwdriver
2) Electronic parking brake release tool 4) Jack
3) Jack handle 5) Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
4) Spare tire
9-6 In case of emergency/Flat tires

Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt nance tools” F9-3.
place. and this can result in a serious
accident. NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
& Changing a flat tire cated before using it.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
WARNING
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the
incline or a loose road surface. select lever in the “P” (Park) position (AT
The jack can come out of the and CVT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
Legacy
ing the vehicle with this jack.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
 In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-7

Outback 7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat screw, and turn the handle until the tire
tire. clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –
9-8 In case of emergency/Flat tires

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. on the wrench because you may exceed
tire. the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
WARNING torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

Models with P205/60R16 tires

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean illustration.
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
with a cloth. to “Tires” F12-9. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension Others
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
 In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-9

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire & Tire pressure monitoring indicated by sending a signal from a
compartment. system (TPMS) (if equipped) sensor that is installed in each wheel
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching when tire pressure is severely low.
bolt firmly. The tire pressure monitoring system will
Also store the jack and jack handle in their activate only when the vehicle is driven.
storage locations. Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
WARNING example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment WARNING
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment If the low tire pressure warning light
could strike occupants and cause illuminates while driving, never
injury. Store the tire and all tools in brake suddenly and keep driving
the proper place. straight ahead while gradually redu-
Low tire pressure warning light (type A) cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- it with a spare tire as soon as
vides the driver with the warning message
– CONTINUED –
9-10 In case of emergency/Jump starting

possible. Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal

When a spare tire is mounted or a objects such as rings, bands or
wheel rim is replaced without the other metal jewelry.
original pressure sensor/transmitter WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and
being transferred, the low tire pres- . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. clamps on them do not have
sure warning light will illuminate Do not let it come in contact with loose or missing insulation.
steadily after blinking for approxi- the eyes, skin, clothing or the . Do not jump start unless cables
mately one minute. This indicates vehicle. in suitable condition are avail-
the TPMS is unable to monitor all able.
four road wheels. Contact your If battery fluid gets on you,
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger-
for tire and sensor replacement and/ area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
or system resetting. medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
Do not inject any tire liquid or any other moving engine parts.
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a Removing rings, watches and
as this may cause a malfunction of ties is advisable.
the tire pressure sensors. large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it is
If the light illuminates steadily after help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
blinking for approximately one min- sure about the proper procedure
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery. for jump starting, consult a com-
dealer to have the system inspected. petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
 In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.

– CONTINUED –
9-12 In case of emergency/Jump starting

1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
 In case of emergency/Engine overheating 9-13

Engine overheating 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood” clockwise slowly without pressing down
F11-7. until it stops. Release the pressure from
WARNING Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the radiator. After the pressure has been
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off fully released, remove the cap by pressing
Never attempt to remove the radia- the engine and contact your authorized down and turning it.
tor cap until the engine has been dealer for repair.
shut off and has fully cooled down. 3. After the engine coolant temperature
When the engine is hot, the coolant has dropped, turn off the engine.
is under pressure. Removing the If any of the following conditions occur,
cap while the engine is still hot turn off the engine.
could release a spray of boiling hot . The temperature gauge stays in the
coolant, which could burn you very overheated zone (if equipped). Refer
seriously. to “Temperature gauge (models with
type A combination meter)” F3-11.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road
. The coolant temperature high warn-
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
ing light remains illuminated (if
equipped). Refer to “Coolant tempera-
& If steam is coming from the ture low indicator light/Coolant tem-
engine compartment perature high warning light” F3-16.
Turn off the engine and get everyone 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
away from the vehicle until it cools down. check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
& If no steam is coming from If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
the engine compartment mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
NOTE 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
For details about how to check the
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
radiator with coolant.
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-16.
1. Keep the engine running at idling If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
speed. radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
9-14 In case of emergency/Towing

Towing procedures for safety.

& Towing and tie-down hooks/

WARNING holes
The towing hooks should be used only in
Never tow AWD vehicles (including an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
AT, MT and CVT) with the front from mud, sand or snow).
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground, CAUTION
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on . Use only the specified towing
the ground. This will cause the hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.
vehicle to spin away due to the Never use suspension parts or
operation or deterioration of the other parts of the body for towing 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
center differential. or tie-down purposes. using a screwdriver, and you will find a
. Never use the tie-down hole clo- threaded hole for attaching the towing
sest to the muffler under the hook.
vehicle for towing purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.

Front towing hook:

1. Take out the towing hook and screw-
driver from the on board tool bucket. Take
out the jack handle from the trunk (Le-
gacy) or cargo area (Outback).
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial 3. Screw the towing hook into the
towing service. Observe the following threaded hole until the threads can no
 In case of emergency/Towing 9-15

longer be seen. Rear towing hook:

1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of
the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Out-
back).

3. Screw the towing hook into the

4. Tighten the towing hook securely threaded hole until its thread can no
using the jack handle. longer be seen.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. 2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
WARNING threaded hole for attaching the towing
. Do not use the towing hook hook.
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision. 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.

– CONTINUED –
9-16 In case of emergency/Towing

After towing, remove the towing hook from Rear tie-down holes: WARNING
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
WARNING used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
Do not use the towing hook except of the holes, possibly causing a
when towing your vehicle. dangerous situation.
Front tie-down hooks:
& Using a flat-bed truck

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the This is the best way to transport your
front bumper. vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1) Rear tie-down hole
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
The rear tie-down holes are located near position for AT and CVT models or the
each of the jack-up reinforcements. shift lever into “1st” for MT models.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
 In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released 9-17

properly with safety chains. Each safety running. Because the engine is Electronic parking brake – if
chain should be equally tightened and turned off, it will take greater
care must be taken not to pull the chains
the electronic parking brake
effort to operate the brake pedal
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. and steering wheel. cannot be released

& Towing with all wheels on the WARNING

ground CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
. If transmission failure occurs,
brake cannot be released, the
transport your vehicle on a flat-
electronic parking brake system
bed truck.
may malfunction. Driving in such
. Do not run the engine while being conditions may cause an unex-
towed using this method. Trans- pected accident. Contact your
mission damage could result if SUBARU dealer for inspection
the vehicle is towed with the as soon as possible.
engine running.
. You can release the electronic
. For AT and CVT models, the parking brake by using the elec-
traveling speed must be limited tronic parking brake release tool
to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and in case of an emergency. How-
the traveling distance to less ever, after releasing the electro-
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater nic parking brake by using the
WARNING speeds and distances, transport electronic parking brake release
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck. tool, contact your SUBARU deal-
. Never turn the ignition switch to er for inspection as soon as
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while 1. Release the parking brake and put the possible.
the vehicle is being towed be- transmission in neutral. . Release the electronic parking
cause the steering wheel and the 2. The ignition switch should be in the brake by using the electronic
direction of the wheels will be “Acc” position while the vehicle is being parking brake release tool on a
locked. towed. level road. Otherwise, the vehicle
. Remember that the brake booster 3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to may move, which could cause an
and power steering do not func- prevent damage to the vehicle. accident.
tion when the engine is not
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

. When releasing the electronic . If the cap cannot be removed, 3. Make sure that the brake system
parking brake by using the elec- contact your SUBARU dealer for warning light and the indicator light on
tronic parking brake release tool, inspection. the parking brake switch have turned off.
always perform the following . After releasing the electronic 4. Use tire stops under the tires to
items. parking brake by using the elec- prevent the vehicle from moving.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1” tronic parking brake release tool, 5. Take out the electronic parking brake
or “R” position (MT models). make sure that the cap is rein- release tool. Refer to “Maintenance tools”
– Shift the select lever in the “P” stalled to the parking brake re- F9-3.
position (AT and CVT models). lease device. If the cap is not
reinstalled, water or dust enters
– Use tire stops under the tires. the device and the device may
. When releasing the electronic malfunction.
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the ignition NOTE
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” It may be difficult to release the elec-
position. Otherwise, the electro- tronic parking brake by using the
nic parking brake system may electronic parking brake release tool.
operate and the electronic park- Have your SUBARU dealer release the
ing brake release tool may rotate electronic parking brake if necessary.
and unexpected accident may In the event that you cannot release the
occur. electronic parking brake by pulling the
electronic parking brake switch or by
depressing the accelerator pedal, you
CAUTION
can release the electronic parking brake
. Under certain weather conditions manually by using the electronic parking
(rain, snow, sandstorm, etc.), do brake release tool.
not release the electronic parking 1. Shift the shift lever in the “1” or “R”
brake by using the electronic position (MT models) or the select lever in
parking brake release tool. If the “P” position (AT and CVT models).
water or dust enters the device, 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
the device may malfunction. “OFF” position.
 In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released 9-19

wise. CAUTION
. Do not turn the electronic parking
brake release tool counterclock-
wise or turn it around more than
300 times. Doing so may result in
a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
. Do not use electric power tools to
turn the electronic parking brake
release tool. Doing so may result
in a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.

8. Break the white film and insert the

electronic parking brake release tool into
the parking brake release device.
9. Turn the electronic parking brake
release tool clockwise approximately 200
to 250 rotations.
10. To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is released, shift the shift lever or
the select lever to the “N” position, slightly
move the tire stops and have someone
push the vehicle slightly while you remain
6. Insert the electronic parking brake in the driver’s seat. If the vehicle moves,
release tool into the cap of the parking the electronic parking brake has been
brake release device. released.
7. Remove the cap of the parking brake 11. Readjust the tire stops.
release device by turning the electronic 12. Reinstall the cap to the parking brake
parking brake release tool counterclock- release device.
9-20 In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly

Access key – if access key & Locking and unlocking position.

does not operate properly 3. Depress the brake pedal.

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
1) Knob
If the locking/unlocking procedures, power 2) Mechanical key 4. Hold the access key with the buttons
switch procedures or engine start proce- facing you, and touch the push-button
While pulling the knob of the access key,
dures cannot be operated because of ignition switch with it.
take out the mechanical key.
strong radio signals in the surrounding When the communication between the
area or a low battery condition of the Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
mechanical key in the procedure de- access key and the vehicle is completed,
access key, perform the following proce- a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
dure. When the battery of the access key scribed in “Locking and unlocking from
the outside” F2-6. time, the status of the push-button ignition
is discharged, replace it with a new one. switch changes to either of the following.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key” NOTE . When the keyless access with push-
F11-54. button start system is deactivated:
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the mechanical key back to the “Acc”
access key. . Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
& Switching power button start system is deactivated, press
1. Apply the parking brake. the push-button ignition switch with the
2. Shift the select lever into the “P” brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
 In case of emergency/Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be opened 9-21

to “ON”. a chime (ding) will sound. At the same Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the
time, the push-button ignition switch turns
to the “Acc” or “ON” position.
trunk lid cannot be opened
NOTE
If the power does not switch even 5. Within 5 seconds after the push-button NOTE
though the above procedure was fol- ignition switch turns to the “Acc” or “ON”
position, while depressing the brake ped- If you open the trunk lid with a key
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
al, press the push-button ignition switch. while the alarm system is armed, the
dealer.
alarm system is triggered and the
& Starting engine NOTE vehicle’s horn sounds. In this case,
perform any of the following opera-
1. Apply the parking brake. If the engine does not start even tions.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P” though the above procedure was fol-
. Press any button on the remote
position. lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
transmitter.
dealer.
3. Depress the brake pedal. . Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
The trunk lid can also be opened using the
key.

4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
– CONTINUED –
9-22 In case of emergency/Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be unlocked

Rear gate (Outback) – if the Always use a flat-head screwdriver

rear gate cannot be unlocked or a similar tool.

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches, keyless access function
or the remote keyless entry system, you
can unlock it from inside the cargo area.

To open the trunk lid, insert the key into

the key cylinder and turn it clockwise.

3. To unlock the rear gate, turn the lever

to the right position using a flat-head
screwdriver or a similar tool.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.

CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
 In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident 9-23

If your vehicle is involved in Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:
an accident
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “Acc” or “OFF” position.
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. To minimize the risk of fire due to
fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an
airbag inflates upon collision, the system
stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Perform the following procedures to re-
start the engine after the system is
activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position.
2. Restart the engine.
 Appearance care

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 panel, console panel, switches, combination
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-6
Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6

10
10-2 Appearance care/Exterior care

Exterior care become tangled around it, dama- to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
ging the wiper arm and other with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
& Washing components. Ask the automatic remaining water off with a chamois or soft
car-wash operator not to let the cloth.
CAUTION brushes touch the wiper arm or ! Washing the underbody
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
. When washing the vehicle, the window glass with adhesive tape Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
brakes may get wet. As a result, before operating the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
the brake stopping distance will rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
be longer. To dry the brakes, derbody components, such as the exhaust
drive the vehicle at a safe speed NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
while lightly pressing the brake When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pedal to heat up the brakes. an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
. Do not wash the engine compart-
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
water enters the engine air in-
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
take, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
cause engine trouble or a mal- contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
function of the power steering. sion.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
. Do not use any organic solvents of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
when washing the surface of the the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
bulb assembly cover. However, if sunlight. the underbody.
a detergent with organic solvents Carefully flush the suspension and axle
is used to wash the cover sur- Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree parts, as they are particularly prone to
face, completely rinse off the sap, and bird droppings should be washed mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
detergent with water. Otherwise, off by using a light detergent, as required. sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
the cover surface may be da- If you use a light detergent, make certain
maged. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use CAUTION
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
cleaning agents should be promptly . Be careful not to damage brake
equipped with a rear wiper, auto-
flushed from the surface and not allowed hoses, sensor harnesses, and
matic car-wash brushes could
 Appearance care/Exterior care 10-3

other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) Never polish just the affected area, but
or more between the washer nozzle and include the surrounding area as well.
the vehicle. Always polish in only one direction. A & Cleaning aluminum wheels
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
. Do not wash the same area continu- mended. Never use a coarse-grained
ously. clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
compound. Coarser grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device.
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.
solvents on the surface of the bulb
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, assembly cover. However, if a polish
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of or wax with organic solvents is
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of applied to the cover surface, com-
the original luster and also quickens the
10-4 Appearance care/Corrosion protection

Corrosion protection vehicle remains for a long time, even of maintenance and treatment if you need
though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.
dry.
Your SUBARU has been designed and Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
built to resist corrosion. Special materials 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
and protective finishes have been used on sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
fine appearance, strength, and reliable tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
operation. because that could cause corrosion.
& To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
& Most common causes of Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
corrosion corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
The most common causes of corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
are: promptly after driving on any of the garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
following surfaces. be caused by dampness. If you wash the
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, . roads that have been salted to prevent vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
cavities, and other areas. them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
. mud, sand, or gravel snow, that can cause dampness.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
chips or minor accidents. After the winter has ended, it is recom- and/or in areas where road salts and other
mended that the underbody be given a corrosive materials are used, the door
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
when: very thorough washing.
latch should be inspected and lubricated
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, them are found to be rusted, they should
especially when temperatures range just be given an appropriate rust prevention
above freezing. treatment or should be replaced. Contact
3. Dampness in certain parts of the your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-5

Cleaning the interior CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar genuine leather.
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination materials. Doing so could damage
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use the surface and cause the color to & Synthetic leather upholstery
organic solvents.) deteriorate. The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Seat fabric or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
& Leather seat materials ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
The leather used by SUBARU is a high soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
quality natural product which will retain its off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
distinctive appearance and feel for many foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
years with proper care. leather materials may be used when
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly necessary.
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly. cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber Strong cleaning agents such as
cloth should be performed monthly, taking solvents, paint thinners, window
If the stain does not come out, try a care not to soak the leather or allow water cleaner or gasoline must never be
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use to penetrate the stitched seams. used on leather or synthetic interior
the cleaner on a hidden place and make A mild detergent suitable for cleaning materials. Doing so could damage
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. woolen fabrics may be used to remove the surface and cause the color to
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry deteriorate.
tions. cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
– CONTINUED –
10-6 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

& Climate control panel, audio & Monitor (if equipped)

panel, instrument panel, To clean the audio/navigation monitor,
console panel, switches, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
combination meter, and other cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
plastic surface clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
control panel, audio equipment, instru- any remaining detergent.
ment panel, center console, combination
CAUTION
meter panel, and switches.
. Do not spray neutral detergent
CAUTION directly onto the monitor. Doing
. Do not use organic solvents such so could damage the monitor’s
as paint thinners or gasoline, or components.
strong cleaning agents that con- . Do not wipe the monitor with a
tain those solvents. Doing so hard cloth. Doing so could
could damage the surface and scratch the monitor.
cause the color to deteriorate. . Do not use cleaning fluid that
. Do not use chemical solvents contains thinner, gasoline, or any
that contain silicone on the vehi- other volatile substance. Such
cle audio system, electrical com- cleaning fluid could erase the
ponents of the air-conditioner or lettering on the switches at the
any switches. If silicone adheres bottom of the monitor.
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
 Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19
Before checking or servicing in the engine Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-20
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20
When checking or servicing in the engine Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21
compartment (2.5 L models) ............................. 11-4 Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-21
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5 Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT
models).......................................................... 11-21
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5
Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21
Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-5
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Removing air intake duct.................................... 11-7
Pulling off the fender lining ................................ 11-7
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-23
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-9
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-23
2.5 L models ...................................................... 11-9
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-23
3.6 L models .................................................... 11-10
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-24
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-11
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-11
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-24
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-13
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-25
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-15
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-25
Cooling system ................................................ 11-15 11
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-16
Brake booster .................................................. 11-26
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-16 Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-26
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-17 Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-26
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-26
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-17
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-19 Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-27
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-27
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-19
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-27
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-19
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-27
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-28
Maintenance and service

Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-28 Fuses ................................................................ 11-42

Types of tires ................................................... 11-28 Installation of accessories .............................. 11-43
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-43
equipped)....................................................... 11-28 Headlight......................................................... 11-43
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-30 Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-45
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-30 Parking light .................................................... 11-46
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-32 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-46
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-32 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-47
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-33 Tail/Backup light (Outback) .............................. 11-49
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-33 License plate light ........................................... 11-50
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-34 Dome light....................................................... 11-51
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-34 Map light ......................................................... 11-52
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-35 Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-52
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-35 Door step light................................................. 11-53
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-37 Cargo area light (Outback) ............................... 11-53
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-37 Trunk light (Legacy) ......................................... 11-53
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-38 Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-53
Rear window wiper blade assembly Replacing battery............................................. 11-54
(Outback) ....................................................... 11-39 Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-54
Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ....... 11-39 Replacing battery of transmitter ....................... 11-56
Battery............................................................... 11-41
 Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-3

Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions . Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- cle. Remember that some of the
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be materials in the vehicle may be
are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. hazardous if improperly used or
tenance Booklet”. handled, for example, battery
If you perform maintenance and service acid.
For details about your maintenance sche- by yourself, you should familiarize yourself . Your vehicle should only be ser-
dule, read the separate “Warranty and with the information provided in this viced by persons fully competent
Maintenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and to do so. Serious personal injury
service for your SUBARU. may result to persons not experi-
Incorrect or incomplete service could enced in servicing vehicles.
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- . Always use the proper tools and
tion. Any problems caused by improper make certain that they are well
maintenance and service performed by maintained.
you are not eligible for warranty coverage. . Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
WARNING safety stands to support the
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle.
vehicle must NEVER be per- . Never keep the engine running in
formed on a single two-wheel a poorly ventilated area, such as
dynamometer or similar appara- a garage or other closed areas.
tus. Attempting to do so will . Do not smoke or allow open
result in transmission damage flames around the fuel or battery.
and in uncontrolled vehicle This will cause a fire.
movement and may cause an . Because the fuel system is under
accident or injuries to persons pressure, replacement of the fuel
nearby. filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your . Wear adequate eye protection to
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
11-4 Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

guard against getting oil or fluids fluid on hot engine components. & When checking or servicing
in your eyes. If something does This may cause a fire. in the engine compartment
get in your eyes, thoroughly . When the ignition switch is in the (2.5 L models)
wash them out with clean water. “ON” position, the cooling fan
. Do not tamper with the wiring of may operate suddenly even
the SRS airbag system or seat- when the engine is stopped. If
belt pretensioner system, or at- your body or clothes come into
tempt to take its connectors contact with a rotating fan, that
apart, as that may activate the could result in serious injury. To
system or it can render it inop- avoid risk of injury, perform the
erative. NEVER use a circuit following precautions.
tester for these wiring. If your – Models with push-button start
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- system:
sioner needs service, consult Always turn the push-button
your nearest SUBARU dealer. ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
& Before checking or servicing switch is turned off. Then take CAUTION
in the engine compartment the access key out from the
vehicle. . Do not contact the belt cover
WARNING while checking the components
– Models without push-button in the engine compartment.
. Always stop the engine and apply start system: Doing so may cause your hand
the parking brake to prevent the Always remove the key from to slip off the belt cover and
vehicle from moving. the ignition switch. result in an unexpected injury.
. Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing . Do not touch the oil filter until the
Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a engine has cooled down comple-
when the engine is running and remote engine start system tem- tely. Doing so may result in a
remain hot for some time after porarily place that system in the burn or other injury. Note that the
the engine is stopped. service mode to prevent it from oil filter becomes very hot when
unexpectedly starting the engine. the engine is running and re-
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other mains hot for some time after
 Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips 11-5

the engine has stopped. Maintenance tips ! Type B clips

Some clips and fender linings must be

& When checking or servicing removed before replacing the air cleaner
in the engine compartment elements or specific bulbs.
while the engine is running
& Removing and reinstalling
WARNING clips
A running engine can be dangerous. ! Removing clips
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, There are several types of clips used for
hair and tools away from the cooling your vehicle.
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings, ! Type A clips
watches and ties is advisable. 1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
– CONTINUED –
11-6 Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

! Type C clips ! Reinstalling clips

Type C clips
Type A clips Insert the clip without the center portion
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
first and then push the center portion of
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
the clip into the hole.
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

Type B clips
 Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-7

& Removing air intake duct Engine hood

To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.

3. Remove the clip from the fender lining.

Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the Refer to “Type B clips” F11-5.
air intake duct, then remove the air intake
duct. Refer to “Type A clips” F11-5.

& Pulling off the fender lining

It is necessary to pull off the fender lining 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
when replacing some bulbs. instrument panel.
1. Start the engine and turn the steering
wheel fully in the opposite direction of the
bulb to be replaced.
2. Stop the engine.

4. Pull off the fender lining.

– CONTINUED –
11-8 Maintenance and service/Engine hood

WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
 Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-9
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine compartment overview (page 11-23)
2) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
& 2.5 L models 3) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-24)
4) Fuse box (page 11-42)
5) Battery (page 11-41)
6) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)
7) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
8) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-16)
9) Radiator cap (page 11-16)
10) Engine oil filter (page 11-13)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-17)

– CONTINUED –
11-10 Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

& 3.6 L models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-23)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge
(page 11-21)
3) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
4) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-24)
5) Fuse box (page 11-42)
6) Battery (page 11-41)
7) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)
8) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-16)
10) Radiator cap (page 11-16)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
12) Air cleaner case (page 11-17)
 Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-11

Engine oil NOTE & Checking the oil level

. When the engine low oil level warn- Check the engine oil level at each fuel
ing light illuminates, have your vehicle stop.
inspected by your SUBARU dealer as 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
soon as possible. stop the engine. If you check the oil level
. The engine oil consumption rate is just after stopping the engine, wait a few
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
determined until the vehicle has tra- pan before checking the level.
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
Engine low oil level warning light (type A) der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
conditions, you should check the oil
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
time, and change the oil more fre-
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de-
2.5 L models
tails. 1) Oil level gauge
. If the oil consumption rate seems 2) Oil filler cap
abnormally high after the break-in 3) Oil filter
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Engine low oil level warning light (type B)

– CONTINUED –
11-12 Maintenance and service/Engine oil

3.6 L models 2.5 L models 3.6 L models

1) Oil level gauge 1) Full level 1) Full level
2) Oil filler cap 2) Low level 2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, Imp qt) from low level to full level Imp qt) from low level to full level
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly 4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
inserted until it stops. 5. 2.5 L models:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
3.6 L models:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
 Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-13

CAUTION NOTE 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do stop the engine.
. For 2.5 L models, be careful not not add any additional oil above the full 3. Remove the oil filler cap.
to touch the engine oil filter when level when the engine is cold.
removing the oil filler cap. Doing
so may result in a burn, a & Changing the oil and oil filter
pinched finger, or may cause
some other injury. CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
. If you change your own oil, be
recommended grade and vis-
sure to drain all the oil from the
cosity.
filter before disposal.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
. Do not dispose of used engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
by placing it in the trash, or by
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
pouring it onto the ground, into
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
sewers, or into any body of water.
engine oil gets on the exhaust
Check with your local govern- 2.5 L models
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
ment office for the proper dis-
. If the level gauge cannot be posal options available to you.
pulled out easily, twist the level
gauge right and left, then gently Change the oil and oil filter according to
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be the maintenance schedule in the “War-
injured by accidentally straining ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
yourself. The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil the maintenance schedule when driving
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil on dusty roads, when short trips are
through the filler neck. After pouring oil frequently made, or when driving in
into the engine, you must use the level extremely cold weather.
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct. 1. Warm up the engine by letting the 3.6 L models
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil. 4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
– CONTINUED –
11-14 Maintenance and service/Engine oil

the drain plug while the engine is still

Oil filter Part Amount of
warm. The used oil should be drained into Model color number rotation
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly. 2.5 L Blue 15208AA15A 7/8
models rotation
WARNING 3.6 L Black 15208AA031
3/4
models rotation
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
CAUTION
5. Wipe the seating surface and around . Never over tighten the oil filter
the drain plug with a clean cloth and because that can result in an oil
tighten it securely with a new sealing leak.
washer after the oil has completely 3.6 L models . Thoroughly wipe off any engine
drained out. oil that has spilled over the
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench. exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a If left unremoved, the oil could
thin coat of engine oil to the seal. catch fire.
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil 10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to (3.6 L models).
twist or damage the seal. 11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
indicated in the following table after the “Engine oil” F12-4. The necessary quan-
seal makes contact with the bottom of tity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that
engine. has been drained. The quantity of drained
oil differs slightly depending on the tem-
2.5 L models perature of the oil and the time the oil is
left flowing out. After refilling the engine
with oil, therefore, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
12. Start the engine and make sure that no
 Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-15

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber required to properly lubricate the en- Cooling system
seal and drain plug. gine.
13. Keep the engine idling until the engine
reaches the normal operating temperature & Synthetic oil WARNING
range, as indicated by the temperature
gauge on the combination meter. After You should use synthetic engine oil that Never attempt to remove the radia-
that, check the engine oil level again. For meets the same requirements given for tor cap until the engine has been
further details about the check procedure, conventional engine oil. When using shut off and has cooled down
refer to “Checking the oil level” F11-11. synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same completely. Since the coolant is
classification, viscosity and grade shown under pressure, you may suffer
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine serious burns from a spray of boil-
CAUTION oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil ing hot coolant when the cap is
and filter changing intervals shown in the removed.
Be careful not to spill engine oil Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad NOTE CAUTION
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom- . Vehicles are filled at the factory
& Recommended grade and mended engine oil for optimum engine with SUBARU Super Coolant that
viscosity performance. Conventional oil may be does not require the first change
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
CAUTION years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
Use only engine oil with the recom- other brand or type of coolant
mended grade and viscosity. during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
NOTE for any reason, use only
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects SUBARU Super Coolant.
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
provide better fuel economy. However, diluted with another brand or
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
– CONTINUED –
11-16 Maintenance and service/Cooling system

type, the maintenance interval is circuits” F12-10. If the fuse is not blown, “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
shortened to that of the mixing have the cooling system checked by your “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
coolant. SUBARU dealer. empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
. Do not splash the engine coolant as required.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
over painted parts. The alcohol sary, there may be a leak in the engine 3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
contained in the engine coolant cooling system. It is recommended that radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
may damage the paint surface. the cooling system and connections be the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness. are in the proper position.

& Cooling fan, hose and con- CAUTION

& Engine coolant
nections . Be careful not to spill engine
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling ! Checking the coolant level
coolant when adding it. If coolant
fan which is thermostatically controlled to touches the exhaust pipe, it may
operate when the engine coolant reaches cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a specific temperature. a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
it off.
even when the following conditions occur,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. . Do not splash the engine coolant
. The engine coolant temperature gauge over painted parts. The alcohol
exceeds the normal operating range (if contained in the engine coolant
equipped). Refer to “Temperature gauge may damage the paint surface.
(models with type A combination meter)”
F3-11.
! Changing the coolant
. The coolant temperature high warning
light blinks or illuminates in RED (if 1) “FULL” level mark It may be difficult to change the coolant.
equipped). Refer to “Coolant temperature 2) “LOW” level mark Have the coolant changed by your
low indicator light/Coolant temperature SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
high warning light” F3-16.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-42 and “Fuses and 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element 11-17

The coolant should be changed according Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner
to the maintenance schedule in the element
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Replace the air cleaner element according
WARNING
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
Do not operate the engine with the der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
air cleaner element removed. The air more frequently. It is recommended that
cleaner element not only filters you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.

CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-
ment.

– CONTINUED –
11-18 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

power steering system from the clip on

the right side of the air cleaner case.
2. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
3. To remove the connector cable from
the air cleaner case, remove the clip that
is attached to the connector cable from the
guide lug on the right side of the air
cleaner case.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp.
5. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
8. To install the air cleaner case, insert
the three projections on the air cleaner
case into the slits on the air cleaner case
cover.
9. Install the removed or loosened parts
in the reverse order of removal.

1) Hydraulic hose 6. Open the air cleaner case and remove

2) Connector the air cleaner element.
3) Connector cable
4) Clamp 7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
5) Clips and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1. Remove the hydraulic hose in the
 Maintenance and service/Spark plugs 11-19

Spark plugs Drive belts Manual transmission oil

It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is unnecessary to check the manual
plugs. It is recommended that you have the drive belt periodically because your transmission oil level. However, if neces-
the spark plugs replaced by your engine is equipped with an automatic belt sary, consult your SUBARU dealer for
SUBARU dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of inspection.
the belt should be done according to the
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty & Recommended grade and
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your viscosity
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”. Each oil manufacturer has its own base
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn, oils and additives. Never use different
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Recommended spark plugs brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
Refer to “Electrical system” F12-9.
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
11-20 Maintenance and service/Automatic transmission fluid

Automatic transmission fluid fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the

lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
& Checking the fluid level recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
! Checking the fluid level when the
level differs according to fluid temperature.
fluid is cold
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold When the fluid level has to be checked
fluid on the level gauge. without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
Though the fluid level can be checked level is between the lower level and upper
without warming up the fluid on the level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
“COLD” range, we recommend checking that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating 1) Yellow handle Be careful not to overfill.
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the CAUTION
fluid is hot Be careful not to spill automatic
Check the fluid level monthly. transmission fluid when adding it.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise If automatic transmission fluid
the temperature of the transmission fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may
up to normal operating temperature; 158 cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal. fire. If automatic transmission fluid
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
set the parking brake. wipe it off.
3. First shift the select lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed. 1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level

4. Pull out the level gauge and check the

 Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid 11-21

& Recommended fluid Continuously variable trans- Front differential gear oil
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8. mission fluid (AT and CVT models)
NOTE & Checking the oil level
There is no fluid level gauge. It is
Using any non-specified type of auto- unnecessary to check the continuously
matic transmission fluid could result in ! AT models
variable transmission fluid level. However,
damage inside the transmission. When if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
replacing the automatic transmission for inspection.
fluid, be sure to use the specified type.

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.

– CONTINUED –
11-22 Maintenance and service/Rear differential gear oil

! CVT models Rear differential gear oil

There is no oil level gauge. To check the
front differential gear oil level, we recom- There is no oil level gauge. To check the
mend that you consult your SUBARU rear differential gear oil level, we recom-
dealer for inspection. mend that you consult your SUBARU
& Recommended grade and dealer for inspection.
viscosity
& Recommended grade and
Each oil manufacturer has its own base viscosity
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to Each oil manufacturer has its own base
“Manual transmission, front differential oils and additives. Never use different
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7. brands together. For details, refer to
1) Upper level “Manual transmission, front differential
2) Lower level and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.

CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
 Maintenance and service/Power steering fluid 11-23

Power steering fluid power steering fluid touches the tank.

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
& Checking the fluid level smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If been run: Check that the oil level is
power steering fluid gets on the between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it the surface of the reservoir tank.
off. When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
The power steering fluid expands greatly “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
as its temperature rises; the fluid level surface of the reservoir tank.
differs according to fluid temperature. 3. If the fluid level is lower than the
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
different checking ranges for hot and cold mended fluid as necessary to bring the
fluids. level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
Check the power steering fluid level If the fluid level is extreme low, it may
monthly. indicate possible leakage. Consult your
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, SUBARU dealer for inspection.
and stop the engine.
WARNING & Recommended fluid
Be careful not to burn yourself Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If 2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
11-24 Maintenance and service/Brake fluid

Brake fluid Alcohol contained in the brake & Recommended brake fluid
fluid may damage them. Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
& Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid CAUTION
WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Never use different brands of brake
. Never let brake fluid contact your a fire. If brake fluid gets on the fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
eyes because brake fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
harmful to your eyes. If brake off. they are the same brand.
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with Check the fluid level monthly.
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
1) “MAX” level mark
CAUTION 2) “MIN” level mark

. When adding brake fluid, be care- Check the fluid level on the outside of the
ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
reservoir. the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
. Never splash the brake fluid over container.
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
 Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models) 11-25

Clutch fluid (MT models) Alcohol contained in the clutch & Recommended clutch fluid
fluid may damage them. Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
& Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid CAUTION
WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Never use different brands of clutch
Never let clutch fluid contact your a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
eyes because clutch fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid off. they are the same brand.
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.

CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If 1) “MAX” level mark
you suspect a problem, have the 2) “MIN” level mark
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
. When clutch fluid is added, be mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
careful not to allow any dirt into to “MAX” level mark.
the tank.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
. Never splash the clutch fluid over container.
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
11-26 Maintenance and service/Brake booster

Brake booster Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance
If the brake booster does not operate as Check the brake pedal free play and
described in the following procedure, have reserve distance according to the main-
it checked by your SUBARU dealer. tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
1. With the engine off, depress the brake Maintenance Booklet”.
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the & Checking the brake pedal
pedal travels should not vary. free play
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
approximately 1 minute then turn it off. mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
Depress the brake pedal several times to the distance between the upper surface of
check the brake booster. The brake the pedal pad and the floor.
booster operates properly if the pedal When the measurement is smaller than
stroke decreases with each depression. the specification, or when the pedal does
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
 Maintenance and service/Clutch pedal (MT models) 11-27

Clutch pedal (MT models) & Checking the clutch pedal Replacement of brake pad
free play and lining
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and CAUTION
Maintenance Booklet”.
If you continue to drive despite the
& Checking the clutch function scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
Check the clutch engagement and disen- result in the need for costly brake
gagement. rotor repair or replacement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal 1) 0.19 – 0.44 in (5 – 11 mm)
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
any sign of slippage. your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.

The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
– CONTINUED –
11-28 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake Tires and wheels replace all four tires.
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as ! Winter (snow) tires
soon as possible. & Types of tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on
You should be familiar with type of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However
& Breaking-in of new brake present on your vehicle. winter tires do not perform as well as
pads and linings summer tires and all season tires on roads
! All season tires
When replacing the brake pad or lining, other than snow-covered and icy roads.
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After The factory-installed tires on your new
replacement, the new parts must be vehicle are all season tires. & Tire pressure monitoring
broken in as follows: All season tires are designed to provide system (TPMS) (if equipped)
an adequate measure of traction, handling
! Brake pad and lining and braking performance in year-round The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 driving including snowy and icy road vides the driver with a warning message
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake conditions. However all season tires do by sending a signal from a sensor that is
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more not offer as much traction performance as installed in each wheel when tire pressure
times. winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
or on icy roads. ing system will activate only when the
! Parking brake lining
All season tires are identified by “ALL vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
The break-in maintenance for the parking not react immediately to a sudden drop in
brake linings should be performed at a SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall. tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
SUBARU dealer. caused by running over a sharp object).
! Summer tires
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
Summer tires are high-speed capability
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
tires best suited for highway driving under
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
dry conditions.
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
Summer tires are inadequate for driving warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
on slippery roads such as on snow- problem when adjusting the tire pressures
covered or icy roads. in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered pressures higher than those shown on the
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
use of winter (snow) tires. extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
When installing winter tires, be sure to every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-29

the temperature in the garage and the warning light to go off.

Adjusted pressure
temperature outside. By way of example, Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
the following table shows the required tire temperature
System resetting is necessary when the
pressures that correspond to various out- Front Rear wheels are changed (for example, a
side temperatures when the temperature 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
in the garage is 608F (15.68C). valves are installed on the newly fitted
38 37 wheels. Have this work performed by a
Example: 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
Tire size: P215/70R16 99S, P225/60R17 −108F ment.
40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
98T (−238C)
Standard tire pressures: It may not be possible to install TPMS
If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment
Adjusted pressure above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] wheels. Without four operational TPMS
temperature to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
Front Rear see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light
308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3) goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire in the instrument panel will illuminate
37 35 pressure warning light does not go off, the steadily after blinking for approximately
108F (−128C) (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4) tire pressure monitoring system may not one minute.
be functioning normally. In this event, go
−108F 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55) When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
(−238C) to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible. necessary to ensure continued normal
Example: operation of the tire pressure monitoring
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there-
Tire size: P205/60R16 91V, P215/50R17 tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed
90V, P225/50R17 93V, 225/45R18 91W the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer.
Standard tire pressures: the low tire pressure warning light, any
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) an increase in the outside air temperature
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the

– CONTINUED –
11-30 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/ . If you feel unusual vibration while
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light driving or find it difficult to steer the
ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking vehicle in a straight line, one of the
you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute, tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected. SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
ble. inspected.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection & Tire pressures and wear
driving straight ahead while gradu- Check on a daily basis that the tires are Maintaining the correct tire pressures
ally reducing speed. Then slowly free from serious damage, nails, and helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
pull off the road to a safe place. stones. At the same time, check the tires and is essential for good running perfor-
Otherwise an accident involving for abnormal wear. mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
serious vehicle damage and serious Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- the pressure of each tire (including the
personal injury could occur. ately if you find any problem. spare) at least once a month (for example,
If this light still illuminates while during a fuel stop) and before any long
driving after adjusting the tire pres- NOTE journey.
sure, a tire may have significant . When the wheels and tires strike
damage and a fast leak that causes curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire rough surface, they can suffer damage
as soon as possible. that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
When a spare tire is mounted or a This type of damage does not become
wheel rim is replaced without the evident until time has passed. Try not
original pressure sensor/transmitter to drive over curbs, potholes or on
being transferred, the low tire pres- other rough surfaces. If doing so is
sure warning light will illuminate unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
steadily after blinking for approxi- down to a walking pace or less, and
mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as
the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are
four road wheels. Contact your not pressed against the curb when you Check the tire pressures when the tires
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible park the vehicle. are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-31

the tire pressures to the values shown on trollability and ride comfort, and they . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
the tire placard. The tire placard is located cause the tires to wear abnormally. worn at shoulders)
on the door pillar on the driver’s side. . Correct tire pressure (tread worn
Driving even a short distance warms up evenly)
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
NOTE sumption is also higher.
. The air pressure in a tire increases Roadholding is good, and steering is
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm. fuel consumption is also lower.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).

WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

– CONTINUED –
11-32 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread & Wheel balance & Wear indicators
worn in center) Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation. 1) New tread
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire 2) Worn tread
magnifies the effects of road surface CAUTION 3) Tread wear indicator
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage. Loss of correct wheel alignment Each tire incorporates a tread wear
causes the tires to wear on one side indicator, which becomes visible when
WARNING and reduces the vehicle’s running the depth of the tread grooves decreases
stability. Contact your SUBARU to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
Driving at high speeds with exces- dealer if you notice abnormal tire replaced when the tread wear indicator
sively low tire pressures can cause wear. appears as a solid band across the tread.
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- WARNING
crease in temperature could cause NOTE
tread separation, and destruction of When a tire’s tread wear indicator
The suspension system is designed to becomes visible, the tire is worn
the tires. The resulting loss of hold each wheel at a certain alignment
vehicle control could lead to an beyond the acceptable limit and
(relative to the other wheels and to the must be replaced immediately. With
accident. road) for optimum straight-line stability a tire in this condition, driving at
and cornering performance. high speeds in wet weather can
 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-33

cause the vehicle to hydroplane. the direction mark facing forward.

The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident. & Tire rotation

NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
ularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec- maximize the life of each tire and ensure
tional tires that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
1) Front rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the applicable illustration each time they
are rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
Example of tire rotation direction mark rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
1) Front make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
If the tire has a rotation direction specifica-
tion, the tire rotation direction mark is After driving approximately 600 miles
placed on its sidewall. (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
When you install a tire that has the tire and retighten any nut that has become
rotation direction mark, install the tire with loose.

– CONTINUED –
11-34 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

& Tire replacement WARNING radial tires together with belted

The wheels and tires are important and bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; . When replacing a tire, you must Doing so can dangerously re-
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The use a tire that is of the same size, duce controllability, resulting in
tires fitted as standard equipment are circumference, speed symbol an accident.
optimally matched to the characteristics and load index as the original
of the vehicle and were selected to give tires listed on the tire placard.
the best possible combination of running Using tires of other sizes, cir- & Wheel replacement
performance, ride comfort, and service cumferences or constructions When replacing wheels due, for example,
life. It is essential for every tire to have a may result in severe mechanical to damage, make sure the replacement
size and construction matching those damage to the drive train of your wheels match the specifications of the
shown on the tire placard and to have a vehicle and may affect ride, wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
speed symbol and load index matching handling, braking, speedometer/ ment. Replacement wheels are available
those shown on the tire placard. odometer calibration, and clear- from SUBARU dealers.
ance between the body and tires.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts It also may be dangerous and WARNING
from controllability, ride comfort, braking lead to loss of vehicle control.
performance, speedometer accuracy and . You must install four tires that are Use only those wheels that are
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- of the same size, circumference, specified for your vehicle. Wheels
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- construction, manufacturer, not meeting specifications could
priately changes the vehicle’s ground brand (tread pattern), degree of interfere with brake caliper opera-
clearance. wear, speed symbol and load tion and may cause the tires to rub
All four tires must be the same in terms of index. Mixing tires of different against the wheel well housing dur-
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- types, sizes or degrees of wear ing turns. The resulting loss of
struction, and size. You are advised to can result in damage to the vehicle control could lead to an
replace the tires with new ones that are vehicle’s power train. Use of accident.
identical to those fitted as standard equip- different types or sizes of tires
ment. can also dangerously reduce
controllability and braking per-
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU formance and can lead to an
recommends replacing all four tires at accident.
the same time.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
 Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels 11-35

Aluminum wheels Windshield washer fluid

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
CAUTION
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety. Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
. When any of the wheels is removed
damage.
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts, Windshield washer fluid warning light
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the (type B)
wheel. If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp but the windshield washer fluid warning
protrusions or curbs. light illuminates or the supply of washer
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or fluid runs out, add washer fluid in the tank.
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A)

– CONTINUED –
11-36 Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid

side temperature. If the concen-

Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
30% 10.48F (−128C) windshield and obstruct your
50% −48F (−208C) view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
100% −498F (−458C)
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
CAUTION restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
Never use engine coolant as washer freeze additive. Washer fluids
fluid because it could cause paint containing non-methanol anti-
damage. freeze agents should be used
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then only if they provide cold weather
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark In order to prevent freezing of washer protection without damaging
on the tank. fluid, check the freezing temperatures in your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield the table above when adjusting the fluid or washer system.
washer fluid is unavailable use clean concentration to the outside temperature.
water. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
In areas where water freezes in winter, a different concentration from the one
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer used previously, purge the old fluid from
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid the piping between the reservoir tank and
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% washer nozzles by operating the washer
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
perature varies according to how much it the concentration of the fluid remaining in
is diluted, as indicated in the following the piping is too low for the outside
table. temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.

CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-37

Replacement of wiper blades . Return the passenger-side wiper & Windshield wiper blade as-
arm to its original position before sembly
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and streak- Otherwise, the passenger-side
ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the wiper assembly and driver-side
streaks after operating the windshield wiper assembly will touch each
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, other, possibly resulting in
clean the outer surface of the windshield scratches.
(or rear window) and the wiper blades . When returning the raised wipers
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral to the original positions, return
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After the wipers slowly on the wind-
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper shield by hand. Returning the
blades with clean water. The windshield is wipers from the detached posi-
clean if beads do not form when you rinse tions by the spring operation
the windshield with water. might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind- 1) Open the cover
CAUTION shield. 2) Pull down the wiper blade
. Do not clean the wiper blades If you cannot eliminate the streaking even 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
with gasoline or a solvent, such after following this method, replace the opening the cover and pulling it down in
as paint thinner or benzine. This wiper blades using the following proce- the direction shown in the illustration.
will cause deterioration of the dures. 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper blades. wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
. When you wish to raise the 4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
passenger-side wiper arm, first lower it in position.
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
– CONTINUED –
11-38 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

& Windshield wiper blade rub- grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
ber rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

1) Support with two metal spines, remove the metal 1) Claw
spines from the old blade rubber and 2) Stopper
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
install them in the new blade rubber.
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the 4. Be sure to position the claws at the
support. end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.

3. Align the claws of the support with the

 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-39

& Rear window wiper blade & Rear window wiper blade
assembly (Outback) rubber (Outback)
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun- support.
terclockwise.

– CONTINUED –
11-40 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the plastic support. the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided assembly into place.
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support
 Maintenance and service/Battery 11-41

Battery remove rings, metal watchbands, distilled water.

and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is . Keep everyone including children
highly flammable and explosive. away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion . Charge the battery in a well-
does occur, wear eye protection ventilated area.
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals, and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
. Do not let battery fluid contact known to the State of California
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- to cause cancer and reproductive
cause battery fluid is a corrosive harm. Batteries also contain
acid. If battery fluid gets on your other chemicals known to the
skin or in your eyes, immediately State of California to cause can-
flush the area with water thor- cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
CAUTION
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally Never use more than 10 amperes
swallowed, immediately drink a when charging the battery because
large amount of milk or water, it will shorten battery life.
and seek medical attention im-
mediately. It is unnecessary to periodically check the
. To lessen the risk of sparks, battery fluid level or periodically refill with
11-42 Maintenance and service/Fuses

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes. The other one (main fuse box) is housed The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
in the engine compartment. box in the engine compartment.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s The spare fuses are stored in the main 1) Good
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out. fuse box cover in the engine compart- 2) Blown
ment. If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
 Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories 11-43

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs

replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ Always consult your SUBARU dealer
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical before installing fog lights or any other
WARNING
accessories. electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
2. Remove the cover. accessories may cause the electronic Bulbs may become very hot while
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. system to malfunction if they are incor- illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
Look at the back side of each fuse box rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the lights and wait until the
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits” the vehicle. We recommend that you bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
F12-10. install only genuine SUBARU accessories the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
on your vehicle.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-14.

& Headlight
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. CAUTION
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same Halogen headlight bulbs become
rating. very hot while in use. If you touch
6. If the same fuse blows again, this the bulb surface with bare hands or
indicates that its system has a problem. greasy gloves, fingerprints or
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs. grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger-
– CONTINUED –
11-44 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

prints or grease on the bulb surface, counterclockwise.

wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.

NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs 5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
3. Disconnect the electrical connector. spring securely.
1. Pull off the fender lining. For details, 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
refer to “Pulling off the fender lining” F11- 7. Install the bulb cover.
7.

4. Remove the retainer spring.

8. After replacing the bulb, reattach the

2. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it fender lining.
 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-45
! High beam light bulbs
& Front turn signal light
1. Remove the air intake duct (right-hand
side). For the method to remove the air NOTE
intake duct, refer to “Removing air intake It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
duct” F11-7. We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector 5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
from the bulb. 6. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks. 1. Turn over the protective cover of the
engine compartment.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).

– CONTINUED –
11-46 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

partment.

& Parking light

2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and 1. Remove the clips.

pull it out.
3. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one. 1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.

& Front fog light (if equipped)

NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary. 2. Turn over the mud guard.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. After replacing the bulbs, reposition

the protective cover of the engine com-
 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-47

& Rear combination lights

! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.

1. Turn the knobs of the cover 90

degrees counterclockwise to remove the
cover.
Legacy Outback
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.

– CONTINUED –
11-48 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

! Outback

1) Stop/tail and rear side marker light 4. Slide the rear combination light as-
2) Rear turn signal light sembly straight rearward and remove it
3) Backup light 1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6. from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear 2. Remove the cover.
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-49
& Tail/Backup light (Outback)

1) Tail and rear side marker light 8. Reinstall the rear combination light
2) Stop light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part 1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
3) Rear turn signal light of the combination light assembly securely light cover as shown in the illustration, and
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear to each holder of the vehicle side. pry the light cover off from the rear gate
combination light assembly by turning it trim.
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.

9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

10. Reinstall the side cover.
– CONTINUED –
11-50 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& License plate light

! Legacy
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1) Backup light 1. Open the trunk. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
2) Tail light and remove it.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise 4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
and remove it. replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

2. Remove the trunk trim lining by re-

moving the 10 clips and the trunk trim
handle.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-51

! Outback 4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens.
6. Tighten the mounting screws.

& Dome light

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

1. Remove the mounting screws using a its ends are aligned vertically.
Phillips screwdriver. 3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
2. Remove the lens. remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of 5. Reinstall the lens.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

– CONTINUED –
11-52 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

& Map light straight downward to remove it.

3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.

& Vanity mirror light

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of 3. Install a new bulb.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. 4. Reinstall the lens.

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-53

& Door step light 4. Reinstall the lens. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
& Cargo area light (Outback) 4. Reinstall the lens.

& Trunk light (Legacy)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
1. Push both sides of the light cover, and
then remove the cover by pulling it out.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover.

& Other bulbs

Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. necessary.
3. Install a new bulb.
11-54 Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

Replacing battery same or equivalent type of the & Replacing battery of access
battery. key
The access key / transmitter battery may . Batteries shall not be exposed to
be discharged under the following condi- excessive heat such as bright CAUTION
tions. sunlight, fire or the like.
When removing or fitting the access
. The operation of the keyless access
key cover, make sure that the plastic
function is unstable NOTE part does not come off or become
. The operating distance of the remote misaligned.
. Replace only with the same or
keyless entry system is unstable
equivalent type of battery recom-
. The transmitter does not operate prop- mended by the manufacturer. Battery: Button battery CR1632
erly when used within the standard dis- . Dispose of used batteries according
tance to the local laws.
Replace the battery with a new one. . Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
CAUTION Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on . It is recommended that the battery
or in the access key/transmitter should be replaced by a SUBARU
when replacing battery. dealer.
. Be careful not to damage the . Use a new battery.
printed circuit board in the ac- . After replacing the battery, confirm
cess key/transmitter when repla- that the access key/transmitter func-
cing the battery. tions properly.
1) Knob
. Be careful not to allow children to 2) Mechanical key
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could 1. Take out the mechanical key.
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
 Maintenance and service/Replacing battery 11-55

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with 5. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap (A) insulating tape, and insert it between the side facing upward as shown in the figure.
to remove the cover. battery and the board (B). Take out the Attach the cover firmly.
battery as shown in the figure.

3. Remove the board in the cover (B).

Place it with the battery side facing
upward.
– CONTINUED –
11-56 Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

& Replacing battery of trans-

mitter

3. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 5. Replace the old battery with a new
1. Remove the screw on the key head. battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)
making sure to install the new battery with
the negative (−) side facing up.
6. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
7. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
8. Reinstall the screw on the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
4. Open the transmitter case by releasing six times to synchronize the unit.
the hooks.
2. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
 Specifications

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Tires.................................................................. 12-9

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4 compartment ................................................. 12-10
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Fuse panel located in the engine
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-7 compartment ................................................. 12-12
Fluids ................................................................ 12-8 Bulb chart......................................................... 12-14
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-8 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-17
Electrical system................................................ 12-9

12
12-2 Specifications/Specifications

Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions
in (mm)
Legacy Outback
Item
2.5 L 3.6 L 2.5 L 3.6 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type MT CVT AT MT CVT AT
Overall length 187.2 (4,755) 189.0 (4,800)
Overall width 71.7 (1,820) 71.7 (1,820)
Overall height
59.3 (1,505) 66.1 (1,680)*2
65.7 (1,670)*3
Wheelbase 108.3 (2,750) 107.9 (2,740)
Tread Front 61.6 (1,565)*4*5 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550)
61.0 (1,550)*6
Rear 61.8 (1,570)*4*5 61.8 (1,570) 61.0 (1,550)
*6
61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*1 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

*2: Measured when roof rails are used as crossbars
*3: Measured when roof rails are not used as crossbars
*4: Models with 16-inch wheel tires
*5: Models with 17-inch wheel tires
*6: Models with 18-inch wheel tires
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
 Specifications/Specifications 12-3

& Engine
Engine model FB25 EZ36D
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo) (3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152.4 (2,498) 221.5 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.7 6 3.5 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–6–3–2–5–4

& Fuel
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications/Specifications

& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.

NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
 Specifications/Specifications 12-5

! 2.5 L models

Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. – Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
or

API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC (International Lubricant

tute) classification SM with the Standardization and Approval
Committee) GF-4 or GF-5, which
words “ENERGY CONSER- can be identified with the ILSAC
VING” or SN with the words certification mark (Starburst
“RESOURCE CONSERVING” mark)

– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications/Specifications

! 3.6 L models

Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30 – Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
conventional motor oil, however 5W-30
synthetic may be used for optimum – Changing the oil and oil filter:
engine performance. 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,

10W-30 or 10W-40 conventional oil
may be used if replenishment is
needed but should be changed to 5W-
30 synthetic oil at the next oil change.
or

API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC (International Lubricant

tute) classification SM with the Standardization and Approval
Committee) GF-4 or GF-5, which
words “ENERGY CONSER- can be identified with the ILSAC
VING” or SN with the words certification mark (Starburst
“RESOURCE CONSERVING” mark)
 Specifications/Specifications 12-7

& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT models) Rear differential gear oil
. SUBARU Extra MT*3
Oil grade . API classification GL-5 API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*4

SAE viscosity No. and ap- —

plicable temperature

3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 CVT models 1.43 US qt (1.35 liters, 1.19 Imp qt)
Oil capacity*1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
AT models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

Remarks*2 “Manual transmission oil” “Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT models)” F11- “Rear differential gear oil” F11-22
F11-19 21

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of manual transmission oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications/Specifications

& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Automatic transmission fluid (5AT · SUBARU ATF “Automatic transmission fluid”
models) · IDEMITSU ATF HP 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt) F11-20
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer. 13.1 US qt (12.4 liters, 10.9 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
fluid (CVT models) mission fluid” F11-21
Power steering fluid · SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP 0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt) · “Power steering” F7-29
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic · “Power steering fluid” F11-23
Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 “Brake fluid” F11-24
brake fluid –

Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
brake fluid – 25

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
2.5 L models MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
CVT models 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt) SUBARU Super Coolant
3.6 L models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-15.
 Specifications/Specifications 12-9

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23R (12V-52AH)
Alternator 2.5 L models 12V-110A
3.6 L models 12V-130A
Spark plugs 2.5 L models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
3.6 L models SILFR6C11 (NGK)

& Tires
Tire size P205/60R16 P215/70R16 P225/60R17 P215/50R17 P225/50R17 P225/45R18
91V 99S 98T 90V 93V 91V
Wheel size 16 6 6 1/2J 17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J 18 6 7 1/2J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa)
Temporary spare Size T135/80R16 T145/80R17 T135/80R16 T135/70R17 T135/80R16
tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1*2

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.

& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
12-10 Specifications/Fuses and circuits

Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
1 15A . Trailer hitch connector
2 20A . Rear power window
(left side)
3 20A . Power window (driver’s
side)
4 7.5A . Navigation system
. Front wiper deicer
. Moonroof
5 7.5A . Combination meter
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
7 7.5A . Integrated unit
8 15A . Stop light
9 15A . Seat heater relay
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
12 15A . Integrated unit
. Automatic transmission
unit
 Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-11

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
13 20A . Socket 28 Empty
14 10A . Integrated unit 29 20A . Power window
(passenger’s side)
15 20A . Rear power window
(right side) 30 Empty
16 Empty 31 7.5A . Automatic air condi-
tioner unit
17 15A . Front wiper deicer
32 7.5A . Steering lock
18 7.5A . Backup light
33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle dynamics
19 7.5A . Electronic parking control unit
brake unit . Power steering
. Hill Holder system unit
20 10A . Accessory power outlet
21 7.5A . Starter relay
22 15A . Air conditioner
23 Empty
24 15A . Audio
. Navigation system
25 15A . SRS airbag system
26 7.5A . Main fan
27 Empty

– CONTINUED –
12-12 Specifications/Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
1 7.5A . CVT control unit
2 7.5A . Horn (right side)
3 7.5A . Horn (center)
4 15A . Low beam headlight
(right side)
5 15A . Low beam headlight
(left side)
6 20A . Fuel pump
7 10A . High beam headlight
(left side)
8 10A . High beam headlight
(right side)
9 20A . Continuously variable
transmission control
unit
10 7.5A . Alternator
11 10A . EyeSight system
12 20A . Moonroof
13 7.5A . Engine control unit

A) Main fuse
 Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-13

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
14 15A . Engine control unit 29 25A . Audio unit
15 15A . Ignition coil 30 25A . Sub fan
16 15A . Engine control unit 31 25A . Main fan
17 15A . Engine control unit 32 30A . ABS/Vehicle dynamics
control unit
18 10A . Automatic transmission
control unit 33 10A . Fog light (right side)
19 10A . Illumination 34 10A . Fog light (left side)
20 10A . Rear combination light 35 20A . Back-up (body control
unit)
21 15A . Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher (body control
unit)
22 20A . Door lock (body control
unit)
23 15A . Rear wiper
. Rear washer
24 10A . Front washer
25 30A . Front wiper
26 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
. Front wiper deicer
27 15A . Blower fan
28 15A . Blower fan
12-14 Specifications/Bulb chart

Bulb chart

NOTE
Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
 Specifications/Bulb chart 12-15

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 (9005)
2) Parking light 12V-5W W5W
3) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7
4) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
5) Map light 12V-8W
6) Dome light 12V-8W
7) Door step light 12V-5W W5W
8) Front fog light
Legacy 12V-19W H16
Outback 12V-55W H11
9) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W
10) Vanity mirror light 14V-1.4W HTU
11) Cargo area light 12V-13W
12) Backup light (Outback) 12V-16W W16W (921)
13) Tail light (Outback) 12V-5W W5W
14) Licence plate light (Outback) 12V-5W W5W
15) Rear turn signal light (Outback) 12V-21W WY21W

– CONTINUED –
12-16 Specifications/Bulb chart

Wattage Bulb No. WARNING

16) Stop light (Outback) 12V-21W W21W Bulbs may become very hot while
17) Tail and rear side marker light illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
(Outback) 12V-5W W5W
turn off the lights and wait until the
18) Trunk light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
19) Tail light (Legacy) 12V-5W W21/5W the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
20) Stop/Tail and rear side marker light
(Legacy) 12V-21/5W W21/5W
CAUTION
21) License plate light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W
22) Backup light (Legacy) 12V-16W W16W (921) Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
23) Rear turn signal light (Legacy) 12V-21W WY21W
a bulb of different wattage could
A) High-mounted stop light (Outback) – – result in a fire.
B) High-mounted stop light (Legacy) – –
C) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – –
 Specifications/Vehicle identification 12-17

Vehicle identification 1) Emission control label

2) Vehicle identification number
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading

Tire information .................................................. 13-2 on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4 Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9 Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10 Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-15
capacities ...................................................... 13-13

13
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.

For U.S.A. Tire information Example:

The following information has been & Tire labeling

compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These marking ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with (4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating De-
selecting the proper tire for your scriptions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break- tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements. designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-3

Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
maged, repaired, retreaded, week, starting with “01” to represent
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
or otherwise altered from the first full week of the calendar
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
their original condition. If year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
treaded, or otherwise al- means the 1st week of 2001.
Load indices apply only to the
tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle table for original equipment The following makings are also
does not mean the vehicle can tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated speeds.
! Maximum permissible infla-
load. tion pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “350 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 ! Vehicle placard

The load rating at the maximum NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
permissible weight load for this tire. STER”
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI) (UTQG)
MAX. PRESS.” For details, refer to “Uniform tire
WARNING quality grading standards” F13-14.

Maximum load rating applies & Recommended tire inflation

only to the tire, not to the pressure
vehicle. Putting a load rated ! Recommended cold tire infla-
tire on any vehicle does not tion pressure
mean the vehicle can be The vehicle placard is affixed to the
For the recommended cold tire driver’s side B-pillar.
loaded up to the tire’s rated inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
load. tires, refer to “Tires” F12-9. Example:

! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-5

The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires the rim.
inflation pressure on each tire at and increases the tire pressures. . Bead separation
maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected A breakdown of the bond between
seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is components in the bead.
mation. best to check tire pressure out- . Bias ply tire
! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle. A pneumatic tire in which the ply
of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air cords that extend to the beads are
Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire laid at alternate angles substantially
sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not less than 90 degrees to the center-
the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a line of the tread.
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure. . Carcass
crease in temperature could cause The tire structure, except tread and
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the
. Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
accident. those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes,
pressure to achieve proper in- . Cold tire pressure
power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation
and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in-
pressure of each tire (including the standing for three hours or more.
stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not).
before any long journey. Check the The strands forming the plies in the
. Bead
tire pressures when the tires are tire.
The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
adjust the tire pressures to the The parting of cords from adjacent
– CONTINUED –
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

rubber compounds. . Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation

. Cracking (1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire.
Any parting within the tread, side- whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight
wall, or inner liner of the tire or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of:
extending to cord material. and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight
. Curb weight is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight
standard equipment including the wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight
(2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and pressure
of an asymmetrical tire that has
coolant, and if so equipped, air
a particular side that must al- The maximum cold inflation pres-
conditioning and additional weight
ways face outward when mount- sure to which a tire may be inflated.
optional engine.
ing on a vehicle. . Measuring rim
. Extra load tire
. Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
A tire designed to operate at higher
A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
loads and higher inflation pressure
turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
than the corresponding standard
on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
tire.
pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
. Groove
. Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
The space between two adjacent
The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
tread ribs.
rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
. Innerliner
pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
face of a tubeless tire that contains
The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the
the inflating medium within the tire.
sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section.
. Innerliner separation
. Maximum load rating . Open splice
The parting of the innerliner from
The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread,
cord material in the carcass.
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-7

sidewall, or innerliner that extends mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan-
to cord material. provides the traction and contains dard tire.
. Outer diameter the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim
The overall diameter of an inflated load. A metal support for a tire or a tire
new tire. . Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the
. Overall width The combined weight of those tire beads are seated.
The linear distance between the installed regular production options . Rim diameter
exteriors of the sidewalls of an weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
inflated tire, including elevations excess of those standard items . Rim size designation
due to labeling, decorations, or which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width.
protective bands or ribs. considered in curb weight or acces- . Rim type designation
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty The industry of manufacturer’s des-
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, ignation for a rim by style or code.
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special . Rim width
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. Nominal distance between rim
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire flanges.
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply . Section width
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are The linear distance between the
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to exteriors of the sidewalls of an
cords. the centerline of the tread. inflated tire, excluding elevations
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- due to labeling, decoration, or
A parting of rubber compound sure protective bands.
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- . Sidewall
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. That portion of a tire between the
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire tread and bead.
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher . Sidewall separation
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- The parting of the rubber com-
– CONTINUED –
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

pound from the cord material in the . Vehicle maximum load on the
sidewall. tire
. Test rim Load on an individual tire that is
The rim on which a tire is fitted for determined by distributing to each
testing, and it may be any rim listed axle its share of the maximum
as appropriate for use with that tire. loaded vehicle weight and dividing
. Tread by two.
That portion of a tire that comes . Vehicle normal load on the tire
into contact with the road. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread rib determined by distributing to each
A tread section running circumfer- axle its share of the curb weight,
entially around a tire. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread separation cupant weight (distributed in accor-
Pulling away of the tread from the dance with Table 1 that is ap-
tire carcass. pended to the end of this section)
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual The fixture used to hold the wheel
indication of the degrees of wear of and tire assembly securely during
the tread. testing.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-9

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for & Tire care – maintenance and
various designated seating capacities safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a tires are free from serious damage,
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle nails, and stones. At the same time,
occupants
check the tires for abnormal wear.
2 through 4 2 2 in front. . Inspect the tire tread regularly
2 in front, 1 in second and replace the tires before their
5 through 10 3 seat. tread wear indicators become visi-
2 in front, 1 in second ble. When a tire’s tread wear
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in indicator becomes visible, the tire
fourth seat. is worn beyond the acceptable limit
2 in front, 2 in second and must be replaced immediately.
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in With a tire in this condition, driving
fourth seat. at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.

– CONTINUED –
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

. To maximize the life of each tire driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the ! Calculating total and load ca-
and ensure that the tires wear statement “The combined weight pacities varying seating con-
uniformly, it is best to rotate the of occupants and cargo should figurations
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” Calculate the available load capa-
Rotating the tires involves switch- on your vehicle’s placard. city as shown in the following
ing the front and rear tires on the The vehicle placard also shows examples:
right-hand side of the vehicle and seating capacity of your vehicle. Example 1A
similarly switching the front and The total load capacity includes the
rear tires on the left-hand side of total weight of driver and all pas-
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept sengers and their belongings, any
on its original side of the vehicle.) cargo, any optional equipment such
Replace any damaged or unevenly as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
worn tire at the time of rotation. carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
After tire rotation, adjust the tire a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
pressures and make sure the wheel can be calculated by the following
nuts are correctly tightened. For method.
information about the tightening
torque and tightening sequence Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat weight of occupants + total weight
Vehicle capacity weight of the
tires” F9-6. of optional equipment + tongue
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
load of a trailer (if applicable))
& Vehicle load limit – how to is indicated on the vehicle placard
determine For towing capacity information and with the statement “The combined
weight limits, refer to “Trailer tow- weight of occupants and cargo
The load capacity of your vehicle is
ing” F8-20. should never exceed 363 kg or
determined by weight, not by avail-
800 lbs”.
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the For example, if the vehicle has one
vehicle placard attached to the
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-11

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B 2. Calculate the available load ca-
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250 pacity.
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.

3. The total weight now exceeds

2. Calculate the available load ca- the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
pacity by subtracting the total kg), so the cargo weight must be
weight from the vehicle capacity reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg). For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the Example 2A
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

– CONTINUED –
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

is indicated on the vehicle placard 2. Calculate the available load ca- vehicle (bringing the number of
with the statement “The combined pacity. occupants to three), and a child
weight of occupants and cargo restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
should never exceed 363 kg or kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
800 lbs”. child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
For example, the vehicle has one
1. Calculate the total weight.
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). Example 2B
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-13

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Heavy and/or high-mounted
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each loads could increase the risk of
axle’s GAWR are shown on the rollover.
vehicle certification label affixed to . Stopping distance will increase.
the driver’s door. . Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
3. The total weight now exceeds The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only other parts of the body could break
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10 or experience accelerated wear
kg), so the cargo weight must be the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi- that will shorten vehicle life.
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more. . Tires could fail.
cle’s suspension, axles and other
. Tread separation could occur.
& Determining compatibility of parts of the body.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the
ties vehicle cannot necessarily be & Steps for Determining Cor-
The sum of four tires’ maximum loaded up to the tire’s maximum rect Load Limit
load ratings must exceed the max- load rating on the tire sidewall. 1. Locate the statement “The com-
imum loaded vehicle weight bined weight of occupants and
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the & Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on cargo should never exceed XXX
maximum load ratings of two front kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
tires and of two rear tires must handling and stopping and
on tires placard.
exceed each axle’s maximum 2. Determine the combined weight
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle of the driver and passengers that
equipment tires are designed to will be riding in your vehicle.
fulfill those conditions. and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and 3. Subtract the combined weight of
The maximum loaded vehicle the driver and passengers from
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle possibly result in severe personal
injury. XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
– CONTINUED –
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

4. The resulting figure equals the Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require-
available amount of cargo and standards ments in addition to these grades.
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of
your vehicle, the amount of avail- traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con-
able cargo and luggage load capa- tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6 in making an informed choice in the government test course.
150) = 650 lbs). purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150
5. Determine the combined weight Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1-
of luggage and cargo being loaded applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern-
on the vehicle. That weight may not tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100.
safely exceed the available cargo mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
and luggage load capacity calcu- depends upon the actual conditions
lated in Step 4. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
of their use, however, and may
perature A
6. If your vehicle will be towing a depart significantly from the norm
trailer, load from your trailer will be The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits,
transferred to your vehicle. Consult pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in
this manual to determine how this ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate.
reduces the available cargo and apply to deep tread, winter type
luggage load capacity of your ve- snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C
hicle. ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
All passenger car tires must con-
 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-15

cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger (USA)
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a
WARNING represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
ahead braking traction tests, WARNING Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
and does not include accel- addition to notifying Subaru of
eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
teristics. that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
& Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure.
heat and its ability to dissipate heat in individual problems between
when tested under controlled con- you, your dealer, or Subaru of
ditions on a specified indoor labora- America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
tory test wheel. Sustained high you may call the Vehicle Safety
temperature can cause the material Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
of the tire to degenerate and reduce (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
tire life, and excessive temperature http://www.safercar.gov; or write
can lead to sudden tire failure. The to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

– CONTINUED –
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA)

New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Index

14
14-2 Index

A iPod® operations .................................................... 5-28

Abbreviation ................................................................... 2 Power and audio controls ......................................... 5-7
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-30 Satellite radio operations ......................................... 5-16
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20 Set ........................................................................ 5-4
Access key ................................................................. 2-9 USB storage device operations ................................ 5-28
Warning light ......................................................... 3-25 Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-41
Accessories....................................................... 5-3, 11-43 Sensor .................................................................. 3-42
Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10 Auto-dimming mirror................................... 3-51, 3-57, 3-58
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-17 Automatic climate control system................................... 4-5
Air conditioner Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-23
Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5 Fluid ........................................................... 11-20, 12-8
Manual climate control system................................... 4-6 Manual mode ......................................................... 7-27
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-10 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-18
Airflow selection........................................................... 4-6 Select lever ........................................................... 7-24
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-25 Shift lock function ................................................... 7-25
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-24 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-15
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-35 Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-25
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-3 B
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-30 Battery .................................................................... 11-41
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-26 Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-8
Armrest..................................................................... 1-14 Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-12 Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-54
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18 Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-19
Audio Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-56
Antenna system....................................................... 5-3 Bluetooth® audio ........................................................ 5-39
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-25 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-31
Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 5-39 Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
CD player operation ............................................... 5-19 Brake
Control button........................................................ 5-37 Assist.................................................................... 7-30
FM/AM radio operation ........................................... 5-10 Booster ....................................................... 7-29, 11-26
 Index 14-3
Disc ..................................................................... 12-9 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
Fluid............................................................ 11-24, 12-8 light ....................................................................... 3-16
Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-28 Checking
Parking ................................................................. 7-37 Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-26
Pedal .................................................................. 11-26 Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-26
System ................................................................. 7-29 Clutch function ..................................................... 11-27
Brake pedal Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-27
Free play ............................................................. 11-26 Coolant level........................................................ 11-16
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-26 Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid).................. 11-20
Brake system ............................................................ 7-29 Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-24
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21 Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-25
Braking ..................................................................... 7-29 Fluid level (power steering fluid) ............................. 11-23
Tips...................................................................... 7-29 Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-35
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-28 Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-11
Bulb Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-21
Chart .................................................................. 12-14 Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
Replacing............................................................. 11-43 Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-31
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-28
C Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Cargo area Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-35
Cover ................................................................... 6-15 Child safety ................................................................... 5
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-53 Locks.................................................................... 2-31
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-17 Chime
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Key........................................................................ 3-4
Center Light ..................................................................... 3-41
Console .................................................................. 6-6 Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Changing Cleaning
Coolant................................................................ 11-16 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6 Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-13 Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17 Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
14-4 Index

Automatic................................................................ 4-5 Deicer ....................................................................... 3-49

Manual ................................................................... 4-6 Differential gear oil
Clock................................................................ 3-32, 3-33 Front........................................................... 11-21, 12-7
Clutch Rear ........................................................... 11-22, 12-7
Fluid............................................................ 11-25, 12-8 Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Pedal .................................................................. 11-27 Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-29
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-30
Console ...................................................................... 6-6 Dome light ......................................................... 6-2, 11-51
Continuously variable transmission............................... 7-23 Door
Fluid............................................................ 11-21, 12-8 Locks..................................................................... 2-6
Manual mode ........................................................ 7-27 Open indicator light................................................. 3-23
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-18 Open warning light.................................................. 3-23
Select lever ........................................................... 7-24 Step light............................................................. 11-53
Shift lock function................................................... 7-25 Double trip meter......................................................... 3-9
Coolant............................................................ 11-16, 12-8 Drive belts ............................................................... 11-19
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16 Driving
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16 All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-24
Cooling system ......................................................... 11-15 AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4 Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Crossbars ................................................................. 8-14 Drinking..................................................................... 6
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-41 Drugs........................................................................ 7
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32 Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-32 Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-8 Pets.......................................................................... 8
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-9 Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-9 Tips ................................................. 7-22, 7-28, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
D Winter .................................................................... 8-8
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-43
Defogger................................................................... 3-49 E
Defrosting ................................................................... 4-8 ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-11
 Index 14-5
Electrical system........................................................ 12-9 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .......... 7-31 Switch................................................................... 3-44
Warning ................................................................ 3-22 Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-63
Electronic parking brake.............................................. 7-37 Front
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal......... 7-38 Differential gear oil........................................ 11-21, 12-7
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-38 Fog light............................................ 3-44, 11-46, 12-14
Warning ........................................................ 3-22, 7-40 Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-32
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-15 Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-23
Engine Turn signal light.................................................... 11-45
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9 Front fog light........................................................... 11-46
Coolant........................................................ 11-16, 12-8 Bulb.......................................................... 11-46, 12-14
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Hood .................................................................... 11-7 Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18 Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-3
Oil............................................................... 11-11, 12-4 Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8
Overheating .......................................................... 9-13 Power seat ............................................................. 1-4
Starting & stopping........................................... 7-8, 7-11 Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Event data recorder......................................................... 9 Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2 Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
F Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6 Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-14 Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fluid level Fuses ..................................................................... 11-42
Automatic transmission .......................................... 11-20 Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
Brake .................................................................. 11-24
Clutch.................................................................. 11-25 G
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-21 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Power steering ..................................................... 11-23 Glove box................................................................... 6-6
Fog light GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13
Bulb .......................................................... 11-46, 12-14
14-6 Index

H Indicator light
Hands-free system ..................................................... 5-44 Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-16
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-7, 9-2 Cruise control ........................................................ 3-32
Head restraint adjustment Cruise control set ................................................... 3-32
Front seat ............................................................... 1-8 Door open ............................................................. 3-23
Rear seat.............................................................. 1-12 Front fog light......................................................... 3-32
Headlight ......................................................... 3-41, 11-43 Headlight............................................................... 3-32
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14 High beam............................................................. 3-31
Control switch........................................................ 3-41 Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-23
Flasher ................................................................. 3-43 Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-30
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32 Security................................................................. 3-30
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-31 Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-30
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-42 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-31
Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-38 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-25
Indicator light......................................................... 3-23 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-25
Switch .................................................................. 7-39 Inside mirror ..................................... 3-50, 3-51, 3-57, 3-58
HomeLink® ........................................................ 3-51, 3-58 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Hook Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-36
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13 iPod® operations ........................................................ 5-28
Convenient tie-down............................................... 6-17
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-14 J
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14 Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Horn......................................................................... 3-65 Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-16
K
I Key............................................................................ 2-3
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3 Number .................................................................. 2-3
Light....................................................................... 3-4 Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-44 Replacement........................................................... 2-5
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-4 Keyless access entry function ...................................... 2-13
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-30 Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-9
 Index 14-7
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-17 Tail and rear side marker (Outback) ........................ 11-48
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-13 Tail light (Station wagon) ....................................... 11-48
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-15 Tail/Backup (Outback) ........................................... 11-49
Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 3-25 Trunk .................................................................. 11-53
When access key does not operate properly ............. 9-20 Turn signal ........................................ 3-43, 11-45, 11-47
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-19 Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-52
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12
L Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-23
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5 Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-18
License plate light ..................................................... 11-50 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-33
Light
Backup ................................................................ 11-47 M
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-53 Maintenance
Control switch........................................................ 3-41 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Daytime running............................................ 3-43, 11-46 Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-51 Seatbelt................................................................. 1-22
Door step............................................................. 11-53 Tips ...................................................................... 11-5
Front fog...................................................... 3-44, 11-46 Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Front side marker................................................... 3-41 Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4 Manual
License plate ........................................................ 11-50 Climate control system ............................................. 4-6
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-52 Mode .................................................................... 7-27
Parking ................................................................ 11-46 Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Rear combination.................................................. 11-47 Transmission ......................................................... 7-21
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-47 Transmission oil ........................................... 11-19, 12-7
Rear turn signal (Sedan) ........................................ 11-47 Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-52
Rear turn signal (Station wagon) ............................. 11-48 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-20
Stop light ............................................................. 11-47 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-7
Stop/Tail (Sedan) .................................................. 11-47 Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-49
Stop/Tail and rear side marker (Legacy)................... 11-47 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-50
Tail...................................................................... 11-47 Moonroof................................................................... 2-39
14-8 Index Index 14-9
Multi function display .................................................. 3-33 Power Recommended Door step light ..................................................... 11-53
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-8 Automatic transmission fluid .................................... 12-8 Front fog light....................................................... 11-46
N Outlets .................................................................. 6-10 Brake fluid............................................................. 12-8 Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-45
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2 Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-63 Clutch fluid ............................................................ 12-8 Headlight............................................................. 11-43
Seat....................................................................... 1-4 Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8 License plate light................................................. 11-50
O Steering ................................................................ 7-29 Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4 Map light ............................................................. 11-52
Odometer.................................................................... 3-8 Steering fluid................................................ 11-23, 12-8 Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-7 Parking light......................................................... 11-46
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 Windows ............................................................... 2-31 Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-7 Rear combination light .......................................... 11-47
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-13 Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-25, 1-68 Power steering fluid................................................ 12-8 Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-47
Oil level Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8 Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-7 Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-47
Engine................................................................. 11-11 Printed antenna........................................................... 5-3 Spark plugs........................................................... 12-9 Stop/Tail and rear side marker light (Legacy) ........... 11-47
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21 Push-button Refueling .................................................................... 7-4 Stop/Tail light (Sedan) ........................................... 11-47
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-19 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5 Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-13 Tail and rear side marker light (Outback) ................. 11-48
Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-22 Starting and stopping engine.............................. 7-8, 7-11 Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-19 Tail light (Station wagon) ....................................... 11-48
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18 Replacement Tail/Backup light (Outback) .................................... 11-49
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-17 R Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-27 Trunk light ........................................................... 11-53
Outside Rear Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-37 Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-52
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-49 Combination lights ................................................ 11-47 Replacing Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12
Mirrors .................................................................. 3-63 Differential gear oil........................................ 11-22, 12-7 Access key battery................................................ 11-54 Roof rails with integrated cross bars ............................. 8-14
Overhead console ........................................................ 6-8 Gate ............................................................. 2-37, 9-22 Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-17
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13 Turn signal light.................................................... 11-47 Battery (keyless access with push-button start S
Rear seat ................................................................... 1-9 system).............................................................. 11-54 Safety
Armrest ................................................................. 1-14 Battery (remote engine start transmitter) ................... 7-19 Precautions when driving............................................. 4
P Battery (remote keyless entry system) ..................... 11-56
Parking ..................................................................... 7-37 Folding down ......................................................... 1-11 Symbol...................................................................... 2
Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-12 Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-21 Warnings ................................................................... 2
Brake ................................................................... 7-37 Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-43, 12-14
Light.................................................................... 11-46 Reclining ............................................................... 1-10 Satellite radio ............................................................. 5-16
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-18 Backup light (Legacy) ............................................ 11-47 Seat
Tips...................................................................... 7-41 Brake/tail light....................................................... 11-47
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Rear window Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Defogger ............................................................... 3-49 Cargo area light .................................................... 11-53 Front...................................................................... 1-2
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 Daytime running light............................................. 11-46
Pocket ........................................................................ 6-8 Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-48 Heater.................................................................... 1-8
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39 Dome light ........................................................... 11-51 Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
14-10 Index Index 14-11
Memory function ...................................................... 1-5 Starting & stopping engine..................................... 7-8, 7-11 Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-28 Identification ........................................................ 12-17
Power..................................................................... 1-4 State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7 Tools .......................................................................... 9-3 Symbols .................................................................... 3
Rear....................................................................... 1-9 Steering wheel Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-33, 1-35 Vehicle Dynamics Control
Seatbelt ................................................................. 4, 1-14 Power ................................................................... 7-29 Towing...................................................................... 9-14 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-25
Fastening.............................................................. 1-16 Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-64 All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17 OFF switch ............................................................ 7-34
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-22 Stop light................................................................. 11-47 Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16 Operation indicator light........................................... 3-24
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-23 Storage compartment................................................... 6-5 Hooks................................................................... 9-14 System.................................................................. 7-32
Safety tips............................................................. 1-14 Sun shade................................................................. 2-40 Weight.................................................................. 8-20 Warning light.......................................................... 3-24
Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-13 Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4 Trailer Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Security Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-38 Connecting............................................................ 8-18
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-25 Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5 Hitch ............................................................ 8-18, 8-24 W
ID plate................................................................... 2-5 Towing.................................................................. 8-20 Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-12
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-4 T Towing tips............................................................ 8-26 Warning chimes
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Tachometer................................................................ 3-10 Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9 Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-25
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-30 Temperature gauge..................................................... 3-11 Trunk lid ........................................................... 2-35, 9-21 Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
Select lever ............................................................... 7-24 Temperature warning light Release handle ..................................................... 2-36 Warning light
Position indicator ................................................... 3-30 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18 Trunk light................................................................ 11-53 ABS...................................................................... 3-20
Shift lock function................................................... 7-25 Coolant ................................................................. 3-16 Turn signal Access key ............................................................ 3-26
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-30 Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2 Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-31 All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-24
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-14 Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-33, 1-35 Lever.................................................................... 3-43 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18
Snow tires........................................................ 8-11, 11-28 Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14 Brake system......................................................... 3-21
Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10 Tire................................................................. 11-28, 12-9 U Charge.................................................................. 3-17
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-21 Chains .................................................................. 8-11 Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-18 CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-16
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-19, 12-9 Inspection............................................................ 11-30 USB storage device operations.................................... 5-28 Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-16
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-30 Door open ............................................................. 3-23
Speedometer............................................................... 3-8 Replacement........................................................ 11-34 V Engine low oil level................................................. 3-18
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-38 Rotation .............................................................. 11-33 Valet mode................................................................ 2-29 Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-25
SRS airbag system Size and pressure .................................................. 12-9 Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-5, 11-52 Low fuel ................................................................ 3-23
Monitors................................................................ 1-65 Types.................................................................. 11-28 Light.................................................................... 11-52 Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-18
Servicing............................................................... 1-67 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-35, 9-9, 11-28 Vehicle Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-17
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15 Warning light.......................................................... 3-18 Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13 Seatbelt................................................................. 3-13
14-12 Index
GAS STATION REFERENCE
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-15 & Fuel: & Engine oil capacity:
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-24 Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI 2.5 L models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-23 (90 RON) or higher. 3.6 L models: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-20 & Fuel octane rating The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
Washing ................................................................... 10-2 based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3 Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-32 checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” F7-3. maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-35 & Fuel capacity: & Cold tire pressure:
Balance ............................................................... 11-32 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-9 Refer to “Tires” F12-9.
Replacement ........................................................ 11-34 & Engine oil:
Windows................................................................... 2-31 Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further
Windshield details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-35 If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-46 engine oil described as follows.
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-37 . API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-49 CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
Winter . or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
Driving.................................................................... 8-8 ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
Tires............................................................ 8-11, 11-28
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-45 F12-4.
Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-49
 MSA5M1404A
A2500BE-A
Issued April 2013
Printed in USA 07/13
2014A

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please
Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza, FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. see your Subaru dealer for a Product Brochure
P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 TOKYO, JAPAN detailing all currently available models.